BS4 N for non $ pdf · 2016. 2. 9. · Protein-2, a Calcium-sensitive Modulator of Photoreceptor...

U.S. Toll Free: (800) 272-2775 • Fax: (508) 429-5732 • Online: www.harvardapparatus.com N1

Molecular Biology

• Application Guide ............................................................see page N2

• Selection Guide ....................................................see pages N3 – N8

• Sample Prep Pipette Tips.................................see pages N9 – N16

• Sample Prep SpinColumns ...........................see pages N17 – N22

• Filtration Plates ...............................................see pages N23 – N24

• Dialysis Products for Sample Prep .............see pages N25 – N28

• ElectroPrep ......................................................see pages N29 – N32

• Interaction Studies .........................................see pages N32 – N42

• Accessories ......................................................see pages N36 – N42

• Dialyzer Membranes ......................................see pages N43 – N44

• Liposomes ........................................................see pages N45 – N47

• Electrophoresis Equipment ...........................see pages N48 – N94

• Microcentrifuges...........................................see pages N95 – N103

• Radiation Protection Products.................see pages N104 – N115

• Pipettors and Accessories ........................see pages N116 – N121

• COPAS Flow Cytometry ............................see pages N122 – N123

• Spectrophotometers ..................................................see page N124

• Plate Readers ..............................................................see page N125

• Microplate Incubator..................................................see page N126

• Safety Aspiration System ..........................................see page N127

• FlexiSpence Auto Dispensers ...................................see page N128

• Hybridization Products .............................see pages N129 – N132

Micro TipColumn™, see page N12

96-Well Equilibrium DIALYZER™, see page N42

Hoefer Electrophoresis Gel Units,see pages N48 to N53

Scie-Plas Electrophoresis Gel Units, see pages N54 to N81

Biowave Spectrophotometer, see page N123

NEW

NEW

NEW

NEW

NEW

NEW

NEW

NEW

NEW

NEW

NEW

NEW

11,000 Specialty Products to Enhance Your BioresearchN2

Molecular BiologySp

ecia

lized

Too

ls F

or B

iore

sear

ch

i.e. Proteins, Nucleic Acids, Carbohydrates Chromato- Dialysis Equilibrium ElectroPrep Liposomes CoZapgraphic Dialysis

Acrylamide Removal •Affinity Purification •Antibody Production •Buffer Exchange • •Cancer Therapy •Carbohydrate Purification •Cell-Cell Interactions •Cosmetics •CsCI Removal •Destaining Gels •Detergent Removal • • •Diagnostics •DNA Binding Assays •Drug Delivery •Drug Entrapment Studies •Dye Removal • • •Electrophoresis •Enzyme Replacement Therapy •Extraction from Gels •Gene Therapy •Glycoprotein/Glycopeptide Purification •Immunoblotting •In Vitro Cell-Liposome Interaction Studies •Ligand Binding Assays •Lipid Purification •Mediated Delivery of Macromolecules •Metal Chelation Therapy •Nick Translation •PCR Cleanup • •Peptide Removal • • •Plasmid Purification •Primer Removal • •Protein Binding Assays •Protein Purification for HPLC/HPCE/GC • • •Protein Purification for Mass Spectroscopy(MALDI,GC/MS, MS-NMR,ESI-MS) • • •Protein-Drug Binding Assays •Protein-Protein Interactions •Purification of Samples with UnknownIsoelectric Points •Pyridoxal-5-Phosphate Removal •Radiolabel Removal • •Radiopharmaceutical Marker Tracing • •Receptor Binding Assays •Reconstitution Experiments (for Ion Transport) •Salt Removal • • •Sample Concentration • • •SDS Removal • • •Silicate Removal after Chromatography •Size Fractionation • •Small Molecule Removal • • •Time-Dependent Release Studies •

Application Guide for Sample Preparation of Biological Mixtures


Molecular Biology

Molecular BiologyTechnology Selection Guide

Dialysis

A physical separationmethod in which smallmolecules pass throughthe pores of a size selec-tive membrane while thelarger molecules areretained in the dialysis bagor chamber. In order todrive the equilibriummechanism the volume onthe outside must be about200 x the volume of theretained volume anddevoid of the small mole-cules of interest.

Electro Dialysis

A physical separationmethod in which themovement of the mole-cules through a semi-per-meable membrane isaccelerated by an electricfield so that moleculescan be separated quicklyby charge and size. Thistechnique is useful in sep-aration, collection andfractionation of large andsmall ionic molecules.

EquilibriumDialysis

A specific application ofdialysis which is used tomeasure the amounts ofligand bound to macromol-ecules and the free ligandpresent in two compart-ments separated by a dial-ysis membrane. The con-centrations of ligand pro-vide information on variousbinding parameters suchas binding constants bind-ing capacity and the num-ber of binding sites.

Chromatography Methods (i.e., Tip Columns,PrepTips, ProTips and Spin Columns)

Physical separation methods, such as:

Hydrophilic - Molecules are bound to a functional group on amatrix in the organic phase and eluted in the aqueous phase;Hydrophobic - Molecules are bound to a functional group ona matrix in the aqueous phase and eluted in the organicphase;Gel filtration - The smaller molecules diffuse into the poresof the support material making their path and elution timelonger than the larger molecules that are excluded on theoutside of the particle. Hence the larger molecules elutefirst and the smaller ones elute later;Ion Exchange - Molecules are bound to an ionic functionalgroup on a matrix by charge.

1 Methods Moderate to Minimal Moderate to Minimal Minimal in dialysis, Minimaldevelopment time Considerable Considerable size only mode; moderate

to complex in size andcharge mode

2 Average time/ 5 minutes 5 minutes 5 minutes 1 to 24 hrs 3 to 5 minutes 3 to 24 hrsspeed of separation

3 Ability to collect Excellent Good Excellent Poor Excellent Fairspecific samplefractions-small molecules

4 Ability to collect Good Good Good Good Good Goodspecific samplefractions-largemolecules

5 Ability to separate Excellent Fair Excellent Poor Excellent Poormore than one set of components simultaneously

6 Sample Volumes a few microliters a few microliters a few microliters a few microliters a few microliters 96 well 50 to 200 µl(non flow thru to > 1 ml to > 5 ml to > 5 ml to > 5 ml to > 1 mlversions)

7 Number of Samples 1 to 96 1 to 96 1 to 96 1 to 96 1 1 to 96run simultaneously

8 Materials compatibility Medium to high Medium to high Medium to high Medium to high Medium to high Medium to highfor maximum activityrecovery

9 Auxiliary equipment centrifuge, centrifuge, centrifuge, Stirrer, 200 VDC,100 mA 200 VDC,100 mApipettor pipettor pipettor temperature controller power supply, rotator power supply, rotator

10 Sterilizable CHEMICALLY CHEMICALLY CHEMICALLY CHEMICALLY CHEMICALLY CHEMICALLY

11 Suitable for organic YES YES YES YES YES YES& aqueous solutions

12 Suitable for high YES YES YES YES YES YESthroughput screening (HTS)

Absorption Size exclusion Ion exchange

Recommended LiteratureDialysisJames B. Ames, Alexander M. Dizhoor, Mitsuhiko Ikura, Krzysztof Palczewski, and Lubert Stryer, “Three-dimensional Structure of Guanylyl Cyclase ActivatingProtein-2, a Calcium-sensitive Modulator of Photoreceptor Guanylyl Cyclases”, The Journal of Biological Chemistry, Vol. 274, No. 27, pp. 19329-19337, 1999.

Electro Dialysis1) Zuo, Xun & Speicher, David; “A Method for Global Analysis of Complex Proteoms Using Sample Prefractionation by Solution Isoelectrofocusing Prior to Two-Dimensional Electrophoresis”; Analytical Biochemistry, Vol. 284, pp. 266-278, 2000. 2) ElectroPrep™ User Manual.

Equilibrium Dialysis1) Kariv, Hong, & Oldenburg; “Development of a High Throughput Equilibrium Dialysis Method”; Journal of Pharmaceutical Sciences; Vol. 90, No. 5, pp. 580-587,2001. 2)Guide to Equilibrium Dialysis, ED-96 Users Manual.

Footnote: Membranes are used in Dialysis, Electro Dialysis and Equilibrium Dialysis and can be damaged by high temperature.


Molecular BiologySp

ecia

lized

Too

ls F

or B

iore

sear

ch

SINGLE USE DISPOSABLE CHROMATOGRAPHIC PRODUCTSSample Materials & Binding Packing Materials

Volumes (µl) Tip Volumes Capacity (µg/tip)

min max Gel filtration (V0=KD)volume volume (Sephadex 45-90 microns)

TIPS G10= G25= G50= G100= P2= P6=700D 5KD 30KD 100KD 2KD 6KD

Ultra-Micro TipColumn™ 10 25 PP body

• • • • • •A wide selection of pre-packed chromatographic PE fritmaterials in pipette tip formats, see page N11 300 µl

Micro TipColumn™ 25 75 PP body

• • • • • •A wide selection of pre-packed chromatographic PE frit 1.0materials in pipette tip formats, see page N12 300 µl

Ultra-Micro PrepTip™ (patented) 1 10 PP body

0.5A revolutionary fritless chromatographic device. no fritDoes separation without clogging, see page N15 10 µl

Micro PrepTip™ (patented) 10 100 PP bodyA revolutionary fritless chromatographic device no frit 1.0Does separation without clogging, see page N15 200 µl

Macro PrepTip™ (patented) 100 500 PP bodyA revolutionary fritless chromatographic device no frit 5.0Does separation without clogging, see page N15 1,000 µl

Ultra-Micro ProTip™ 1 10 PP bodyContains a hydrophilic polymer material which PE frit 0.2binds 5 to 10X more protein than silica, see page N16 10 µl

Micro ProTip™ 10 100 PP bodyContains a hydrophilic polymer material which PE frit 1.5binds 5 to 10X more protein than silica, see page N16 200 µl

Macro ProTip™ 100 500 PP bodyContains a hydrophilic polymer material which PE frit 9.0binds 5 to 10X more protein than silica, see page N16 1,000 µl

SPINCOLUMNSUltra-Micro SpinColumn™ 10 25 PP body, PE frits

• • • • • •A wide selection of packed chromatographic (PE cap for materials in SpinColumn formats, see page N18 gels only) 300 µl

Micro SpinColumn™ 25 75 PP body, PE frits

• • • • • •A wide selection of packed chromatographic (PE cap for 1.0materials in SpinColumn formats, see page N19 gels only) 300 µl

Macro SpinColumn™ 75 150 PP body

• • • • • •A wide selection of packed chromatographic materials PE frit 15 to 30in SpinColumn formats, 1 sample collection tube, PE capssee pages N20 and N21 1,000 µl

96-Well SpinColumn™ 25 100 PC body

• • • • • •A 96-wellplate for HTS sample prep, PE frit < 1.02 samplecollection plates, see page N22 300 µl

PP=Polypropylene; PE= Polyethylene; PC=Polycarbonate

C18, C8, C4 ****=Vydac, ** Polyvinylalcohol, *** Polyhydroxyethyl Aspartamide

Guide to Sample Preparation Products


Molecular Biology

Molecular Biology

Packing Materials

Hydrophobic Hydrophillic Ion exchange (Sepharose): Miscellaneous Empty Column(particle size 15-20 microns) SA=Quaternary Amine; WA=cross-linked IMAC†= (Imidodiacetate on & Frit Size

Diethylaminoethyl; SP=Sulphopropyl; cross linked divinyl benzene) (microns)CM=Carboxymethyl 12mu; 300A

C18 C8 C4 silica CN NH2 PVOH PHEA Strong Weak Strong Weak Activated Cellulose Detergent IMAC 5-10 20 40**** **** **** ** *** Anion Anion Cation Cation Charcoal CAS 9004-34-6 Removal

Q DEAE SP CM CAS 74440-44-0

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • STD •

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • STD

• • • • • •

• • • • • •

• • • • • •

•

•

•

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • STD •

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • STD

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • STD •


STD


Molecular BiologySp

ecia

lized

Too

ls F

or B

iore

sear

ch

DIALYSIS/ELECTRO DIALYSIS PRODUCTSSample Volumes (µl) Membranes (Da or µm)

Number of Materials Regenerated Cellulose MWCO (Da)Membranes

REUSABLE IMMERSIBLE CHAMBERS min max 1K 2K 5K 10K 25K 50K

DIALYZER 10 5,000 1 PTFE

• • • • • •Drop-in, re-usable dialysis chamber(Ten chamber sizes available)

Fast DIALYZER 50 5,000 2 PTFE

• • • • • •Drop-in, re-usable two-sided dialysischamber (8 chamber sizes available)

SpinDIALYZER™ 10 1,500 1 PTFE

• • • • • •Drop-in, re-usable dialysis chamberwith built-in magnet (8 chamber sizes available)

Fast SpinDIALYZER™ 50 1,500 2 PTFE

• • • • • •Drop-in, re-usable, two-sided dialysis chamberwith built-in magnet (6 chamber sizes available)

ElectroPrep™ (patented) 25 >1,500 up to six PTFE

• • • • • •Ultra-fast, single or multi-chambered dialysissystem capable of separating by size & charge

REUSABLE FLOW-THRUFlow-Thru Fast DIALYZER 50 >10,000 2 PTFE

• • • • • •Drop-in, continuous flow, single chambered,in-line dialysis system (4 chamber sizes available)

Flow-Thru DIALYZER 20 >10,000 1 PTFE

• • • • • •Continuous flow, high surface area, in-linedialysis system (5 chamber sizes available)

SINGLE USE DIALYSIS PRODUCTS

Ultra-Micro DispoDIALYZER™ (patented) 1 5 1 PC body• • • • • •PP tube

Micro DispoDIALYZER™ (patented) 5 100 1 PC body• • • • • •PP head

PE cap

Macro Fast DispoDIALYZER 1,000 10,000 2 PP• •

96-Well DispoDIALYZER 25 300 1/chamber PP chamber• • • • •PE cap

PTFE=Teflon™; PP=Polypropylene; PE= Polyethylene; PC=Polycarbonate



Molecular Biology

Molecular Biology

Membranes (Da or µm) Ordering information

Cellulose Acetate (Aqueous/ organic) MWCO (Da) Polycarbonate (Aqueous/organic/autoclavable) pore size, (µm)

100 500 1K 2K 5K 10K 25K 50K 100K 300K 0.01 0.05 0.1 0.6(100K) (800K) (1.1M) (2.5M)

• • • • • • • • • • • • • •Includes chamber and 1 cap; (membranes,stirrer plate and stir bar sold separately),

see page N26

• • • • • • • • • • • • • •Includes chamber and 2 caps; (membranes,

stirrer plate and stir bar sold separately),see page N27

• • • • • • • • • • • • • •Includes chamber with magnet and cap;

(membranes and stirrer plate sold separately),see page N28

• • • • • • • • • • • • • •Includes chamber with magnet and 2 caps;

(membranes and stirrer plate sold separately),see page N28

• • • • • • • • • • • • • •Includes tank with seal and lid with leads;(chambers, membranes and power supply

sold separately), see page N29-N31

• • • • • • • • • • • • • •Includes chamber, fittings and 2 caps

(membranes, tubing and pump sold separately),see page N32

• • • • • • • • • • • • • •Includes chambers, membranes, fittings,

clamp and allen wrench;(sold with or without pump), see page N33

• •Includes chambers with membrane and 2

sample tubes (1.5 ml) per chamber;(centrifuge recommended, sold separately), see page N34

• •Includes chambers with membrane, flotation ring,

cap and 2 sample tubes (1.5 ml) per chamber;(stirrer plate and stir bar sold separately), see page N35

Includes chamber, 2 locking rings and 2 membranes; (stirrer plate and stir bar sold

separately), see page N36

Includes plate with membrane and 12 strip caps;(stirrer plate and stir bar sold separately), see page N37



Molecular BiologySp

ecia

lized

Too

ls F

or B

iore

sear

ch


EQUILIBRIUM DIALYSIS PRODUCTS for binding studies, protein-protein interactions and protein-drug binding assays

Sample Number of Stirring Materials Membranes Specials OrderingVolumes (µl) Membranes Device MWCO (Da) Accepted Information

min max RegeneratedCellulose

REUSABLE EQUILIBRIUM DIALYSIS PRODUCTSMulti-Equilibrium DIALYZER™ 188 250 1/Chamber Built-in PTFE 5,000 or YesUp to 20 parallel equilibrium assays 750 1,000 chamber 10,000

1,500 2,000 Delrin™

3,750 5,000 plugs

Micro-Equilibrium DIALYZER™ 19 25 1 No PTFE ULTRA thin YesA re-usable equillibrium dialysis 2- or 38 50 body 5,000 or3-chamber system for studying protein 75 100 10,000binding assays 188 250

375 500

Fast Micro Equilibrium DIALYZER™ 19 25 1 No Acetal ULTRA thin YesBody 5,000 or

10,000

SINGLE USE EQUILIBRIUM DIALYSIS PRODUCTSDispo Equilibrium DIALYZER™ 25 75 1 PP body 5,000 or YesSingle sample, single use product PE caps 10,000for interaction studies

96-Well Equilibrium DIALYZER™ 50 200 1/Chamber Rotator PP body 5,000 or YesSingle use product for 96 simultaneous PE caps 10,000assays

PTFE=Teflon™; PP=Polypropylene; PE= Polyethylene; PC=Polycarbonate

Includes Drive Unit, 1package of 200 mem-branes (10,000MWCO), 20 emptyingstoppers, 4 carriers,120 plugs, 24 spac-ers, 1 filling clampand stand; 20 cells;(Tank for temperaturecontrol available asan option).see page N39

Includes 1 or 5 cham-bers, 1 link and 2caps in a package for2-chamber system;(membranes soldseparately).Additional links for 3-chamber system andother membranesizes available.see page N40

Includes 1 or 5chambers per package;(membranes soldspeparately)see page N41

Includes chamberswith membrane, 2caps (one black, onewhite) and 2 sampletubes (0.65 ml) perchamber; 2 specialpipette tips included;(centrifuge recom-mended and soldseparately).see page N41

Includes plates w/membranes, 12 topstrips and 12 bottomstrips; (rotator soldseparately).see page N42


Molecular Biology

Sample Prep Pipette Tips

Ultra-Microand MicroTipColumn™

MicroTipColumncontains a packedcolumn of chromatographicmaterial from awide selectionoffered by HarvardApparatus.Simple, fast andeasy to use – a SpinColumn inpipette tip format,see page N11

Sample Prep Pipette TipsSample Prep Pipette Tips are easy to use;simply draw a mixed sample into the pipettetip and a material contained within the tipbinds the desired component of the sample.The unbound components of the sample canthen be washed away allowing the desiredsample component to be eluted, free of contaminants. The speed and simplicity ofthis method, coupled with the wide-range ofavailable binding materials, have madeHarvard Apparatus sample prep tips anextremely popular product for a multitude ofapplications including:

Applications

• Protein purification

• Peptide purification

• Salt removal

• Detergent removal

• Dye-terminator removal

• Affinity purification

• Oligonucleotide purification

• DNA purification

• Carbohydrate purification

• Glycoprotein purification

• Glycopeptide purification

• Mass spectrometry (MALDI-TOF, ESI-MS)

• HPLC

• High performance capillary electrophoresis (HPCE)

Harvard Apparatus Pipette Tip Family

Purification Media

Frit

Key

PrepTip™

The revolutionarynew interior surface coating ofPrepTip pipette tipmeans your sample can flowfreely through thetip opening allowing rapid andeasy sample prep!see pages N13 to N15

ProTip™

ProTip pipette tipcontains ahydrophilic polymer materialwhich binds 5 to10 times more pro-tein than silicabased materials,see page N16


Sample Prep Pipette TipsSp

ecia

lized

Too

ls F

or B

iore

sear

ch

Ultra-Micro and Micro TipColumns™

Ultra-Micro and Micro TipColumnsare a simple and fast way to performsmall sample preparation based onthe physical properties of the sample. The columns consist ofmicro-pipette tips containing one ofa wide range of available columnmaterials contained by frits and/orcap. The sample can be applied tothe top of the column or suctionedthrough the column using a micro-pipette. The sample is thenpurified according to size andshape, chemical composition,charge or other physico-chemicalproperties by selecting the appro-priate column material.

Applications:

• Sample concentration



• Salt removal

• Buffer exchange

• Radiolabel removal


• Dye-terminator removal




• Carbohydrate purification

• Glycoprotein purification

• Glycopeptide purification

• Mass spectrometry (MALDI, ESI-MS)

• HPLC


Advantages:

• Fast, simple, easy to use

• Unrivaled range of column materialsavailable

• No special equipment necessary; uses standard pipette

• Suitable for samples from 10 to 25 µland 25 to 75 µl

How to Use:Ultra-Micro and Micro TipColumns

Contaminants

Purification Media

Frit

Desired Component

Key

Step 3

Step 2

Step 1

Done!

Amino (NH2)

MicroTipColumns

DetergentRemoval

CelluloseI

IMAC

Weak Anion

Strong Cation

Weak Cation

ActivatedCharcoal

Cyano (CN)

C18

C8

C4

SilicaG-100

P-2

P-6

Strong Anion Hydrophilic

G-10

G-25

G-50

Misc.

IonExchange

Hydrophilic(polar)

Hydrophobic(non-polar)

GelFiltration

Mixed sample

Add the sample tothe top of the MicroTipColumn

Can also aspiratesample into theMicro TipColumn

Wash awayunbound samplecomponents

Elute sample fromthe column withsuitable elutionbuffer

Purified sample inunder 1 minute!


Molecular Biology


How Ultra-Micro TipColumns are Used

Mechanism Type of Functional Sample Solvents Elute Bound Types of Packingof Binding Groups Bound Bound from... Compounds with... Material Available

Reverse Nonpolar groups Polar solutions Less polar solvents C4, C8, C18,Phase Extraction (e.g. aromatic and alkyl groups) (e.g. aqueous buffers) (e.g. acetonitrile, methanol and water) Hydrophobic polymer

Normal Polar groups Nonpolar solvents Polar solvent mixtures Silica, Amino, Cyano,Phase Extraction (e.g. hydroxyl and amine groups) Hydrophilic

Cation Exchange Positively charged groups Low ionic strength Ionic buffers Weak cation exchanger,(e.g. amines) aqueous solutions (e.g. acetate, citrate and phosphate) Strong cation exchanger

Anion Exchange Negatively charged groups Low ionic strength Ionic buffers Weak anion exchanger,(e.g. organic acids) aqueous solutions (e.g. phosphate and acetate) Strong anion exchanger

Ultra-Micro TipColumn™ - Samples from 10 µl to 25 µl

* Polyacrylamide-based gel filtration**IMAC (immobilized metal affinity chromatography - for purification of Histidine tagged proteins and other phospho proteins/peptides)

Ultra-Micro TipColumns™: Ordering Information

Package Quantity

Packing Material Qty. of 25 Qty. of 100 Qty. of 25 Qty. of 100 Qty. of 25 Qty. of 100 Qty. of 25 Qty. of 100 $ for 25 $ for 100

Gel Filtration

G-10 BS4 74-7120 BS4 74-7100 – – – – – –

G-25 BS4 74-7121 BS4 74-7101 – – – – – – 44.00 109.00

G-50 BS4 74-7122 BS4 74-7102 – – – – – –

G-100 BS4 74-7123 BS4 74-7103 – – – – – – 44.00 109.00

P-2 * BS4 74-7124 BS4 74-7104 – – – – – –

P-6 * BS4 74-7125 BS4 74-7105 – – – – – – 55.00 142.00

Hydrophobic

C18 – – BS4 74-7126 BS4 74-7106 – – – – 55.00 136.00

C8 – – BS4 74-7127 BS4 74-7107 – – – –

C4 – – BS4 74-7128 BS4 74-7108 – – – – 55.00 136.00

Hydrophilic

Silica – – BS4 74-7129 BS4 74-7109 – – – – 55.00 136.00

Cyano (CN) – – BS4 74-7130 BS4 74-7110 – – – –

Amino (NH2) – – BS4 74-7131 BS4 74-7111 – – – – 55.00 136.00

Hydrophilic – – BS4 74-7132 BS4 74-7112 – – – –

Ion Exchange

Strong Anion – – – – BS4 74-7133 BS4 74-7113 – –

Weak Anion – – – – BS4 74-7134 BS4 74-7114 – – 55.00 136.00

Strong Cation – – – – BS4 74-7135 BS4 74-7115 – –

Weak Cation – – – – BS4 74-7136 BS4 74-7116 – – 55.00 136.00

Misc.

Cellulose – – – – – – BS4 74-7137 BS4 74-7117 44.00 109.00

Detergent Removal – – – – – – BS4 74-7138 BS4 74-7118

IMAC ** – – – – – – BS4 74-7139 BS4 74-7119 248.00 565.00

Empty Columns Qty. of 25 Qty. of 100 $ for 25 $ for 100

5 µm Frit BS4 74-4921 BS4 74-4920 – – – – – – 47.00 99.00

20 µm Frit BS4 74-4901 BS4 74-4900 – – – – – –

40 µm Frit BS4 74-4931 BS4 74-4930 – – – – – – 47.00 99.00



How Micro TipColumns are Used

Mechanism Type of Functional Sample Solvents Elute Bound Types of Packingof Binding Groups Bound Bound from... Compounds with... Material Available


Normal Polar groups Nonpolar solvents Polar solvent mixtures Silica, Amino, Cyano,Phase Extraction (e.g. hydroxyl and amine groups) Hydrophilic

Cation Exchange Positively charged groups Low ionic strength Ionic buffers Weak cation exchanger,(e.g. amines) aqueous solutions (e.g. acetate, citrate and phosphate) Strong cation exchanger

Anion Exchange Negatively charged groups Low ionic strength Ionic buffers Weak anion exchanger,(e.g. organic acids) aqueous solutions (e.g. phosphate and acetate) Strong anion exchanger

* Polyacrylamide-based gel filtration**IMAC (immobilized metal affinity chromatography - for purification of Histidine tagged proteins and other phospho proteins/peptides)

Micro TipColumn™ - Samples from 25 µl to 75 µl

Micro TipColumns: Ordering Information

Gel Filtration Silica Based Ion Exchange Miscellaneous

Packing Material Qty. of 25 Qty. of 100 Qty. of 25 Qty. of 100 Qty. of 25 Qty. of 100 Qty. of 25 Qty. of 100 $ for 25 $ for 100

Gel Filtration

G-10 BS4 74-5104 BS4 74-5100 – – – – – –

G-25 BS4 74-5105 BS4 74-5101 – – – – – – 49.00 114.00

G-50 BS4 74-5106 BS4 74-5102 – – – – – –

G-100 BS4 74-5107 BS4 74-5103 – – – – – – 49.00 114.00

P-2 * BS4 74-5408 BS4 74-5402 – – – – – –

P-6 * BS4 74-5409 BS4 74-5403 – – – – – – 60.00 148.00

Hydrophobic (non-polar)

C18 – – BS4 74-5207 BS4 74-5201 – – – – 60.00 148.00

C8 – – BS4 74-5208 BS4 74-5202 – – – –

C4 – – BS4 74-5209 BS4 74-5203 – – – – 60.00 148.00

Hydrophilic (polar)

Silica – – BS4 74-5206 BS4 74-5200 – – – – 60.00 148.00

Cyano (CN) – – BS4 74-5210 BS4 74-5204 – – – –

Amino (NH2) – – BS4 74-5211 BS4 74-5205 – – – – 60.00 148.00


Ion Exchange


Weak Anion – – – – BS4 74-5305 BS4 74-5301 – – 60.00 148.00


Weak Cation – – – – BS4 74-5307 BS4 74-5303 – – 60.00 148.00

Misc.

Active Charcoal – – – – – – BS4 74-5406 BS4 74-5400 68.00 156.00

Cellulose – – – – – – BS4 74-5407 BS4 74-5401

Detergent Removal – – – – – – BS4 74-5410 BS4 74-5404 60.00 148.00

IMAC ** – – – – – – BS4 74-5412 BS4 74-5413

Empty Columns Qty. of 25 Qty. of 100 $ for 25 $ for 100

5 µm Frit BS4 74-4921 BS4 74-4920 – – – – – – 47.00 99.00

20 µm Frit BS4 74-4901 BS4 74-4900 – – – – – –

40 µm Frit BS4 74-4931 BS4 74-4930 – – – – – – 47.00 99.00

Spec

ializ

ed T

ools

For

Bio

rese

arch


Molecular Biology


PrepTip is a revolutionary new method forcleaning and concentrating proteins andother biological samples for further instru-mental analysis. PrepTip’s unique, patentedfeature is that the interior walls of the tip arecoated with the sample-binding material.This interior coating technology makesPrepTip the only such product on the mar-ket, providing both speed and reliability.Since the tip opening is not plugged by theinterior coating process, the sample can flowfreely through the opening without backpressure. PrepTip can be used to clean orconcentrate any biological sample since theinterior walls of the tip can be coated withyour choice of binding media. Different bind-ing materials are offered by HarvardApparatus. Due to its unique features, samplepreparation with PrepTip is very fast, simpleand highly effective. PrepTip is well suited fora range of applications including mass spec-trometry, HPLC and automated samplepreparation methods.

Applications:

• Unique patented interior coating matrix means no more plugging of the tip opening

• Easy, rapid flow of sample due to the unobstructed tip opening ofPrepTip

• Different sample binding media to suit many sample types

• Effective for small samples (evenwith volumes less than 1 µl)

• No special equipment necessary -uses standard micro-pipette tip format

• Suitable for use with single or multi-channel pipetting devices

• Virtually ANY sample-binding mediacan be used in the solid matrix


Advantages:

• Patented

• Protein or peptide purification

• Salt removal


• Mass spectrometry


• Glycoprotein and glycopeptide purification

• MALDI-TOF

• HPLC

• High Performance CapillaryElectrophoresis (HPCE)

Done!

Step 3

Step 2

Step 1

How to Use:PrepTip

Start with amixed sample

Aspirate thesample intoand out of thetip in order toallow bindingof the sampleto the media

Wash away any unboundsample componentswith a suitablewashing solution

Elute the desired samplecomponents byaspirating asmall volume of a suitable solution into andout of the tip

Purified sample inabout 30 seconds!

Contaminants

Purification Media

Desired Component

Key

PrepTip™

U.S. Patent 6,537,502



ecia

lized

Too

ls F

or B

iore

sear

ch

Sample Preparation for HPLC Using C-18 PrepTip

Sample Mixture: Aprotinin (MW 6,500) in 100mM phosphate/acetate buffer

Before After

The unique process usedto coat the interior wallsof PrepTip allows the sam-ple to flow freely throughthe tip opening.

PrepTip™

How PrepTips are Used

Mechanism Type of Functional Sample Solvents Elute Bound Types of Tipof Binding Groups Bound Bound from... Compounds with... Coating Available


Normal Polar groups Nonpolar Polar solvent mixtures Silica, Amino, CyanoPhase Extraction (e.g. hydroxyl and amine groups) solvents (e.g. hexane, methylene chloride)

Desired samplecomponentsbound to PrepTip

Mixedsample

U.S. Patent 6,537,502

Ultra-Micro PrepTip™


Molecular Biology

Sample Prep Pipette Tips PrepTip™

PrepTip


Hydrophilic(polar) Amino (NH2)

Cyano (CN)

C4

C8

C18

Silica

NormalPhase

ReversedPhase

PrepTip™: Ordering Information

Ultra-Micro PrepTips Micro PrepTips Macro PrepTips1 to 10 µl Tips 10 to 100 µl Tips 100 to 500 µl Tips

Coating Material Qty. of 24 Qty. of 96 Qty. of 24 Qty. of 96 Qty. of 24 Qty. of 96


C4 BS4 74-3406 BS4 74-3407 BS4 74-3506 BS4 74-3507 BS4 74-3606 BS4 74-3607 $

C8 BS4 74-3404 BS4 74-3405 BS4 74-3504 BS4 74-3505 BS4 74-3604 BS4 74-3605 $ 55.00 164.00 64.00 191.00 87.00 262.00

C18 BS4 74-3402 BS4 74-3403 BS4 74-3502 BS4 74-3503 BS4 74-3602 BS4 74-3603 $

Hydrophilic (polar)

Silica BS4 74-3400 BS4 74-3401 BS4 74-3500 BS4 74-3501 BS4 74-3600 BS4 74-3601$

Amino (NH2) BS4 74-3408 BS4 74-3409 BS4 74-3508 BS4 74-3509 BS4 74-3608 BS4 74-3609 $ 55.00 164.00 64.00 191.00 87.00 262.00

Cyano (CN) BS4 74-3410 BS4 74-3411 BS4 74-3510 BS4 74-3511 BS4 74-3610 BS4 74-3611$

Harvard Apparatus offers three sizes of PrepTips to fit your specific applications:

• Ultra-Micro PrepTip™

For sample volumes from 1 µl to 10 µl, binding capacity 0.5 µg/tip

• Micro PrepTip™


• Macro PrepTip™


PrepTips are supplied in package of either 24 or 96 tips.



ecia

lized

Too

ls F

or B

iore

sear

ch

ProTip™

Catalog No. $ ProductBS4 74-3700 55.00 Ultra-Micro ProTip™ 1 to 10 µl, pkg. of 24

BS4 74-3701 164.00 Ultra-Micro ProTip™ 1 to 10 µl, pkg. of 96

BS4 74-3702 71.00 Micro ProTip™ 10 to 100 µl, pkg. of 24

BS4 74-3703 191.00 Micro ProTip™ 10 to 100 µl, pkg. of 96

BS4 74-3704 87.00 Macro ProTip™ 100 to 500 µl, pkg. of 24

BS4 74-3705 262.00 Macro ProTip™ 100 to 500 µl, pkg. of 96

Purification of Cytochrome-C in SDS-Tris-Glycine for MALDI-TOF Mass Spectrometry using ProTip

Done!

Step 3

Step 2

Step 1

How to Use:ProTip

Start with amixed sample

Aspirate thesample intoand out of thetip in order toallow bindingof the sampleto the media

Wash away anyunbound sam-ple compo-nents with asuitable wash-ing solution

Elute thedesired samplecomponents byaspirating asmall volume ofa suitable solu-tion into and outof the tip

Purified sam-ple in about 30seconds!

35000 4000025000 3000015000 200005000

Mass (m/2)

Cou

nts

2000

4000

6000

10000 35000 4000025000 3000015000 200005000

Mass (m/2)

Cou

nts

2000

4000

6000

8000

10000

A: Sample injected directly. B: Sample concentrationusing ProTip.

Contaminants

Purification Media

Desired Component

Key

Advantages:


• Highly effective, non-silica basedhydrophilic polymer material

• Easy, rapid flow of sample due tothe unobstructed tip opening ofProTip

• Effective for small samples (evenwith volumes less than 1 µl)

• Tip sizes available to suit a rangeof sample volumes

• No special equipment necessary -uses standard micro-pipette tips

• Suitable for use with single ormulti-channel pipetting devices

Applications:



• Salt removal


• Mass spectrometry

• MALDI

• High performance liquid chromatography (HPLC)


• ESI-MS

ProTip, one of Harvard Apparatus’ latestpatent-pending technologies, is a newmethod for cleaning and concentrating protein samples for further instrumentalanalysis. ProTip offers the same easy sampleflow of our PrepTip, but contains a smallquantity of a highly effective hydrophilic polymer material. The binding capacity of thepolymer used in ProTip is 5 to 10 times higher than that of silica-based materials.This polymer binds proteins in the presenceof organic solvents but does not bind impurities, such as salts and detergents, in thesample. After the protein is bound to thepolymer it can easily be eluted in an aqueoussolution, making purification and concentration of biological samples withProTip fast, simple, and highly effective.Three sizes are offered to meet your specificapplication. The Ultra-Micro ProTip includesone micro pipettor.


Molecular Biology

SpinColumns

Harvard Apparatus SpinColumn Family

Applications




• Small molecule, carbohydrateremoval


• Nick translation

• Affinity separation

• Salt removal

• Buffer exchange

Advantages

• Easy to use

• Multiple formats available – from single 10 µl sample volumes to high-throughput 96-well format

• Unrivaled selection of column packing materials

• Single use, disposable centrifugetube formats

• Quick high sample recovery

• Rapid sample preparation time

• Custom packed columns are available on request

Harvard Apparatus new generation of SpinColumns are designed for the purification of smallsamples (10 µl to 150 µl) in either single column or high-throughput 96-well format with astandard centrifuge

Our SpinColumns are pre-filled with a wide selection of chromatographic materials includinggel-filtration, ion-exchange, silica-based reverse- and normal-phase materials, as well as specific materials, such as charcoal or cellulose contained by frits and/or caps. The columnscan also be pre-filled with custom materials based on customer requests.

Simply place the SpinColumn in a centrifuge tube and centrifuge the tube briefly to separateyour sample. The column material binds and purifies the sample according to size and shape,chemical composition, charge or other physiochemical properties.

Introduction to SpinColumns™

Macro SpinColumn™

Handles volumes from 75 µl to 150 µl, see pages N20and N21.

96-WellSpinColumn™

High throughput sample prep applications, volumes 25 µl to 100 µl, see page N22.

Micro SpinColumn™

Handles volumes from 25 µl to 75 µl, see page N19.

Ultra-MicroSpinColumnVolumes from 10 µl to 25 µl,see page N18.

Harvard Apparatus offers four sizes ofSpinColumns to fit your specific applications:

• Ultra-Micro SpinColumnsFor sample volumes from 10 µl to 25 µl

• Micro SpinColumnsFor sample volumes 25 µl to 75 µl

• Macro SpinColumns For sample volumes from 75 µl to150 µl

• 96-Well SpinColumns For high throughput applications with sample volumes from 25 µl to 100 µl


SpinColumnsSp

ecia

lized

Too

ls F

or B

iore

sear

ch

Ultra-Micro SpinColumns™ - Samples from 10 µl to 25 µl

Applications:

• DNA, protein and peptide purification

• Small molecule, carbohydrate, salt andradiolabel removal



• Buffer exchange

Ultra-Micro SpinColumns are bestsuited for sample volumes from 10 µlto 25 µl. Centrifugation or filtrationunder vacuum or pressure can beused to run the sample through thecolumns. Results obtained from theMicro SpinColumns are highly reproducible and there is minimalsample loss. Each column includestwo 2 ml centrifuge tubes plus topcaps (for Gel Filtration) or frit.

Cat. No. $ ProductBS4 74-4421 47.00 Empty Columns, 5 µm Frit, Qty. of 25

BS4 74-4420 99.00 Empty Columns, 5 µm Frit, Qty. of 100





MicroSpinColumns

Cellulose

DetergentRemoval

ActivatedCharcoal

IMACG-100

P-2

P-6

G-10

G-25

G-50

Misc.

Weak Anion

Strong Cation

Weak Cation

Strong Anion

IonExchange

GelFiltration

C18

C8

C4


Amino (NH2)

Cyano (CN)

Silica

Hydrophilic(polar)

Hydrophilic

Advantages:


• Micro sample sizes

• Unrivaled selection ofcolumn packing materials; custompacked columns areavailable on request

• High sample recovery

BS4 74-7226

BS4 74-7220

Ultra-Micro SpinColumns: Ordering Information

Gel Filtration Silica Based Ion Exchange MiscellaneousPacking Material Qty. of 25 Qty. of 100 Qty. of 25 Qty. of 100 Qty. of 25 Qty. of 100 Qty. of 25 Qty. of 100 $ for 25 $ for 100

Gel Filtration

G-10 BS4 74-7220 BS4 74-7200 – – – – – –

G-25 BS4 74-7221 BS4 74-7201 – – – – – – 49.00 114.00

G-50 BS4 74-7222 BS4 74-7202 – – – – – –

G-100 BS4 74-7223 BS4 74-7203 – – – – – – 49.00 114.00

P-2 * BS4 74-7224 BS4 74-7204 – – – – – –

P-6 * BS4 74-7225 BS4 74-7205 – – – – – – 60.00 148.00


C18 – – BS4 74-7226 BS4 74-7206 – – – – 60.00 148.00

C8 – – BS4 74-7227 BS4 74-7207 – – – –

C4 – – BS4 74-7228 BS4 74-7208 – – – – 60.00 148.00

Hydrophilic (polar)

Silica – – BS4 74-7229 BS4 74-7209 – – – – 60.00 148.00

Cyano (CN) – – BS4 74-7230 BS4 74-7210 – – – –

Amino (NH2) – – BS4 74-7231 BS4 74-7211 – – – – 60.00 148.00


Ion Exchange


Weak Anion – – – – BS4 74-7234 BS4 74-7214 – – 60.00 148.00


Weak Cation – – – – BS4 74-7236 BS4 74-7216 – – 60.00 148.00

Misc.

Cellulose – – – – – – BS4 74-7237 BS4 74-7217 49.00 114.00

Detergent Removal – – – – – – BS4 74-7238 BS4 74-7218

IMAC ** – – – – – – BS4 74-7239 BS4 74-7219 248.00 565.00* Polyacrylamide-based gel filtration ** IMAC (immobilized metal affinity chromatography - for purification of histidine tagged proteins)


Molecular Biology

SpinColumns

Applications:

• DNA, protein and peptide purification

• Small molecule, carbohydrate, salt and radiolabel removal



• Buffer exchange

Micro SpinColumns™ - Samples from 25 µl to 75 µlMicro

SpinColumns

Cellulose

DetergentRemoval

ActivatedCharcoal

IMACG-100

P-2

P-6

G-10

G-25

G-50

Misc.

Weak Anion

Strong Cation

Weak Cation

Strong Anion

IonExchange

GelFiltration

C18

C8

C4


Amino (NH2)

Cyano (CN)

Silica

Hydrophilic(polar)

Hydrophilic

Advantages:


• Small sample sizes

• Unrivaled selection ofcolumn packing materials; custompacked columns areavailable on request


* Polyacrylamide-based gel filtration ** IMAC (immobilized metal affinity chromatography - for purification of histidine tagged proteins)

Micro SpinColumns are best suited forsample volumes from 25 to 75 µl.Centrifugation or filtration under vacu-um or pressure can be used to run thesample through the columns. Resultsobtained from the Micro SpinColumnsare highly reproducible and there isminimal sample loss. Each columnincludes two 2 ml centrifuge tubes plustop cap (for Gel Filtration) or frit.

Cat. No. $ ProductBS4 74-4421 47.00 Empty Columns, 5 µm Frit, Qty. of 25






BS4 74-4607

BS4 74-4504

Micro SpinColumns: Ordering Information


Gel Filtration

G-10 BS4 74-4504 BS4 74-4500 – – – – – –

G-25 BS4 74-4505 BS4 74-4501 – – – – – – 54.00 120.00

G-50 BS4 74-4506 BS4 74-4502 – – – – – –

G-100 BS4 74-4507 BS4 74-4503 – – – – – – 54.00 120.00

P-2 * BS4 74-4808 BS4 74-4802 – – – – – –

P-6 * BS4 74-4809 BS4 74-4803 – – – – – – 66.00 153.00


C18 – – BS4 74-4607 BS4 74-4601 – – – – 66.00 153.00

C8 – – BS4 74-4608 BS4 74-4602 – – – –

C4 – – BS4 74-4609 BS4 74-4603 – – – – 66.00 153.00

Hydrophilic (polar)

Silica – – BS4 74-4606 BS4 74-4600 – – – – 66.00 153.00

Cyano (CN) – – BS4 74-4610 BS4 74-4604 – – – –

Amino (NH2) – – BS4 74-4611 BS4 74-4605 – – – – 66.00 153.00

Hydrophilic – – BS4 74-4811 BS4 74-4805 – – – –Ion Exchange


Weak Anion – – – – BS4 74-4705 BS4 74-4701 – – 66.00 153.00


Weak Cation – – – – BS4 74-4707 BS4 74-4703 – – 66.00 153.00

Misc.


Cellulose – – – – – – BS4 74-4807 BS4 74-4801


IMAC ** – – – – – – BS4 74-4812 BS4 74-4813


SpinColumnsSp

ecia

lized

Too

ls F

or B

iore

sear

ch

How to Use:Macro SpinColumns

Step 2

Step 1

Step 2

Step 1

Step 3Done!

Done!

Size exclusion chromatography

SpinColumns

Apply the sample to the top of theSpinColumn

Centrifuge for 1minute at lowspeed

The purified sam-ple collects inreceiver tube whileimpurities remainin the column.

Centrifuge for 1minute at low speed.Impurities passthrough column andcollect in receivertube #1.

Apply the sampleto the top of theSpinColumn

The purified sam-ple collects inreceiver tube #2.

DesiredComponents

Purification Media

Contaminants

Key

Macro SpinColumn™ - Samples from 75 µl to 150 µl

Advantages:

• Easy to use

• Unrivaled selection of columnpacking materials



• Custom packed columns are available on request

Applications:








• Salt removal

• Buffer exchange

Solid phase extraction

SpinColumns

Place column intoreceiver tube #2.Add elution buffer to the column toremove bound components.Centrifuge brieflyto collect purifiedsample.

Simply place the SpinColumn in a centrifugetube and centrifuge the tube briefly to separate your sample. The column materialbinds and purifies the sample according tosize and shape, chemical composition,charge or othe physiochemical properties.


Molecular Biology

SpinColumnsMacro

SpinColumns

Cellulose

DetergentRemoval

ActivatedCharcoal

IMACG-100

P-2

P-6

G-10

G-25

G-50

Misc.

Weak Anion

Strong Cation

Weak Cation

Strong Anion

IonExchange

GelFiltration

C18

C8

C4


Amino (NH2)

Cyano (CN)

Silica

Hydrophilic(polar)

Hydrophilic

Macro SpinColumn™ - Samples from 75 µl to 150 µl

Macro SpinColumns are best suited for samples with volumes from 75 to 150 µl. In addition to the standard packing materialsdescribed in the ordering information,Macro SpinColumns can be filled with custom packing materials as desired. Eachcolumn includes two 2 ml centrifuge tubesand top and bottom caps.

Macro SpinColumns: Ordering Information


Gel Filtration

G-10 BS4 74-3904 BS4 74-3900 – – – – – –

G-25 BS4 74-3905 BS4 74-3901 – – – – – – 59.00 125.00

G-50 BS4 74-3906 BS4 74-3902 – – – – – –

G-100 BS4 74-3907 BS4 74-3903 – – – – – – 59.00 125.00

P-2 * BS4 74-4308 BS4 74-4302 – – – – – –

P-6 * BS4 74-4309 BS4 74-4303 – – – – – – 71.00 158.00


C18 – – BS4 74-4107 BS4 74-4101 – – – – 71.00 158.00

C8 – – BS4 74-4108 BS4 74-4102 – – – –

C4 – – BS4 74-4109 BS4 74-4103 – – – – 71.00 158.00

Hydrophilic (polar)

Silica – – BS4 74-4105 BS4 74-4100 – – – – 71.00 158.00

Cyano (CN) – – BS4 74-4110 BS4 74-4106 – – – –

Amino (NH2) – – BS4 74-4111 BS4 74-4104 – – – – 71.00 158.00


Ion Exchange


Weak Anion – – – – BS4 74-4205 BS4 74-4201 – – 71.00 158.00


Weak Cation – – – – BS4 74-4207 BS4 74-4203 – – 71.00 158.00

Misc.


Cellulose – – – – – – BS4 74-4307 BS4 74-4301


IMAC ** – – – – – – BS4 74-4312 BS4 74-4313

Empty Columns

Qty. of 25 Qty. of 100 $ for 25 $ for 100

5 µm Frit BS4 74-3821 BS4 74-3820 47.00 99.00

20 µm Frit BS4 74-3841 BS4 74-3840 – – – – – –

40 µm Frit BS4 74-3801 BS4 74-3800 – – – – – – 38.00 82.00* Polyacrylamide-based gel filtration**IMAC (immobilized metal affinity chromatography - for purification of histidine tagged proteins and other phospho proteins/peptides)


SpinColumnsSp

ecia

lized

Too

ls F

or B

iore

sear

ch

Our 96-well SpinColumn brings speed and simplicity to high-throughput micro-sample preparation. The 96-wellSpinColumn is for 25 to 100 ml sample sizes and includestwo 96-well collection plates (1.5 ml per well).

The 96-well SpinColumns are available with our completerange of packing materials or can be pre-packed with custom requested materials.

Catalog No. $ ProductBS4 74-5502 99.00 Empty 96-Well SpinColumn (1 plate)

with 5 µm frit

BS4 74-5500 82.00 Empty 96-Well SpinColumn (1 plate)with 20 µm frit

BS4 74-5501 82.00 Empty 96-Well SpinColumn (1 plate)with 40 µm frit

96-Well SpinColumns™ - Samples from 25 µl to 100 µl

96-WellSpinColumns

Cellulose

DetergentRemoval

ActivatedCharcoal

IMACG-100

P-2

P-6

G-10

G-25

G-50

Misc.

Weak Anion

Strong Cation

Weak Cation

Strong Anion

IonExchange

GelFiltration

C18

C8

C4


Amino (NH2)

Cyano (CN)

Silica

Hydrophilic(polar)

Hydrophilic

* Polyacrylamide-based gel filtration**IMAC (immobilized metal affinity chromatography - for purification of histidinetagged proteins and other phospho proteins/peptides)

Advantages:

• Easy to use

• Unrivaled selection of column packingmaterials



• Custom packedcolumns are availableon request

Applications:








• Salt removal

• Buffer exchange

96-Well SpinColumns: Ordering Information

Gel Filtration Silica Based Ion Exchange Misc.Packing Material (1 plate) (1 plate) (1 plate) (1 plate) $

Gel Filtration

G-10 BS4 74-5600 – – –

G-25 BS4 74-5601 – – – 109.00

G-50 BS4 74-5602 – – –

G-100 BS4 74-5603 – – – 109.00

P-2 * BS4 74-5902 – – –

P-6 * BS4 74-5903 – – – 142.00


C18 – BS4 74-5701 – – 136.00

C8 – BS4 74-5702 – –

C4 – BS4 74-5703 – – 136.00

Hydrophilic (polar)

Silica – BS4 74-5700 – – 136.00

Cyano (CN) – BS4 74-5704 – –

Amino (NH2) – BS4 74-5705 – – 136.00

Hydrophilic – BS4 74-5905 – –

Ion Exchange

Strong Anion – – BS4 74-5800 –

Weak Anion – – BS4 74-5801 – 136.00

Strong Cation – – BS4 74-5802 –

Weak Cation – – BS4 74-5803 – 136.00

Misc.

Active Charcoal – – – BS4 74-5900 136.00

Cellulose – – – BS4 74-5901

Detergent Removal – – – BS4 74-5904 142.00

IMAC ** – – – BS4 74-5906


Molecular Biology

Filtration PlatesMembrane-Bottom Filter Plates - Samples from 50 µl to 5 ml

Harvard Apparatus’ new 96-WELL and 384-WELL FILTER PLATES bring speed andhigh throughput to sample filtration on a microliter to milliliter scale. The mem-brane-bottom individual sample wells or chambers have separate high-strengthsingle or dual filter membranes to provide rapid filtration rates and to eliminateleakage or cross-talk between adjacent wells.

All Filter Plates feature rigid polypropylene construction for chemical resistanceand low binding and meet SBS footprint for use in robotic systems. Standard fil-ter media include: glass fiber, PVDF polypropylene, polyethylene and polyethersulfone. Patent pending sealing process guarantees no well-to-well cross talk andweeping and allows superior recovery performance.

96-Well Ultra-Filtration Plates with 6.24mm well size and 19.35 sq mm filter areaare good for size exclusion, to concentrate, purify and desalt proteins, peptides,oligos, DNA and RNA and also to recover proteins, oligos and RNA from poly-acrylamide gels. Plates comply with industry standard for automation and areavailable with 10,000 and 30,000 MWCO membranes.

96-Well 2 ml Filter Plates with 8.23 mm well size come with Polypropylene mem-brane for organic synthesis and with UHMW Polyethylene membrane good forsolid phase extraction.

Distinctively constructed 384-Well Filter Plates have short drip directors, squareto round wells for maximum working volumes and variety of filtration media andcan also be used robotically as well as for vacuum or centrifuge filtrations.

Application specific Filter Plates and Filtration Devices to the Biopharmaceuticalindustry can be custom ordered. Other package sizes and bar-coding are available.

Catalog No. $ ProductFilter Plates

BS4 74-5551 135.00 96-Well, Ultra Filtration, PES membrane, 10K MWCO, pkg. of 5

BS4 74-5552 135.00 96-Well, Ultra Filtration, PES membrane, 30K MWCO, pkg. of 5

BS4 74-5553 104.00 96-Well, 300 µl, GF 1.2 µm, Short drip, pkg. of 10

BS4 74-5554 104.00 96-Well, 300 µl, Hydrophilic PVDF 0.45 µm, Short drip, pkg. of 10

BS4 74-5555 57.00 96-Well, 400 µl, Hydrophilic PVDF 0.45 µm, Long drip, pkg. of 5

BS4 74-5556 75.00 96-Well, 800 µl, Hydrophilic PVDF 0.45 µm, Long drip, pkg. of 5

BS4 74-5557 89.00 96-Well, 2 ml, PP 0.45 µm, Long drip, pkg. of 5

BS4 74-5558 89.00 96-Well, 2 ml, UHMW PE 25 µm, Long drip, pkg. of 5

BS4 74-5559 88.00 48-Well, 5 ml, PE frit 25 µm, Long drip, pkg. of 5

BS4 74-5560 75.00 384-Well, 35 µl, 0.45 µm, Short drip, pkg. of 5

Advantages:

• High recoveries of both filtrates and particulateretentates

• Multi-well format for simultaneous filtration of 96or 384 different samples

• Individual filter membranes to avoid cross-talkbetween adjacent wells

• High well-to-well reproducibility

• Membrane pore sizes of 0.45 – 25 µm (otherpore sizes available on request)

• Suitable for vacuum manifold filtration or centrifugal filtration

Applications:

• Nucleic Acid Binding

• DNA Binding

• DNA/RNA Purification

• Purification of PCR Products

• High-Throughput Preparation of YAC DNA

• High-Throughput Synthesis of Drugs

• Bead/Resin Based Assays

• Cell-Based Receptor Binding Assays

• Size exclusion

• Concentrate, purify and desalt proteins, peptides,oligos, DNA and RNA

• Recover proteins, oligos and RNA from polyacrylamide gels

• Filtration and Filtrate Collection

How to use 96-Well or 384-Well Filter PlateStep 1Fill the wells of Filter Plate with the samples.

Step 2Place a Filter Storage/Collection Plate inside theManifold Filtration unit and then insert the filledFilter Plate.

Step 3Apply vacuum to collect the filtrates in the StoragePlate wells.

Step 4Remove the filtrates and/or re-suspend. Recover the retentate from the membranes forfurther analysis. Or use collected filtrate inappropriate applications.

NEW


Filtration PlatesSp

ecia

lized

Too

ls F

or B

iore

sear

ch

Filter Plate Accessories

Reservoirs, Storage Plates and LidReservoirs and Storage/Collection Plates constructed of naturalpolypropylene are low binding, resistant to heat, chemicals and biological materials and robotic friendly with industry standarddimensions. Pyramid or V-bottom format is for maximum recovery.Plate Seals and Seal Strips for every format are available.

Filtration is generally done in a custom-designed Manifold FiltrationSystem (Catalog # BS4 74-5572) allowing both collection of the filtrates in a Filter Bottom Plate and retention of the particulates onthe membrane. Optionally, low-speed centrifugation in microplatebaskets may be used instead of vacuum filtration. Both the filtratesand the retentates are recovered at high recoveries and with highwell-to-well reproducibility for further analysis.

A complete system includes Filter Plate, Storage/Collection Plate, Lid and Vacuum Manifold.

Catalog No. $ ProductReservoirs

BS4 74-5561 25.00 96 Well, Pyramid Bottom, pkg. of 5

BS4 74-5562 21.00 384 Well, Low Profile, Pyramid Bottom, pkg. of 5

BS4 74-5563 25.00 12 Partitioned, Pyramid Bottom, pkg. of 5

BS4 74-5564 25.00 8 Row, Partitioned, Pyramid Bottom, pkg. of 5

Storage/Collection Plates

BS4 74-5565 25.00 96 Well, 1.1 ml, Square Well, “V” Bottom, pkg. of 5

BS4 74-5566 25.00 96 Well, 2 ml, Square Well, Pyramid Bottom, pkg. of 5

BS4 74-5567 30.00 48 well, 5 ml, Rectangle Well, Pyramid Bottom, pkg. of 5

BS4 74-5568 42.00 384 Well, 35 µl, Square Well, Conical Bottom, pkg. of 10

Accessories

BS4 74-5569 60.00 Universal Lid, Polystyrene, Clear, pkg. of 10

BS4 74-5570 20.00 96 Well, Pierceable Plate Seal for 2 ml StoragePlate, pkg. of 10

BS4 74-5571 18.50 96 Well, Solid Plate Seal for 2 ml Storage Plate, pkg. of 10

Note: Other configurations for Plates and accessories are also available upon request.

Manifold Filtration SystemManifold Filtration System fits all standard filter plates, collects intoany storage plate and is adaptable for robot handling. The ManifoldSystem is for adjustable vacuum and easy access to filtrate and comeswith easy to remove seals.

SpecificationsMaterials of Construction:

Top and Bottom Anodized AluminumMiddle Section Natural DelrinGaskets and O-rings VitonOutlet Port Polypropylene

Dimensions:L x W x H 158.75 x 117.48 x 60.43 mmFiltration Gap 1.5 mm

Catalog No. $ ProductBS4 72-5568 225.00 Manifold Filtration System, Aluminum + Delrin

Advantages:

• Collect into 2 ml storage plates

• Spacer included to collect into SBS standardmicroplates

• Robot compatible

• Cross talk prevention dueto minimal distancebetween filter plate andcollection plate

• Compatible with most filter plates

• Touch free start up

Applications:

• Combinatorial chemistrycleavage

• Final filtration for SPE

• High throughput screening preparation

• Sample preparation


• Receptor binding assays

• Plasmid lysate cleaning

NEW


Molecular Biology

DIALYZERS

Harvard Apparatus DIALYZER FamilyREUSABLE DIALYZERS

DIALYZER™

For routine dialysis of volumes from 10 µl to 5 ml, see page N26.

Fast DIALYZER™

Routine dialysis at higher speeds due to an additional dialysis port, see page N27.

SpinDIALYZER™ and Fast SpinDIALYZER™

These are our DIALYZER and Fast DIALYZER with an internal magnet that allows theentire unit to rotate on a magnetic stirrer for even faster dialysis, see page N28.

ElectroPrep™

The ElectroPrep is an electrophoresis based dialysis system. It can be configured for anumber of applications including the elution of biomolecules from gels as well assample concentration. Flow-Thru ElectroPrep™ (pat) is used with the single or multiFast DIALYZER system for ultra-fast pumping, see pages N29 to N31.

Flow-Thru Fast DIALYZER™

Used with the ElectroPrep system supporting continuous online sample detection, see page N32.

Flow-Thru DIALYZER™

Larger Membrane for rapid dialysis of volumes up to 10 ml, see page N33.

DISPOSABLE DIALYZERSUltra-Micro DispoDIALYZER™

Disposable, single use DIALYZERS for sample sizes from 1 µl to 5 µl, see page N34.

Micro DispoDIALYZER™

Disposable, single use DIALYZERS for sample sizes from 5 µl to 100 µl, see page N35.

Macro Fast DispoDIALYZER™

Disposable, single use DIALYZERS for sample sizes from 1 ml to 10 ml, see page N36.

96-Well DispoDIALYZER™

Disposable, single use DIALYZERS that utilize a 96-well format for high throughputapplications and are for samples sizes from 25 µl to 300 µl, see page N37.

EQUILIBRIUM DIALYZERSMulti-Equilibrium DIALYZER™ - ReusableFor simultaneous and highly reproducible equilibrium dialysis of up to 20 samples with volumes up to 5 ml, see page N39.

Micro-Equilibrium DIALYZER™ - ReusableThe Micro-Equilibrium DIALYZER is available as 2- or 3-chamber systems. It is used tostudy interactions between biomolecules such as the binding of a ligand to a protein,see page N40.

Fast Micro-Equilibrium DIALYZER - ReusableA reusable Micro-Equilibrium DIALYZER suitable for 25 µl samples for quicker equilibration times using membranes with larger surface areas, see page N41.

DispoEquilibrium DIALYZER™ - Single UseA disposable version of the Micro-Equilibrium DIALYZER suitable for samples up to 75 µl, see page N41.

96-Well Equilibrium DIALYZER™ - Single UseA 96-well disposable equilibrium DIALYZER for high throughput interaction studies.Suitable for samples up to 200 µl, see page N42.

Introduction to DIALYZERS

Applications:

• Exchange of buffers

• Equilibrium dialysis

• Protein binding assays

• Removal of detergents

• Concentration of samples

• Sample prep for HPLC, HPCE

• Electro-concentration

• Immunoblotting

• Purification of proteins, DNA/RNA

• Electrophoresis, electro-elution, electro-dialysis

• Removal of excess radiolabel or PCR-primers

• GC, GC-MS, NMR

• Elution of proteins and nucleic acids from gels

• Removal of CsCl, agarose, pyridoxal-5-phosphate

• Removal of silicates after chromatography

• Complex carbohydrate purification

• On-Line concentration, on-line dialysis, dynamic dialysis

• Serum protein binding

• Protein, receptor, and ligand bindingassays

• Protein-drug binding assays

• Protein-protein interations

• Protein-DNA interactions

Advantages:

• Easy to use

• Leak-proof

• Low protein binding


• Rapid dialysis/purification

Dialysis is a physical separation method inwhich small molecules pass through the poresof a selective membrane while larger molecules are retained in the dialysis chamber. Our DIALYZER portfolio is a uniquefamily of products for the dialysis of smallsample volumes of proteins, peptides, nucleicacids, and other biomolecules. The system issuited for sample volumes from 10 µl to 10 mlor higher. The DIALYZER family consists ofover 50 different components that can bejoined together to create hundreds of combinations for various applications.


DIALYZERSSp

ecia

lized

Too

ls F

or B

iore

sear

ch

The DIALYZER is a simple single-sided device for dialysis of biologicalsamples. A broad range of DIALYZER sizes are available to accommo-date sample volumes ranging from as little as 10 µl up to 5 ml. Pre-cutdialysis membranes are available for the DIALYZER with MolecularWeight Cut-Off ranges from 100 to 300,000 Daltons. The entire unit isconstructed of Teflon, a virtually unreactive material, which will notinterfere with your valuable samples. Once assembled a Teflon-Teflonseal ensures that the DIALYZER is 100% leak-proof. The DIALYZER isideal for the simple dialysis of salts, for the exchange of buffers, and forthe concentration of samples. Includes chamber with cap.

How to Use:DIALYZERS™

Step 2

Step 1

Step 3

Place the sample inthe sample chamberof the DIALYZER

Choose a suitablemembrane and clampinto place with theDIALYZER cap

Place the entire unitinto a large beaker of dialysis buffer.Dialysis time is 3 hoursto overnight dependingupon sample andbuffer chemistry,temperature and volume.

DIALYZER™ (Reusable)

Applications:

• Purification of biomolecules



• Sample concentration

• HPLC, HPCE

• Removal of excess radiolabel

• Post-PCR clean-up

• GC, GC-MS, NMR

Advantages:

• Easy to use

• Reusable

• Autoclaveable

• Available for wide range ofsample sizes - 10 µl to 5 ml



• Made of Teflon - totally inert


• Membranes available withMWCO’s to suit almostany application

• Leak-proof

Desired Component

Membrane

Contaminants

Dialysis Buffer

KeyDIALYZERS: Ordering Information

ChamberVolume (µl) Qty. of 1 $ Qty. of 5 $

10 BS4 74-0210 BS4 74-0200

20 BS4 74-0211 BS4 74-0201

50 BS4 74-0212 BS4 74-0202

100 BS4 74-0213 BS4 74-0203

200 BS4 74-0214 BS4 74-0204

500 BS4 74-0215 BS4 74-0205

1000 BS4 74-0216 BS4 74-0206

1500 BS4 74-0217 BS4 74-0207

3000 BS4 74-0218 BS4 74-0208

5000 BS4 74-0219 BS4 74-0209

For Membrane ordering information, see page N44.

The membrane ordering information is color coded to assist you in selecting the appropriate membrane:

Pink shaded membranes are for products with sample sizes up to 200 µl

Purple shaded membranes are for products with sample sizes ranging from 250 µl to 1,500 µl

Green shaded membranes are for products with sample sizes ranging from 3,000 µl to 5,000 µl


Molecular Biology

DIALYZERS

The Fast DIALYZER boasts all the features of the original DIALYZERplus an additional dialysis port. The Fast double-sided DIALYZER thushas two dialysis membranes, one on either side of the sample cham-ber. The increased membrane surface area results in greater sampleexposure and an enhanced rate of dialysis. The Fast DIALYZERincludes chamber and two caps.

The Fast DIALYZER is also suited for a wide spectrum of additionalapplications including:

• Electro-Elution

• Elution of Proteins and Nucleic Acids from Gels

• Electro-Concentration

• Electro-Dialysis, see page N29

Fast DIALYZERS: Ordering Information

ChamberVolume (µl) Qty. of 1 $ Qty. of 5 $

50 BS4 74-0408 BS4 74-0400

100 BS4 74-0409 BS4 74-0401

200 BS4 74-0410 BS4 74-0402

500 BS4 74-0411 BS4 74-0403

1000 BS4 74-0412 BS4 74-0404

1500 BS4 74-0413 BS4 74-0405

3000 BS4 74-0414 BS4 74-0406

5000 BS4 74-0415 BS4 74-0407

Fast DIALYZER™ (Reusable)

For Membrane ordering information,see page N44.





Applications:




• HPLC, HPCE

• Immunoblotting*

• Purification of proteins,DNA and RNA


• Post-PCR clean-up

• GC, GC-MS, NMR

• Removal of CsCl, agarose,pyridoxal-5-phosphate*

• Removal of silicates afterchromatography*

• Complex carbohydratepurification*



* When used in conjunction with the Harvard Apparatus ElectroPrepsystem.

Advantages:

• Twice as quick

• Reusable

• Available for most samplesizes - large or small

• Membranes available with MWCO’s to suit almost any application

• Easy to use

• Leak-proof

• Autoclaveable






DIALYZERSSp

ecia

lized

Too

ls F

or B

iore

sear

ch

SpinDIALYZER™

The SpinDIALYZER is our high-quality DIALYZER with a magnetic feature incorporated internally and does not require an external stirbar. This enables the entire SpinDIALYZER unit to be rotated duringdialysis using a magnetic stir plate (Catalog No. BS4 72-1975). The constant motion of the sample results in dialysis times that are 50to 100% faster than with the Dialyzer. SpinDIALYZER includes chamber plus cap.

Fast SpinDIALYZER™

The Fast SpinDIALYZER is our high-quality Fast DIALYZER with a magnetic feature incorporated internally. This enables the entire FastSpinDIALYZER unit to be rotated during dialysis using a magnetic stirplate (Catalog No. BS4 72-1975). The constant motion of the sample results in dialysis times that are 50 to 100% faster than withthe Fast DIALYZER. As with the Fast DIALYZER, the Fast SpinDIALYZERhas two dialysis ports and includes chamber plus two caps.

SpinDIALYZERS and Fast SpinDIALYZERS: Ordering Information

Chamber SpinDIALYZER Fast SpinDIALYZERVolume (µl) Qty. of 1 Qty. of 5 Qty. of 1 Qty. of 5

10 BS4 74-0308 BS4 74-0300 – –$

20 BS4 74-0309 BS4 74-0301 – –$

50 BS4 74-0310 BS4 74-0302 BS4 74-0506 BS4 74-0500$

100 BS4 74-0311 BS4 74-0303 BS4 74-0507 BS4 74-0501$

200 BS4 74-0312 BS4 74-0304 BS4 74-0508 BS4 74-0502$

500 BS4 74-0313 BS4 74-0305 BS4 74-0509 BS4 74-0503$

1000 BS4 74-0314 BS4 74-0306 BS4 74-0510 BS4 74-0504$

1500 BS4 74-0315 BS4 74-0307 BS4 74-0511 BS4 74-0505$

SpinDIALYZER™ and Fast SpinDIALYZER™ (Reusable)

Applications:




• HPLC, HPCE

• Immunoblotting*

• Purification of proteins,DNA and RNA


• GC, GC-MS, NMR

• Removal of CsCl, agarose,pyridoxal-5-phosphate*

• Removal of silicates afterChromatography*

• Complex carbohydratepurification*

* When used in conjunction withthe Harvard ApparatusElectroPrep system.

Advantages:

• Faster dialysis times dueto an internal magnet

• Reusable

• Available for most sam-ple sizes- large or small

• Membranes availablewith MWCO’s to suitalmost any application

• Easy to use

• Leak-proof

• Autoclaveable



• Rapid dialysis/purifica-tion


The membrane ordering information on page N44 is colorcoded to assist you in selecting the appropriate membrane:





Molecular Biology

DIALYZERSElectroPrep™

The ElectroPrep system from Harvard Apparatus is an extremely versatile patented sampleprep technology based on (2D) electrophoresis/dialysis. This ElectroPrep system is ideal forthe rapid purification of proteins, nucleic acids, carbohydrates and other biomolecules. With a run-time of 5 to 10 minutes, ElectroPrep provides speed and convenience, even at thevery low currents (5 to 10 mA) used with this system. The sample chambers are made ofTeflon, a completely inert material especially suited for high sample recovery. Membranes ofdifferent MWCO (molecular weight cut off), from 100 to 300,000 Daltons, can be used forselective elution, filtration, dialysis, fractionation and concentration. Fast DIALYZER can bejoined with multiple link chambers in different combinations (see pages N30 and N31) and membranes (see page N44).

Applications

• Electro-elution from gels and solutions

• Electro-dialysis (with an averagebuffer exchange time of 5 to 10 minutes)

• On-line electro-dialysis


• Selective electro-filtration

• Size fractionation

• Primer removal

• Salt removal


• Dye-Terminator removal

• See some examples on the following pages

As shown above, multiple link chambers can be joined together with membranes of differentMWCOs placed between them for highly selective electro-filtration and separation.

Advantages

• Faster dialysis times due to movement of charged molecules in the electric field

• Re-usable

• Available for most sample sizes -large or small

• Membranes available with MWCO’sto suit almost any application

• Easy to use

• Leak proof

• Autoclaveable




ElectroPrep (BS4 74-1101) with Multiple Link-Chambers (sold separately)

Link-Chamber

Fast Dialyzer™

Membrane

Key

* see page N44 for membrane selection and ordering information.

For Membrane ordering information, see page N44.

Teflon Cap


DIALYZERSSp

ecia

lized

Too

ls F

or B

iore

sear

ch

– +

c

ba

1

2

Electrodialysis through Simultaneous Exchange of BuffersA sample is placed in the sample compartment between membranes(a) and (b), both of which have MWCOs lower than the molecularweight of the desired biomolecules. The sample is dialyzed through thesimultaneous exchange of buffers in the electric field. This method isvery fast and very effective. For example, after a PCR reaction, it can beused to rapidly (5 to 10 minutes) remove100% of the primer. Electrodialysis is alsoeffective for desalting neutral moleculesthat do not move in an electric field (suchas sugars) or charged molecules at theirisoelectric point.

ElectroPrep™

Electro-Elution of DNA, Proteins or other Biomoleculesfrom Gel PiecesUsing the ElectroPrep system in the illustrated configuration, elutionof DNA, proteins, or any other biomolecules from a gel slice/plug canbe achieved quickly and easily with excellent recovery. Chambers canbe joined in any combination necessary to accommodate therequired gel volume. Samples can be concentrated if desired, bychoosing a receiving chamber of suitable volume. The MWCO(molecular weight cut off) of the membranes (a and b) can also bechosen to achieve very selective filtrationor size fractionation during the electro-elution process.

Selective Electro-Filtration/Concentration/SeparationBased on Different Charges on BiomoleculesIn this configuration of the ElectroPrep, the sample is placed in asample compartment between two membranes (b), both of whichshould have a MWCO larger than the desired biomolecules.Membranes (a) and (c) should have MWCOs smaller than the bio-molecules. Based on their charges, the biomolecules will move toeither chamber (1) or chamber (2).Biomolecules with unknown isoelectricpoints can also be separated and purifiedusing this method. Teflon Chamber

Teflon Cap

Membrane

Key

Union

Teflon Chamber

Teflon Cap

Membrane

Key

Union

Gel

Teflon Chamber

Teflon Cap

Membrane

Key

Electro-Elution of DNA, Proteins or other Biomolecules from Gel Pieces

Selective Electro-Filtration/Concentration/Separation Based on DifferentCharges on Biomolecules

– +

bb a

– +

c

ba

1

2

b

Electrodialysis through Simultaneous Exchange of Buffers


Molecular Biology

DIALYZERS

Rapid and SelectiveElectro-Filtration/ConcentrationThe sample is placed in the sample com-partment comprised of a chamber (1)and the union. The MWCO of membrane(b) should be larger than the molecularweight of the biomolecules and the

MWCO of membrane (a) should be smaller. Upon the passage ofelectric current, the biomolecules will pass through membrane (b)and collect in chamber (2) while smaller molecules will passthrough membrane (a). This is a fast and effective method for theconcentration of small samples and for selective filtration.

Catalog No. $ DescriptionBS4 74-1101 424.00 ElectroPrep Tank, 4 x 8 x 3 in

BS4 68-0609 458.00 Power Supply, mini 25-200 V, 100 mAmp

ElectroPrep™

Teflon Chamber

Teflon Cap

Membrane

Key

Union

– +

ba

1

2

Rapid and Selective Electro-Filtration/Concentration

Link-ChambersLink-Chambers can be joined together in different combinationswithout the need for a union. The 25 µl, 50 µl, and 100 µl can bejoined together and the 250 µl can be joined to the 500 µl size. Aunion (BS4 74-0102) can be used to join a 25, 50 or 100 µl cham-ber to a 250 or 500 µl chamber.

Link Chambers

Chamber Volume (µl) Qty. of 1 $ Qty. of 5 $

25 BS4 74-1619 BS4 74-1620

50 BS4 74-1611 BS4 74-1615

100 BS4 74-1612 BS4 74-1616

250 BS4 74-1613 BS4 74-1617

500 BS4 74-1614 BS4 74-1618

Unions and Other Accesories

Catalog No. $ DescriptionBS4 74-0100 38.00 Union which Joins Two Chambers with Volumes

from 10 to 200 µl (volume = 350 µl)

BS4 74-1105 38.00 Union which Joins Two Chambers with Volumesfrom 500 to 1,500 µl (volume = 2500 µl)

BS4 74-0102 38.00 Union which Joins a 10 to 200 µl Chamber to a 500 to 1,500 µl Chamber (volume = 1500 µl)

BS4 74-1112 67.00 Mini Vacuum Dessicator for Sample Concentration,see page N36

Fast DIALYZERS™

The ElectroPrep must use at least one Fast DIALYZER (range of 50 µlto 1,500 µl volume). The joining of multiple Fast DIALYZER unitsrequires a union of the appropriate size. Link Chambers can be eas-ily attached to Fast DIALYZER.

Fast DIALYZERS™


50 BS4 74-0408 BS4 74-0400

100 BS4 74-0409 BS4 74-0401

200 BS4 74-0410 BS4 74-0402

500 BS4 74-0411 BS4 74-0403

1000 BS4 74-0412 BS4 74-0404

1500 BS4 74-0413 BS4 74-0405

For Membrane ordering information,see page N44.






DIALYZERSSp

ecia

lized

Too

ls F

or B

iore

sear

ch

Flow-Thru Fast DIALYZER™ (Reusable)

The Flow-Thru Fast DIALYZER is a new and unique product that is ideal for electro-elution, electro-dialysis, electro-concentration and electro-filtration of larger samplevolumes (from 50 µl to 1 ml or more) and for protein crystalization when used with ElectroPrep, see page N29. The Flow-Thru Fast DIALYZER has an inlet and an outlet pro-viding a flow-through system, which facilitates the continuousmovement of the sample. Sample collection can be monitored through the use of an on-line detector, such as aphotometer, conductivity meter or any other suitable equipment readily available in the laboratory. The Flow-ThruFast DIALYZER can also be hooked to an HPLC sample loop for concentration of biological samples.

As shown in Figure 1, the sample from the sample reservoir (1) is pumped in continuous circulation throughthe sample chamber. The MWCO of membrane (a) is smaller than the molecular weight of the desired biomolecules. The MCWO membrane (b) is larger than the molecular weight of the desired biomolecules. The desired biomolecules will be collected in the concentration chamber (2) since membrane (c) also has aMWCO smaller than the desired biomolecules.

The setup in Figure 2 is similar. The sample from the sample reservoir (1) is pumped in continuous circulationthrough the sample chamber. In this instance, however, the concentration chamber (2) is also connected to acontinuous on-line system with a sample detector such as an HPLC system. Therefore, the sample collected inthe concentration chamber can be periodically measured and analyzed. Flow-Thru Fast DIALYZER includeschamber, two caps and two fittings.

Flow-Thru Fast DIALYZER

– +Detector or HPLC Sample Loop

ab

c1

2

Sample Reservoir

Pump Pump

– +

ab

c1

Sample Reservoir

Pump

2

Teflon Chamber

Teflon Cap

Membrane

Key

Union

Port

Applications

• Electro-elution

• Electro-dialysis


• Electro-filtration

• Protein crystallization

Advantages

• Rapid sample preparation

• Minimal sample loss

• Inert sample and concentrationchambers (made of Teflon)

Figure 1 Figure 2

For Membrane ordering information,

see page N44.

Flow-Thru Fast DIALYZERS: Ordering Information


50 BS4 74-1204 BS4 74-1200

100 BS4 74-1205 BS4 74-1201

500 BS4 74-1206 BS4 74-1202

1000 BS4 74-1207 BS4 74-1203


Molecular Biology

DIALYZERS

The Flow-Thru DIALYZER is a unique system forthe rapid dialysis of sample volumes from 20 µlto 100 ml. It provides a large surface area forFlow-Thru on-line dialysis with minimal sampleloss. The entire dialysis unit is made of Teflon,an inert material, and has two separate serpen-tine channels superimposed on each other andseparated by a dialysis membrane. The lengthof each channel is about 700 mm. Five differentchambers are available (20 µl, 75 µl, 150 µl,300 µl and 600 µl). Chambers of different vol-umes can also be superimposed on each otherfor specific applications.

With the Flow-Thru DIALYZER more than 90%of salts or small molecules can be dialyzedfrom a sample in one cycle (about 10 min-utes). Cycles can be repeated automaticallythrough the use of continuous flow systems andthe entire dialysis unit can be submerged in awater bath for constant temperature dialysis.

Flow-Thru DIALYZER™

Catalog No. $ DescriptionBS4 74-1300 541.00 Flow-Thru DIALYZER of two 300 µl Chambers with Fittings, clamping system, 10

Membranes with MWCO of 10K, pkg. of 1

BS4 74-1301 1,584.00 Flow-Thru DIALYZER of two 300 µl Chambers with Fittings, clamping system, 10Membranes with MWCO of 10K, Pump Drive with Two Pump Heads andTubings, pkg. of 1

BS4 74-1400 541.00 Flow-Thru DIALYZER Chamber 20 µl Teflon, pkg. of 2





Cellulose Acetate Membranes for Flow-Thru DIALYZER

BS4 74-1508 77.00 Membranes MWCO 100 Daltons, pkg. of 10

BS4 74-1500 77.00 Membranes MWCO 500 Daltons, pkg. of 10

BS4 74-1501 77.00 Membranes MWCO 1K Daltons, pkg. of 10







Regenerated Cellulose Membranes for Flow-Thru DIALYZER







Polycarbonate Membranes for Flow-Thru DIALYZER

BS4 74-1520 90.00 Membranes 0.01 µm pore size, pkg. of 10



Dialysis Buffer Out

Dialysis Buffer In

Sample Solution Out

Sample Solution In

SampleChamber

Membrane(1.2 in x 3.2 in)

Dialysis BufferChamber

Flow-Thru DIALYZER™ (Reusable)

Advantages:

• Ultra fast dialysis times are possibledue to large membrane surface area

• Automation ready

• Suitable for wide sample volumerange

• Inert Teflon dialysis chamber – minimal sample loss

• Suitable for constant temperaturedialysis

Applications:

• Dialysis

• Buffer exchange

• Salt removal



• On-line dialysis for HPLC

• On-line sample concentration

• And more…

Desired Component

Membrane

Contaminants

Dialysis Buffer

Key


DIALYZERSSp

ecia

lized

Too

ls F

or B

iore

sear

ch

The 1 µl to 5 µl Ultra-Micro DispoDIALYZERis a unique disposable DIALYZER for the dial-ysis of very small samples. The entire dialy-sis unit installed with different MWCO mem-branes (0.025 cm2 surface area) is smallenough so that dialysis can be carried out ina microcentrifuge tube. Sample recovery isquick and easy with almost 100% of the sam-ple recovered after only a short centrifuga-tion step. Ultra-Micro DispoDIALYZERincludes two 1.5 ml capped microcentrifugecollection tubes.

Desired Component

Membrane

Contaminants

Dialysis Buffer

Key

How to Use:Ultra-Micro DispoDIALYZER™

Done!

Step 3

Step 2

Step 1

Ultra-Micro DispoDIALYZERS: Ordering Information

Membrane MWCO(Daltons) Qty. of 25 $ Qty. of 50 $ Qty. of 100 $

100 BS4 74-0603 104.00 BS4 74-0604 164.00 BS4 74-0605 301.00

500 BS4 74-0606 BS4 74-0607 BS4 74-0608

1,000 BS4 74-0609 104.00 BS4 74-0610 164.00 BS4 74-0611 301.00

2,000 BS4 74-0612 BS4 74-0613 BS4 74-0614

5,000 BS4 74-0615 104.00 BS4 74-0616 164.00 BS4 74-0617 301.00

10,000 BS4 74-0602 BS4 74-0600 BS4 74-0601

25,000 BS4 74-0618 104.00 BS4 74-0619 164.00 BS4 74-0620 301.00

50,000 BS4 74-0621 BS4 74-0622 BS4 74-0623

Place sampleinto theDispoDIALYZER

Place theDispoDIALYZERinto a microcen-trifuge tube con-taining dialysisbuffer

Place theDispoDIALYZERinverted into anew tube andcentrifuge for 1minute at lowspeed

Ultra-Micro DispoDIALYZER™ - Samples from 1 µl to 5 µl (Single use)

Advantages:

• Micro-volume dialysis

• Economical

• Easy to use

• Leak-proof




Applications:




• HPLC, HPCE

• Purification of proteins, DNA and RNA

• Removal of excess radiolabel or PCR-primers

• GC, GC-MS, NMR


Molecular Biology

DIALYZERS

Micro DispoDIALYZERS: Ordering Information

Membrane MWCO(Daltons) Qty. of 25 $ Qty. of 50 $ Qty. of 100 $

100 BS4 74-0714 104.00 BS4 74-0700 164.00 BS4 74-0701 301.00

500 BS4 74-0721 BS4 74-0722 BS4 74-0723

1,000 BS4 74-0715 104.00 BS4 74-0702 164.00 BS4 74-0703 301.00

2,000 BS4 74-0716 BS4 74-0704 BS4 74-0705

5,000 BS4 74-0717 104.00 BS4 74-0706 164.00 BS4 74-0707 301.00

10,000 BS4 74-0718 BS4 74-0708 BS4 74-0709

25,000 BS4 74-0719 104.00 BS4 74-0710 164.00 BS4 74-0711 301.00

50,000 BS4 74-0720 BS4 74-0712 BS4 74-0713

Done!Step 2Step 1

The Micro DispoDIALYZER is a unique disposable DIALYZER for the dialysis of smallsample volumes from 5 µl to 100 µl. Samplerecovery is quick and easy using the MicroDispoDIALYZER, almost 100% of the sampleis recovered after a short centrifugation step.The Micro DispoDIALYZER includes installedmembrane of different MWCO, foam float,cap and two collection tubes (1.5 ml).

How to Use:Micro DispoDIALYZER™

The sample is placed in the samplechamber as shown in the diagrambelow. It is separated from the dialysis buffer by the membrane.

The entire unit is placed in a beaker andfloats vertically due to the flotation ringattached to the unit. Stirring the dialysisbuffer results in faster dialysis times.

Simply invert the DispoDIALYZER ina microcentrifuge tube and cen-trifuge briefly to recover the sample.

Micro DispoDIALYZER™ - Samples from 5 µl to 100 µl (Single use)

Advantages:

• Economical

• Hassle-free

• Available for small sample sizes

• Membranes available withMWCO’s to suit almost any application

• Easy to use

• Leak-proof




Applications:




• HPLC, HPCE


• Removal of excess radiolabel orPCR-primers

• GC, GC-MS, NMR

Desired Component

Membrane

Contaminants

Dialysis Buffer

Key


DIALYZERSSp

ecia

lized

Too

ls F

or B

iore

sear

ch

The Macro Fast DispoDIALYZERis also available for larger sam-ples. This unit is available with5,000 or 10,000 Dalton regener-ated cellulose membranes. Theother basic features of this unit

are the same as those of the smaller volume DispoDIALYZERSdescribed earlier. The Macro Fast DispoDIALYZER includes shell, tworings and two membranes of MWCO 5KDa or 10KDa (4.5cm2 surfacearea each). Assembly required.

Macro Fast DispoDIALYZER

Macro Fast DispoDIALYZERS: Ordering Information

Membrane MWCO (Daltons)Qty. 5,000 $ 10,000 $

25 BS4 74-0803 142.00 BS4 74-0802 142.00

50 BS4 74-0804 BS4 74-0800

100 BS4 74-0805 492.00 BS4 74-0801 492.00

Advantages:

• Macro-volume dialysis

• Economical

• Easy to use

• Leak-proof




Applications:




• HPLC, HPCE


• Removal of excess radio-label or PCR-primers

• GC, GC-MS, NMR

Macro Fast DispoDIALYZER™

Samples from 1 ml to 10 ml (Single use)Dialysis Accessories

Membrane MinderThe Membrane Minder is an ingenious device designed for the safeand easy movement and manipulation of delicate membranes. The Membrane Minder is also ideal for use with filters, gel pieces,small tissue samples and other small parts. The Membrane Minderutilizes a vacuum to gently manipulate small objects at the push of abutton. A range of suction cups and vacuum needles are suppliedwith the Membrane Minder to ensure the right tool is available, whatever the application.

Catalog No. $ DescriptionBS4 74-0109 218.00 Membrane Minder, pkg. of 1

ConcentratorSample concentration is easy with the Harvard ApparatusConcentrator. Simply place any Dialyzer, complete with membrane,into the Harvard Apparatus Concentrator. The liquid is evaporatedthrough the membrane and removed by the concentrator. When con-centration is complete simply puncture the membrane and removeyour sample. This technique is superior to other concentration meth-ods, such as centrifugation, in which the sample may stick to themembrane surface or burst through the membrane.

Catalog No. $ DescriptionBS4 74-1112 67.00 Concentrator, pkg. of 1

Membrane MinderBS4 74-0109

ConcentratorBS4 74-1112

For Microcentrifuges, see pages N95 to N103.


Molecular Biology

DIALYZERS96-Well DispoDIALYZER™- Samples from 25 µl to 300 µl (Single use)

The 96-Well DispoDIALYZER is a novel product for thesimultaneous preparation of 96 samples. Each well in thissystem has a separate membrane, thus eliminating thepossibility of sample contamination and leakage. The 96-Well DispoDIALYZER provides very high reproducibility among different wells and sample recoveryis excellent. Wells are sealed with twelve 8-cap strips(included).

How to Use:96-Well DispoDIALYZER™

The 96-WellDispoDIALYZER

Place the sampleinto the wells ofthe 96-WellDispoDIALYZERand assemblestrip caps

Float the entire plate indialysis buffer

Retrieve the purified samplesfor downstreamapplications

Desired Component

Membrane

Contaminants

Dialysis Buffer

Key

Advantages:

• High recovery (> 95%)

• 96-well high-throughput format

• Individual membranes means no cross-contamination between wells

• High well to well reproducibility

• Range of possible sample volumes: 25 µl to 300 µl

• Range of membrane MWCO’s available: 1K, 2K, 5K, 10K, and 25K Daltons

• High quality regenerated cellulose membranes

• Membranes are free from sulphur and heavymetal contamination

Applications:

• Salt removal

• Buffer exchange

• Parallel sample prep after fraction collection



• HPLC

• HPLC-MS

• And more…

96-Well DispoDIALYZERS: Ordering Information

Membrane MWCOCatalog No. $ (Daltons)

BS4 74-0900 311.00 1,000

BS4 74-0901 2,000

BS4 74-0902 311.00 5,000

BS4 74-0903 10,000

BS4 74-0904 311.00 25,000


Equilibrium Dialysis Sp

ecia

lized

Too

ls F

or B

iore

sear

ch

Harvard Apparatus offers five types of Equilibrium DIALYZERS™.These products can meet virtually all of your bind-interaction appli-cation requirements:

Multi-Equilibrium DIALYZER™ - ReusableFor simultaneous and highly reproducible equilibrium dialysis of upto 20 samples with volumes from 0.25 to 5 ml, see page N39.

Micro-Equilibrium DIALYZER™ - ReusableThe Micro-Equilibrium DIALYZER is available as 2- or 3-chamber systems. It is used to study interactions between biomolecules such asthe binding of a ligand to a protein. For sample volumes from 25 µlto 500 µl, see page N40.

Fast Micro-Equilibrium DIALYZER - ReusableA reusable Micro-Equilibrium DIALYZER suitable for 25 µl samplesfor quicker equilibration times using membranes with larger surfaceareas, see page N41.

DispoEquilibrium DIALYZER™ - Single UseA disposable version of the Micro-Equilibrium DIALYZER suitable forsamples from 25 to 75 µl, see page N41.

96-Well Equilibrium DIALYZER™ - Single UseA 96-well disposable equilibrium DIALYZER for high throughput interaction studies. For samples up to 50 µl to 200 µl, see page N42.

Equilibrium dialysis is a specificapplication of dialysis that isimportant for the study of thebinding of small molecules andions by proteins. It is one of sev-eral methods available for thispurpose, and its attractive fea-ture continues to be its physicalsimplicity. Another attractive fea-ture of equilibrium dialysis is theability to perform interactionstudies without the use of fluo-rescent or radiolabeled tags.

Generally, the objective of an equilibrium dialysis experiment is tomeasure the amount of a ligand bound to a macromolecule. This istypically done through an indirect process because in any mixture ofthe ligand and macromolecule, it is difficult to distinguish betweenthe bound and free ligand. If, however, the free ligand can be dialyzed through a membrane, until its concentration across themembrane is at equilibrium, the free ligand concentration can bemeasured easily. Data obtained under different experimental conditions then provides information on various binding parametersof the compounds such as the binding constants and the number ofbinding sites or binding capacity.

How Does Equilibrium Dialysis Work?

If the ligand and protein do not bind to each other the ligand is free to cross the membrane. At equilibrium, the concentration of the ligand in the assay chamber will be exactly half that initially placed inthe sample chamber.

Contact Harvard Apparatus to receive a freecopy of our ‘Guide to Equilibrium Dialysis’.

If the ligand and protein form a complex, the bound ligand will beunable to diffuse across the membrane and will remain in the samplechamber. The concentration of the ligand will still be equivalent oneither side of the membrane upon reaching equilibrium. In this case,however, the ligand concentration in the assay chamber is reduced bythe total amount of ligand bound to the protein divided by two.

Unbound LigandProtein-Ligand ComplexProtein Unbound Ligand

Non-Binding Ligand Binding Ligand

Introduction to Equilibrium Dialysis

Applications:

• Protein-drug bindingassays


• Ligand binding assays

• Protein-protein interactions


• Serum protein binding


Molecular Biology

Equilibrium Dialysis

Catalog No. $ DescriptionMulti-Equlibrium DIALYZER Systems

BS4 74-1800 8,044.00 Complete Multi-Equilibrium DIALYZER System

• Ready-to-Use Teflon Macro Dialysis Cells(1 ml) with Large Surface Area and plugs, pkg. of 20

• Variable Speed Drive Unit (12 x 12 x 7.5 in)for 20 Cells, and 110V power supply, pkg. of 1

• Stand, pkg. of 1

• Filling Clamp, pkg. of 1

• Carriers for 5 Teflon Dialysis Cells, pkg. of 4

• Emptying Stoppers, pkg. of 20

• Macro Spacers, pkg. of 24

• Dialysis Membranes, MWCO 10,000 Daltons, pkg. of 200

• Power Supply Adapter (110 V)

Membranes for Multi-Equilibrium DIALYZER

BS4 74-2100 191.00 MWCO 5,000 Daltons, pkg. of 200

BS4 74-2102 213.00 MWCO 10,000 Daltons, pkg. of 200

The Harvard Apparatus Multi-Equilibrium DIALYZER provides highlystandardized equilibrium dialysis conditions for up to 20 parallelassays. The instrument offers outstanding uniformity of: membranearea, sample volume, degree of agitation.

The advantages of this system are that up to 20 cells can be usedsimultaneously for rapid dialysis under standardized conditions.Experiments conducted using the Multi-Equilibrium DIALYZER areextremely reproducible and leak-proof and can be performed at aconstant temperature.

The DIALYZER cells are made of Teflon, an extremely inert material,and will not interfere with the samples. Multiple cell systems areavailable (5, 10, 15, 20 cells) at various cell volumes (0.2, 1.0, 2.0and 5.0 ml). The unit can be sterilized by autoclaving and the cellscan be filled easily with a filling clamp. Custom systems with alternatechamber sizes, membranes and power supply are available.

Multi-Equilibrium DIALYZER™ - Samples from 0.25 ml to 5 ml (Reusable)

Advantages:

• Easy to use

• Leak-proof

• Reproducible

• Fast dialysis times

• Available for a range ofsample sizes

• Up to 20 parallel, simulta-neous assays

• Autoclavable



• Made of Teflon – totallyinert

Applications:



• Receptor bindingassays




Catalog No. $ DescriptionMulti-Equilibrium DIALYZER Individual Components

BS4 74-1903 1,256.00 Macro Teflon Dialysis Cells (1 ml) , pkg. of 5

BS4 74-1904 1,256.00 Macro Teflon Dialysis Cells (2 ml), pkg. of 5

BS4 74-1905 1,256.00 Macro Teflon Dialysis Cells (5 ml), pkg. of 5

BS4 74-1906 1,256.00 Macro Teflon Dialysis Cells, Large Surface Area (1 ml), pkg. of 5

BS4 74-1909 55.00 Macro Spacer, pkg. of 1

BS4 74-1911 546.00 Macro Cell Carrier, pkg. of 1

BS4 74-1907 1,256.00 Micro Teflon Dialysis Cells (0.25 ml), pkg. of 5

BS4 74-1908 82.00 Micro Spacer, pkg. of 1

BS4 74-1910 825.00 Micro Cell Carrier, pkg. of 1

BS4 74-1912 166.00 Power Supply Adapter (110 V)

BS4 74-1912A 166.00 Power Supply Adapter (220 V)

BS4 74-1913 281.00 Filling Clamp, pkg. of 1

BS4 74-1914 166.00 Black Stoppers, pkg. of 32

BS4 74-1901 94.00 Emptying Stoppers, pkg. of 5

BS4 74-1919 213.00 Tank with Fittings (14.5 x 9.5 x 8.25 in), pkg. of 1

Plug

CellEmptying Stopper


Equilibrium DialysisSp

ecia

lized

Too

ls F

or B

iore

sear

ch

Micro-Equilibrium DIALYZERS

Volume per TotalChamber (µl) Volume (µl) Qty. of 1 $ Qty. of 5 $

2-Chamber System

25 50 BS4 74-1606 BS4 74-1600

50 100 BS4 74-1607 BS4 74-1601

100 200 BS4 74-1608 BS4 74-1602

250 500 BS4 74-1609 BS4 74-1603

500 1,000 BS4 74-1610 BS4 74-1604

Additional Chambers for 3-Chamber System (to add to the 2-chamber system)

25 – BS4 74-1619 BS4 74-1620

50 – BS4 74-1611 BS4 74-1615

100 – BS4 74-1612 BS4 74-1616

250 – BS4 74-1613 BS4 74-1617

500 – BS4 74-1614 BS4 74-1618

The Micro-Equilibrium DIALYZER is a unique equilibrium dialysis chamber for small samples (25 to 500 µl). Two chambers of equivalent volume are joined together with a membrane betweenthem, as shown. When dialysis is complete the chambers can be opened at each end to extract thesample for analysis. The entire system can also be placed in a thermostat for temperature-controlleddialysis. Includes two chambers (body plus link) and two solid caps.

The Micro-Equilibrium DIALYZER can also be used with three chambers instead of two by addingan additional link chamber. One of the main advantages of using this configuration is that the resultscan be obtained without waiting for equilibrium to be reached, thus reducing the assay time.

This is achieved by placing the assay compound in the central chamber; the binding component inone of the terminal chambers and control buffer, containing neither component, in the remainingchamber. Comparing the concentration of the assay compound in the two terminal chambers willthen yield information on the binding characteristics of the assay components.

The binding and ligand elements are placed in onechamber (the sample chamber) while the otherchamber (the assay chamber) contains an equiva-lent volume of the same buffer without either ele-ment. When equilibrium has been reached theconcentration of the ligand in the assay chambercan be measured and analyzed to obtain theresults of the assay.When the ligand is free in solution it can readilypass through the membrane, but when complexed,it is too large and is retained by the membrane.

2-Chamber System

Membrane

Key

MicroEquilibrium DIALYZER - Samples from 25 µl to 500 µl (Reusable)

Advantages:

• Easy to use

• Leak-proof

• Reusable

• Available for a range of sample sizes

• Membranes available with MWCO’sto suit almost any application

• Autoclaveable



• Made of Teflon – totally inert

Applications:


• Protein-drug binding assays





Ultra-Thin Membranes for Micro-Equilibrium DIALYZERS

MembraneMWCO (Daltons) Qty. of 24 $ Qty. of 96 $

For Use with 25 µl, 50 µl and 100 µl Volume Chambers

5,000 BS4 74-1704 BS4 74-1700

10,000 BS4 74-1705 BS4 74-1701

For Use with 250 µl and 500 µl Volume Chambers

5,000 BS4 74-1706 BS4 74-1702

10,000 BS4 74-1707 BS4 74-1703

3-Chamber System

For additional Membraneordering information,see pages N43 to N44.

Membrane ordering information iscolor coded to assist you in selecting

the appropriate membrane:

Pink shaded membranes are for productswith sample sizes up to 200 µl

Purple shaded membranes are for products withsample sizes ranging from 250 µl to 1,500 µl

Green shaded membranes are for products withsample sizes ranging from 3,000 µl to 5,000 µl

Two-chamber DIALYZERassembled

Two-chamber DIALYZER unassembled


Molecular Biology

Equilibrium Dialysis

Harvard Apparatus DispoEquilibrium DIALYZER is a single use productfor interaction studies and is currently the only such device on the market. The DispoEquilibrium DIALYZER is leak-proof and provideshigh sample recovery (almost 100 percent). This system is designed forone-time use with samples such as radiolabeled compounds, avoidingthe hassle associated with cleaning the DIALYZER after use.

Each chamber has a capacity of 25 to 75 µl. The DispoEquilibriumDIALYZER utilizes high-quality regenerated cellulose membranes withMWCO’s of 5,000 or 10,000 Daltons. Sample recovery is very easythrough centrifugation or via removal with micropipettes. Includes twocaps (one black, one white), two 0.65 ml sample tubes per chamberand two pipette tips for delivery/recovery.

DispoEquilibrium DIALYZERS

MembraneMWCO (Daltons) Qty. of 25 Qty. of 50 Qty. of 100

5,000 BS4 74-2204 BS4 74-2200 BS4 74-2201$ 82.00 136.00 245.00

10,000 BS4 74-2205 BS4 74-2202 BS4 74-2203$

Other MWCO available upon request

Extra Loading Pippette Tips, pkg. of 100 BS4 74-2222$

DispoEquilibrium DIALYZER™

Samples from 25 µl to 75 µl (Single use)Fast MicroEquilibrium DIALYZER™

Samples of 25 µl (Reusable)

Advantages:

• Easy to use & disposable

• Small sample volumes:25 µl to 75 µl each chamber

• Rapid dialysis due toultra-thin membrane

• High-quality regeneratedcellulose membraneswith MWCOs of 5,000and 10,000 Daltons

• Leak-proof

Applications:

• Protein and Protein-drugbinding assays



• Protein-protein andProtein-DNA interactions

Applications:





• Protein-protein interactions


Harvard Apparatus introduces toour equilibrium dialysis productline a new 25 µl FastMicroEquilibrium DIALYZERusing membranes and chambers

with high surface area to sample volume ratios. The high ratio andshort diffusion distances provide faster equilibration. The FastMicroEquilibrium DIALYZER includes Delrin® sample and dialysatechambers, anodized aluminum clamping nut, four Delrin®

plug-fittings and two chemically compatible o-rings. The dialysatechamber is separated from the sample chamber by a large membrane that is tightly secured by the two o-rings, all sealed andheld together with a threaded clamping nut.

The Fast MicroEquilibrium DIALYZER is simple to use. The sampleand buffer are loaded into respective chambers through their inletports and sealed by screw plug-fittings. The dialyzer assembly isrotated along the membrane axis from time to time. The entireassembly can be placed in a thermostatted chamber if temperaturecontrol is required. After dialysis is complete, the dialysed sample isaspirated from the dialysate/buffer chamber through a port.

Fast MicroEquilibrium DIALYZERS

Volume per Chamber (µl) Qty. of 1 Qty. of 5

25 BS4 74-1621 BS4 74-1622$ 165.00 695.00

Ultra-Thin Membranes for Fast MicroEquilibrium DIALYZERS

Membrane MWCO (Daltons) Qty. of 24 Qty. of 96

5,000 BS4 74-1706 BS4 74-1702$ 53.00 191.00

10,000 BS4 74-1707 BS4 74-1703$

Advantages:

• Designed for 25 µl samplevolumes

• High membrane area/sample volume ratio

• Faster equilibration



• Made of Acetal (Delrin®

by DuPont); reusable

• Membranes available with MWCO’s

• Suits almost any application

NEW


Equilibrium DialysisSp

ecia

lized

Too

ls F

or B

iore

sear

ch

The single use, 96-WellEquilibrium DIALYZER is a novelproduct for the simultaneousassay of 96 samples. Each well inthis system has a separate membrane and thus eliminatesthe possibility of sample cross-contamination. Reproducibility is

very high across the different wells of the Equilibrium DIALYZER andsample recovery is excellent. Wells 96-Well are sealed with 8-cap strips.Twelve top 8-caps strips and twelve bottom 8-cap strips are included.Thus a row of wells or all 96 wells can be used depending on the specifications of the experiment. The 96-Well Equilibrium DIALYZERutilizes high-quality regenerated cellulose membranes available withMWCO’s of 5,000 or 10,000 Daltons. Rotator is required.

Single and Dual Plate RotatorsA Single or Dual Plate Rotator with variable rotation rates is available foruse with the Harvard Apparatus 96-Well Equilibrium DIALYZER. TheRotator speeds up the equilibrium dialysis process by keeping the sam-ple in constant motion thereby ensuring higher reproducibility of results.

8-Plate Rotator OvenThe 8-Plate Rotator Oven is used for temperature controlled studies inthe 96-Well Equilibrium DIALYZER. The Rotator oven consists of the BigSHOT Hybridization Oven (BS4 68-0770) on page N130 and a specialcarousel (BS4 72-4909) to hold up to 8 plates simultaneously.see Microcentrifuges pages N95-N103

Advantages:

• Patented

• 96-well format

• Individual membrane foreach well

• Small sample volumes: 50 µl to 200 µl

• Ultra-thin regenerated cellulose membranes

• Membranes are free ofsulfur and heavy metalcontamination

• High well-to-well reproducibility

• Excellent sample recovery (>95%)

Applications:

• Protein and Protein-drugbinding assays



• Protein-protein andProtein-DNA interactions

96-Well Equilibrium DIALYZER™ Samples from 50 µl to 200 µl (Single use)

8-Plate Rotator OvenBS4 74-2335

96-Well EquilibriumDIALYZER PlateBS4 74-2300

Plate RotatorBS4 74-2302

Catalog No. $ DescriptionBS4 74-2300 383.00 96-Well Equilibrium DIALYZER Plate, Membrane

MWCO 5,000 Daltons, pkg. of 1

BS4 74-2301 383.00 96-Well Equilibrium DIALYZER Plate, MembraneMWCO 10,000 Daltons, pkg. of 1

BS4 74-2302 605.00 Single Plate Rotator, pkg. of 1

Catalog No. $ DescriptionBS4 74-2334 825.00 Dual Plate Rotator, pkg. of 1

BS4 74-2335 3,050.00 8 Plate Rotator Oven, 110 V, pkg. of 1

BS4 74-2336 3,050.00 8 Plate Rotator Oven, 220 V, pkg. of 1

BS4 74-2324 17.00 Strip (8-Cap), (blue) Bottom, pkg. of 12

BS4 74-2325 17.00 Strip (8-Cap), (opaque) Top, pkg. of 12

Dual Plate RotatorBS4 74-2334

U.S. Patent 6,458,275

U.S. Patent


Molecular Biology

Dialysis MembranesMembranes for DIALYZERS

Regenerated CelluloseThese membranes are more stable in organic solvents, but the MWCOrange is not as sharply defined as that of cellulose acetate membranes.The membranes are pre-cut, and supplied in a 0.05% sodium azide solu-tion. They are ready to use after rinsing with deionized water and buffer.Glycerol, sulfur, or heavy metals are not present in these membranes.

PolycarbonateThese membranes are more stable in organic solvents. They are availablein four highly controlled pore sizes for a well defined MWCO range.

Cellulose AcetateThese membranes are low protein binding and have a sharp MWCOrange. The membranes are pre-cut, and supplied in 0.05% sodiumazide solution. They are ready to use after rinsing with deionizedwater and buffer. Glycerol, sulfur, and heavy metals are not present inthese membranes. The cellulose acetate membranes are intendedonly for aqueous solutions, and the presence of an organic solvent isnot recommended.

Membranes for Equilibrium DIALYZERS

Ultra-Thin Membranes for Micro- and Fast Micro-Equilibrium DIALYZERS on pages N40 and N41

MembraneMWCO (Daltons) Qty. of 24 $ Qty. of 96 $

For Use with 25, 50 and 100 µl Volume Chambers

5,000 BS4 74-1704 BS4 74-1700

10,000 BS4 74-1705 43.00 BS4 74-1701 136.00

For Use with 250 and 500 µl Volume Chambers

5,000 BS4 74-1706 53.00 BS4 74-1702 191.00

10,000 BS4 74-1707 BS4 74-1703

Specialty Membranes

MembraneMWCO (Dalton) Qty. of 10 Qty. of 100 Qty. of 200 $

Membranes for Multi-Equilibrium DIALYZERS (page N39)and/or Mini Lipoprep (page N47)

5,000 – – BS4 74-2100

10,000 – – BS4 74-2102 213.00

Membranes for Liposomats

5,000 – BS4 74-6401 – 432.00

A large variety of membranes are available for use with our products. The following tables are designed to assist you

in choosing the appropriate membranes for your needs.

Specialty Membranes for Flow-Thru DIALYZERS on page N33

MembraneMWCO (Dalton) Qty. of 10 Qty. of 100 Qty. of 200 $

Membranes for Flow-Thru DIALYZERS, Cellulose Acetate

100 BS4 74-1508 – –

500 BS4 74-1500 – – 77.00

1,000 BS4 74-1501 – –

2,000 BS4 74-1502 – – 77.00

5,000 BS4 74-1503 – –

10,000 BS4 74-1504 – – 77.00

25,000 BS4 74-1505 – –

50,000 BS4 74-1506 – – 77.00

100,000 BS4 74-1507 – –

Membranes for Flow-Thru DIALYZERS, Regenerated Cellulose

1,000 BS4 74-1510 – –

2,000 BS4 74-1511 – – 82.00

5,000 BS4 74-1512 – –

10,000 BS4 74-1513 – – 82.00

25,000 BS4 74-1514 – –

50,000 BS4 74-1515 – – 82.00

Pore Size Qty. of 10 Qty. of 100 Qty. of 200 $

Polycarbonate Membranes for Flow-Thru DIALYZER

0.01 µm BS4 74-1520 – –

0.05 µm BS4 74-1521 – – 82.00

0.60 µm BS4 74-1522 – –


Dialysis MembranesSp

ecia

lized

Too

ls F

or B

iore

sear

ch

Membranes for DIALYZERS - Size Range from 10 µl to 5,000 µl





Membranes for DIALYZERS on pages N26 thru N32, and N40 to N41

Cellulose Acetate DIALYZERS Size DIALYZERS Size DIALYZERS SizeMembranes Range of 10 µl to 200 µl Range of 250 µl to 1,500 µl Range of 3,000 µl to 5,000 µl

MWCO (Daltons) Qty. of 24 Qty. of 96 Qty. of 24 Qty. of 96 Qty. of 24 Qty. of 96

100 BS4 74-2410 BS4 74-2400 BS4 74-2510 BS4 74-2500 BS4 74-2619 BS4 74-2620$

500 BS4 74-2411 BS4 74-2401 BS4 74-2512 BS4 74-2501 BS4 74-2609 BS4 74-2600$

1,000 BS4 74-2412 BS4 74-2402 BS4 74-2513 BS4 74-2502 BS4 74-2610 BS4 74-2601$

2,000 BS4 74-2413 BS4 74-2403 BS4 74-2514 BS4 74-2503 BS4 74-2612 BS4 74-2602$

5,000 BS4 74-2414 BS4 74-2404 BS4 74-2515 BS4 74-2504 BS4 74-2613 BS4 74-2603$

10,000 BS4 74-2415 BS4 74-2405 BS4 74-2516 BS4 74-2505 BS4 74-2614 BS4 74-2604$

25,000 BS4 74-2416 BS4 74-2406 BS4 74-2517 BS4 74-2506 BS4 74-2615 BS4 74-2605$

50,000 BS4 74-2417 BS4 74-2407 BS4 74-2518 BS4 74-2507 BS4 74-2516 BS4 74-2606$

100,000 BS4 74-2418 BS4 74-2408 BS4 74-2519 BS4 74-2508 BS4 74-2617 BS4 74-2607$

300,000 BS4 74-2419 BS4 74-2409 BS4 74-2520 BS4 74-2509 BS4 74-2618 BS4 74-2608$

Regenerated Cellulose Membranes

MWCO (Daltons)

1,000 BS4 74-2706 BS4 74-2700 BS4 74-2806 BS4 74-2800 BS4 74-2906 BS4 74-2900$

2,000 BS4 74-2707 BS4 74-2701 BS4 74-2807 BS4 74-2801 BS4 74-2907 BS4 74-2901$

5,000 BS4 74-2708 BS4 74-2702 BS4 74-2808 BS4 74-2802 BS4 74-2908 BS4 74-2902$

10,000 BS4 74-2709 BS4 74-2703 BS4 74-2809 BS4 74-2803 BS4 74-2909 BS4 74-2903$

25,000 BS4 74-2410 BS4 74-2704 BS4 74-2810 BS4 74-2804 BS4 74-2910 BS4 74-2904$

50,000 BS4 74-2411 BS4 74-2705 BS4 74-2811 BS4 74-2805 BS4 74-2911 BS4 74-2905$

Polycarbonate Membranes

Membrane Pore Size

0.01 µm BS4 74-3103 BS4 74-3100 BS4 74-3203 BS4 74-3200 BS4 74-3303 BS4 74-3300$

0.05 µm BS4 74-3104 BS4 74-3101 BS4 74-3204 BS4 74-3201 BS4 74-3304 BS4 74-3301$

0.10 µm BS4 74-3106 BS4 74-3107 BS4 74-3206 BS4 74-3207 BS4 74-3306 BS4 74-3307$

0.60 µm BS4 74-3105 BS4 74-3102 BS4 74-3205 BS4 74-3202 BS4 74-3305 BS4 74-3302$


Molecular Biology

Liposome Products

Advantages

• Fast, easy to use

• Unilamellar

• Reproducible

• Uniformly-sized (25 to 800nm)

• Very high encapsulation

• Low lipid loss (1 to 2%)

• Stable liposomes (one year or longer)

Applications

• Drug delivery

• DNA delivery and gene therapy

• Cell-cell interactions

• Cosmetics

• Diagnostics

Harvard Apparatus offers two instruments, the Mini Lipoprep and theLiposomat, for fast, easy and reproducible liposome preparation. No prior experience in liposome preparation is necessary.

Using these systems, liposomes can be prepared with virtually anylipid, depending on the specifications of the experiment and the typesof biomolecules that need to be encapsulated. Liposome preparationwith these instruments is highly reproducible and compared to otherliposome preparation methods on the market, these liposomes arevery stable. Under sterile conditions, liposomes prepared using theMini Lipoprep and Liposomat can be stored for one year or longer.

Harvard Apparatus Liposomes

Today liposomes are an important part of biological, pharmaceutical,and medical research. Because liposomes are the most effective carriers for the introduction of many different types of agents intocells, the applications of liposome-based samples and products areextremely wide. A few examples are presented below:

• Liposomes are used for studying protein-liposome interactions with compounds such as serum lipoproteins,lectins, toxins and clotting components.

• They are used for the entrapment of anti-tumor agents, anti-microbial drugs, anti-inflammatory and immunomodulatory agents and CNS-active drugs. The therapeutic applications are presently include cancer therapy, arthritis, metal chelation therapy, enzyme replacement therapy, hemophilia (factor VIII), myocardialinfarction, and as radiopharmaceutical markers.

• Liposomes are used for studying in vitro and in vivo liposome-cell interactions.

• They are used for reconstitution experiments especially forion transport systems.

• In molecular biology, liposomes are used for the mediateddelivery of macromolecules into eukaryotic cells.

• In immunology, antigens encapsulated in liposomes are usedto generate antibodies, to mediate active and passive immunization and for many other applications.

• The use of liposomes in gene-based technology and inbroader biotechnology and pharmaceutical applications isincreasing day by day.

Introduction to Liposomes


Liposome ProductsSp

ecia

lized

Too

ls F

or B

iore

sear

ch

Liposome PreparationLiposome SpecificationsWith a few exceptions, liposomes are composed of natural or synthetic phospholipids, mostly lecithins. Hence, they can be metabolized in vivo and are generally non-toxic and non-antigenic.

Agents can be entrapped in liposomes without the formation of chemical bonds and sensitive molecules can be protected withinthem. Because of their restricted permeability, liposomal preparations offer a controllable, time-dependent release system.

The entrapment of a drug within liposomes changes its pharmaco-kinetics and can result in a better therapeutic index andenhanced cellular uptake. Since different agents need different lipidagents to create an optimal coat, in vivo experiments following liposome preparation are often the optimal means of determiningwhich lipid represents the best compromise between permeabilityand in vivo stability for any given agent.

EYL = egg yolk lecithin

chol = cholesterol

PE = phosphatidylethanolamine

DPPC = dipalmitoyl phosphatidylcholine

DSPC = distearoyl phosphatidylcholine

DCP = dicetylphosphate

PI = phosphatidylinositol

PA = phosphatidic acid

SA = stearylamine

DMPA = dimyristoyl phosphtidic acid

Unilamellar Liposomes of Various Lipid Mixtures Prepared by Controlled Detergent Removal Using the Liposomat(total lipid concentration varied between 10 and 13 mg/ml)

Lipid Composition Molar Ratio Detergent Molar Lipid / Detergent Ratio Liposome Diameter (nm)

EYL - cholate 0.60 55 ±3

EYL - cholate 0.76 68 ±3

EYL/chol 8:2 cholate 1.15 81 ±4

EYL/chol 7:3 cholate 0.52 61 ±4

EYL/PE 3:7 cholate 0.22 36 ±2

EYL/PI 8:2 cholate 0.60 59 ±2

EYL/PA 10:2 cholate 0.62 42 ±2

EYL/SA 10:2 cholate 0.62 49 ±2

EYL/cerebroside - cholate 0.60 81 ±4

DPPC/DMPA 9:1 cholate 0.20 97 ±4

DSPC/DCP 9:1 cholate 0.20 74 ±4

DPPC/DMPA 9:1 cholate 0.62 90 ±4

EYL - n-octyl-glucoside 0.20 176 ±3

EYL - n-octyl-glucoside/n-heptyl glucoside 0.80/0.17 117 ±3

EYL - n-heptyl glucoside 0.13 79 ±2

EYL - n-hexyl glucoside 0.05 59 ±2

DSPC/chol/DCP 7:2:1 n-octyl-glucoside 0.20 79 ±4

Hydrogenated soya 9:1 n-octyl-glucoside 0.20 130 ±5Lecithin/DMPA

Stability of LiposomesNo general rule for maintaining liposome stability exists since itdepends on several parameters, such as the type of lipid used, theproperties of the drug/agent in the liposomes, their size, lamellarity,and homogeneity, the electrolyte content and pH of the mediumused, and also on the specifications of the desired application.

Size ControlThe size of liposomes can be adjusted experimentally by varying several parameters: the dialysis rate, type of detergent, type oflipid(s), lipid/detergent molar ratio, lipid concentration, electrolytecontent and pH.

DetergentsThe detergents used are gentle in their action and are not expectedto hydrolyze or peroxidize liposome components. The most frequently used detergents are sodium cholate, n-octyl-b-D-glucopyranoside and n-octyl-tetraoxyethylene (POE4). Other detergents are sodium salts of glycocholic acid, deoxycholic acid,taurocholic acid, chenoxycholic acid, n-hexyl- and n-heptyl-glucopyranoside and lauryldimethylamine oxide.

Table reprinted with permission of H.G.Weder and O. Zumbuehl


Molecular Biology

Liposome ProductsLiposome Preparation

Mini Lipoprep• The Mini Lipoprep is well suited for the preparation of small

volumes of liposomes (0.5 ml to 1.0 ml).

• It consists of a sample chamber, which is used with a membrane, and a motor to rotate the sample chamber atconstant speed.

• Liposomes are formed during dialysis of the detergent in thelipid/detergent micelles through the membrane.

• Using the Mini Lipoprep, unilamellar homogeneous lipo-somes can be prepared in 2 to 3 hours.

Catalog No. $ DescriptionMini Lipoprep

BS4 74-6300 1,414.00 Mini Lipoprep with Dual Speed Drive Unit (10/20 rpm), Dialysis Cell (500 µl to 1000 µl) and200 Membranes (MWCO 10,000 Daltons Very High Permeability), qty. of 1

BS4 74-2100 191.00 Membranes for Mini Lipoprep MWCO 5,000Daltons, qty. of 200

BS4 74-2102 213.00 Membranes for Mini Lipoprep MWCO 10,000Daltons Very High Permeability

BS4 74-6304 148.00 Kit for Liposome Preparation (for 20 Preparations);includes: 500mg Phosphatidylcholine from Soya-bean, and 800mg Cholic Acid Sodium Salt, qty. of 1

Liposomat• The Liposomat is ideal for the preparation of liposomes of

volumes from 3 ml to 50 ml or higher.

• The system has two serpentine channels superimposed oneach other and separated by a membrane.

• Each channel has a volume of 3 ml and a length of 3 meters.The mixed lipid/detergent micelles run through one of thechannels while the buffer flows through the other channel.

• Due to controlled dialysis and the high surface area in thesystem, liposomes can be formed within 30 minutes.

• The serpentine chambers can also be immersed in a waterbath for liposome production at constant temperature.

Catalog No. $ DescriptionLiposomat

BS4 74-6400 8,310.00 Liposomat Device for Preparation of Liposomes (3 ml to 50 ml) with Dual Pump, Flow-ThroughDialysis Chamber and 100 Membranes (MWCO5,000 Daltons), qty. of 1

BS4 74-6401 432.00 Membranes for Liposomat (MWCO 5,000 Daltons),qty. of 100

BS4 74-6402 213.00 Long Tubing for Use of Liposomat with Thermostat,qty. of 1

Liposomes are formed when detergents are removed from an equilibri-ated lipid/detergent solution by dialysis.

LiposomatBS4 74-6400

Liposomes Detergent

Liposomes


ElectrophoresisSp

ecia

lized

Too

ls F

or B

iore

sear

ch

CoZap is used for rapid removal of Coomassie Blue stainfrom electrophoresis gels without the need to change thedestaining solution. CoZap is a unique pad that has ahigh absorbence for Coomassie blue stain and is thusvery effective in destaining gels. CoZap absorbs any freedye in the solution making gel destaining 20% faster thanwith conventional method. It is one of the most effectivedestaining methods on the market.

Using CoZap is easy:

1. Place the CoZap pad in your destaining tank.

2. Remove the gel after destaining.

Cat. No. $ Size ProductBS4 74-6800 78.00 76 x 76 x 2 mm CoZap Pads,

pkg. of 25

BS4 74-6801 286.00 76 x 76 x 2 mm CoZap Pads,pkg. of 100

BS4 74-6802 99.00 76 x 38 x 2 mm CoZap Pads,pkg. of 100

BS4 74-6803 195.00 76 x 38 x 2 mm Cozap Pads,pkg. of 200

• No need to change the destaining solution!

• Fast and simple

• No charcoal or dye residues

• No subsequent destaining required

• One pad can destain up to 10 gels

• 20% faster than conventional methods

CoZap Pads

CoZap

Hoefer is world-renowned asthe premier supplier of gelelectrophoresis equipmentand related products.Founded in San Francisco in1967 by Peter and JacquelineHoefer, the company rapidlybecame recognized as aninnovator and its distinctiveproducts can be found in laboratories all around the world.

From the beginning, Peter Hoefer’s mission was to offer scientists instru-ments that would yield high quality, consistent and reproducible elec-trophoretic separations. As a result, Hoefer has for 36 years served the sci-entific community with well designed products, manufactured and testedto very high standards of excellence. The company is ISO 9000 accreditedand has an exceptional service record.

In addition to high quality instruments, Hoefer offers superior customersupport. The Research and Development Director, Dr. Eric Hungerman,manages a team of bio-chemists, engineers and support staff who arealways on hand to solve customer problems. “We love talking to cus-tomers” Eric says, “not only do we get the satisfaction of helping themsolve problems but we get a chance to innovate and introduce new prod-ucts that customers need.”

In 1995, Hoefer was acquired by Pharmacia Biotech and later byAmersham Biosciences who distributed Hoefer products on a global basis.In November 2003, the 1-D gel electrophoresis part of the business wasacquired by Harvard Biosciences and a long term distribution agreementwas reached with Amersham Biosciences by which Amersham will continue sales of existing Hoefer products and new products under development.

Managing Director, Hugh Douglas, has been working with both Peter andJacqueline Hoefer since the early days and is enthusiastic about the futureof Hoefer. “Hoefer is different, it has a culture all of its own and now wehave the freedom to develop brand new products, both 1-D and 2-D whichwe can sell via our good friends at Amersham Biosciences or directly our-selves or via individual distributors, under the Hoefer brand name. I ampleased that so many of our original team remain with us…which meansthat there is a huge amount of electrophoresis experience to be sharedwith our customers”.

Jacqueline Hoefer remains a continuing source of support for the newcompany. “I’m delighted with the new Hoefer, Inc., the future looks verybright indeed and I am so pleased with the investments that are beingmade regarding new products”.

So Hoefer is alive, well and thriving, continuing its search for excellenceand maintaining its position as a premier global supplier of gel elec-trophoresis equipment.

Hoefer™ Gel ElectrophoresisProducts

NEW


Molecular Biology

Electrophoresis

The Hoefer™ SE 600 Chroma is ideal for running 8 or 16 cm longgels. The key to outstanding, reproducible electrophoresis results istemperature control. Gels unequally cooled on their two faces produce slanted bands appearing as broad or double bands instained gels. SE 600 Chroma ensures uniform heat in gels because,firstly, the gels are completely immersed in the lower buffer for uniform heat transfer and, secondly, a standard magnetic stirrer circulates buffer around the vertically suspended heat exchanger tomaintain homogeneous lower buffer temperature. The ergonomically designed SE 600 Chroma provides two built-in sidehandles, which facilitates carrying and handling.

Use divider plates to double gel capacity and run up to four gels (up to 112 samples) in a single run. Divider plates convert single gelsandwiches into two-gel club sandwiches which seal and fit into thecasting stand exactly like single gels.

Use the Hoefer™ SE 660 to run gels longer than 16 cm. This unit runsgels up to 24 cm. Except for gel length, the Hoefer™ SE 660 has identical features to those of Hoefer™ SE 600 Chroma.

Catalog No. $ ProductBS4 68-4026 1,448.00 Hoefer SE 600 Chroma Dual Cooled Vertical Unit,

for 18 x 16 cm plates, Complete

BS4 68-4027 1,891.00 Hoefer SE 660 Dual Cooled Vertical Unit, for 18 x 24 cm plates, Basic

Accessories

BS4 68-4028 63.00 Glass Plates, 18 x 8 cm, pkg. of 2

BS4 68-4029 138.00 Glass Plates, 18 x 8 cm, low fluorescence, pkg. of 2

BS4 68-4030 117.00 Glass Plate Divider, notched, 18 x 8 cm, pkg. of 1



BS4 68-4033 77.00 Glass Plates Divider, notched, 18 x 16 cm, pkg. of 1



BS4 68-4036 82.00 Glass Plate Divider, notched, 18 x 24 cm, pkg. of 1

• Run denaturing and native polyacrylamide, 2-D, isoelectricfocusing, agarose, and nucleic acid gel electrophoresis

• Maintain temperature between 1 and 45°C with built-inheat exchanger for faster runs with no sacrifice in quality

• Run two gels simultaneously or run four gels using accessory divider plates

• Cast single or multiple gels in the two-place casting standor in the four-gel or ten-gel accessory casters

• Customize gel configurations with a wide array of accessory combs and spacers

Hoefer™ SE 600 Chroma and SE 660 Dual Cooled Vertical UnitsNEW


ElectrophoresisSp

ecia

lized

Too

ls F

or B

iore

sear

ch

The Hoefer™ miniVE System Blot Module performs electrophoresisand electrotransfer. Conveniently designed, this system’s modulardesign consolidates all the small parts for electrophoresis and blotting into one convenient unit. Uniform gel temperature is maintained with the tank-style lower buffer chamber. A full tank stabilizes the temperature so that lanes are straight and bands areflat. The Hoefer™ Blot Module will accept two gel/membrane stackssimultaneously. The lower buffer chamber is designed to hold twoBlot Modules, allowing four gels to be blotted at once.

The gel module is simultaneously a casting stand and an upper bufferchamber with integrated clamps. Simply assemble the gel sandwichof plates and spacers, clamp it onto the upper buffer chamber, thenpivot the sealing gasket and cast the gel. After polymerization, simplyrelease the bottom seal and drop the assembly into the tank for running. No extra parts are needed and no unclamping until the runis finished.

Hoefer miniVE handles gel cassettes up to 10 x 10.5 cm (W x H),which increases the separation length by more than 30% over conventional 10 x 8 cm gels. For gradient gels, mini-Vertical GelCasters can produce up to four identical gels at one time.

Catalog No. $ ProductBS4 68-4020 729.00 Hoefer miniVE, Complete

BS4 68-4021 383.00 Hoefer Blot Module

BS4 68-4022 321.00 Hoefer 4-Gel Caster Complete

BS4 68-4007 1,382.00 PS 2A200 Power Supply

Accessories

BS4 68-4023 332.00 Glass Plates, 10.1 x 10.5 cm (L x W), pkg. of 5

BS4 68-4024 41.00 Alumina Plates, 10.1 x 10.5 cm (L x W), pkg. of 5

• Perform electrophoresis and electrotransfer in a singlecompact unit

• Cast, run, and blot mini-gels in four streamlined components: gel module, blot module, lower buffer chamber, safety lid

• Run two mini-gels or four mini-blots at once

• Use 10 x 10.5- cm gel cassettes for increased separationdistances

• Complete semi-wet blotting in 45 min with only 300 ml buffer

• Choose pre-cast gels from a variety of manufacturers

Hoefer™ miniVE Vertical Electrophoresis SystemNEW

BS4 68-4020Hoefer miniVE

BS4 68-0421 Blot Module


Molecular Biology

Electrophoresis

The Max Submarine Unit offers thebest value for general applicationsuse in a standard-sized format.This Unit offers a variety of gellengths and comb sizes so that youcan run exactly the gel you need.Cast gels 15 cm wide x 10, 15, or20 cm long, with one or twocombs. Comb choices range from

a preparative comb, for a 1 ml fragment purification sample, to a 30 wellcomb for high-throughput PCR screening. An adjustable comb backenables you to control the depth of sample wells.

Every design detail of the Submarine Max contributes to reliability anddurability: seamless molded high impact plastic buffer tray; banana plugssafe from corrosion; a guard to protect the platinum electrodes; electrodecarrier for simple electrode replacement; a rugged molded lid with safety guards to protect against electrical hazard; a large diameter bubblelevel and leveling feet; strain-relieved high voltage power cords; and redand black details on running trays and buffer chamber for orientation.

Durability and ease of use are engineered into the Running Trays: thickUVT acrylic; self-locating/centering guides to prevent tray floating or slid-ing; tray handles that align combs squarely at either end or the center ofthe gel; and flush tray ends for foam seal, or taping if you wish. Runningtrays seat snugly into the casting tray where the ends are sealed by closed-cell foam strips. No tape or loose parts required; the agarose stays whereit belongs - on the running tray. For special non-submarine applications,you have the option of using the Max agarose dam casting feature.

Catalog No. $ ProductBS4 68-4000 393.00 Hoefer HE 99X Max Submarine Unit, Basic. (Order

gel casting kit, comb and comb back separately)

BS4 68-4001 536.00 Hoefer HE 99X Max Submarine Unit, Complete

Accessories and Replacement Parts

BS4 68-4002 35.00 Comb Back for HE 99X Combs with 2 screws, pkg. of 1

BS4 68-4003 46.00 Foam Sealing Gaskets, pkg. of 4

BS4 68-4004 122.00 HE 99X Gel Casting Kit, 15 x 10 cm



Hoefer™ HE 33 Mini SubmarineUnit gives enhanced passivecooling for faster runs. This Unithas an enhanced passive coolingsystem, allowing you to run gelsat high voltages for unparalleledspeed and resolution in a mini-gel submarine unit. The novelmolded base is designed to befilled with a common coolantsuch as 50% ethylene glycol sothat it readily maintains short-term cooling capacity after

chilling in a freezer. This allows for highly efficient heat exchange.

Catalog No. $ ProductBS4 68-4008 321.00 Hoefer HE 33 Mini Submarine Unit, Basic

BS4 68-4009 347.00 Hoefer HE 33 Mini Submarine Unit, Complete


BS4 68-4010 235.00 Buffer chamber assembly

BS4 68-4011 29.00 Comb back with 2 screws for HE 33 combs

BS4 68-4012 168.00 Lid with power cables

BS4 68-4013 13.00 Filling plug, top, pkg. of 4

BS4 68-4014 14.00 Filling plug, bottom, pkg. of 1

BS4 68-4015 49.00 Gel running tray, UVT, 7 x 10 cm

BS4 68-4016 49.00 Casting tray, 7 x 10 cm

BS4 68-4017 90.00 Gel casting kit with casting tray and running tray, 7 x 10 cm

BS4 68-4018 19.00 Foam gasket, pkg. of 2

BS4 68-4019 66.00 Electrode replacement kit

• Coolant-insulated bufferchamber runs 7 x 10 cmagarose gels in less than20 min.

• Convenient, leak-proofcasting trays mean fast gel casting without tape.

• UV-transparent gel trayoffers convenient gel handling and viewing.

• Combs allow up to 32 samples per run

• Versatile submarine unit is ideal for any molecularbiology lab

• Run as many as 60 samples at once

• Casting kits require notape or dams

Hoefer™ HE 33 Mini Submarine Unit

Hoefer™ HE 99X Max Submarine Unit

NEW NEW

Hoefer HE 33 MiniSubmarine Unit

BS4 68-4017 Gel casting kit with casting and running tray


ElectrophoresisSp

ecia

lized

Too

ls F

or B

iore

sear

ch The Mini Tank Transfer Unit per-forms mini-gel tank electro-transfer for Western, Southernand Northern blots. To assure auniform electrical field, MiniTank Transfer Unit has 80 cm ofwire in seven parallel strands oneach electrode panel. The built-in alumina-covered heatexchanger dissipates the heatgenerated by tank electrotrans-fer. The temperature rises nomore than 5°C during a typical

transfer with a magnetic stirrer circulating the buffer, and tap waterrunning through the heat exchanger.

Catalog No. $ ProductBS4 68-4037 133.00 Hoefer TE 22 Mini Tank Transfer Unit

BS4 68-4038 77.00 Gel Cassette, 2 Foam Sponges 3 mm Thick and 1Foam Sponge 6 mm Thick, pkg. of 1

BS4 68-4039 24.00 Foam Sponges, 9 x 10.5 cm, 6 mm Thick (1/4 in),pkg. of 4

BS4 68-4040 20.00 Foam Sponges, 9 x 10.5 cm, 3 mm Thick (1/8 in),pkg. of 4

BS4 68-4041 225.00 Electrode Panel, pkg. of 1


These new Transfer Units featurenew hinged cassettes molded oftough, glass filled polyether sulfone for increased durability.The new gel cassettes provide astiff backbone for the gel andmembrane sandwiches. Thehinged halves lock together forequal pressure across the gel.The grid design of the gel cas-settes maximizes the open areafor even transfers of gels up to15 x 21 cm. The crucial element for uniform elec-

trophoretic transfer, a uniform electrical field, is assured by spacingthe electrode panels 10 cm apart and incorporating 140 cm of wirein an evenly-spaced pattern. For safety, the electrode panels arelocked securely into the Transfer Unit, but can be easily removed forday-to-day use.

The TE 42 Tank Transfer unit is similar to the TE 62. It can efficient-ly transfer up to four 15 x 21 cm gels. This unit differs from the TE62 in that the heat exchanger is optional on the TE 42. With the heatexchanger in place, the TE 42 can transfer a maximum of 2 gels.

Catalog No. $ ProductBS4 68-4042 1,377.00 Hoefer TE 62 Transfer Cooled Unit

BS4 68-4048 1,173.00 Hoefer TE 42 Transfer Unit



BS4 68-4043 316.00 Electrode Panel, Black, pkg. of 1

BS4 68-4044 316.00 Electrode Panel, Gray, pkg. of 1

BS4 68-4045 102.00 Gel Cassette, 2 Foam Sponges 3 mm Thick and 1Foam Sponge 6 mm Thick, pkg. of 1

BS4 68-4046 21.00 Foam Sponges, 6 mm (1/4 in), pkg. of 4

BS4 68-4047 20.00 Foam Sponges, 3 mm (1/8 in), pkg. of 4

• Perform protein and nucleic acid transfers inless than one hour

• Transfer four mini-gels upto 9 x 10 cm in about 1Lof buffer

• Control transfer tempera-ture through built-in alumina heat exchanger

• Set-up transfers quicklywith the hinged, color-coded cassettes

• Transfer four standardgels or 16 mini-gels

• Load cassettes easilywith even contactbetween the gel andtransfer membrane

• Safe, sturdy electrodepanels lock automaticallyin place

• Efficient transfer due toevenly spaced verticalplatinum wire on electrode panel

NEW Hoefer™ TE 22 Mini Tank Transfer Unit

Hoefer™ TE 62 and TE 42 Transfer Units

NEW


Molecular Biology

Electrophoresis

PS Power Supply covers the wide range of electrophoresis and blotting applica-tions. Designed for performance, the PS Power Supply can be relied on for safe-ty and reproducibility.

General guidelines for using power supplies:The constant current mode is recommended for blotting to prevent overheating,while the constant voltage mode is recommended for other applications, such asnucleic acid submarine and mini vertical gel electrophoresis. When connectingtwo electrophoresis units to the same power supply, twice as much current isrequired at the same voltage. To maintain a constant temperature without usinga thermostatic circulator, use the constant power mode.

PS 2A200 Power SupplyThe PS 2A200 Power Supply is designed for high current applications such astank blotting. This unit features single-unit increments in settings and read-outsfor precision and reproducibility. It generates a print log of run parameters viaRS-232 port and runs at constant voltage, constant current, or constant powermodes. This unit can store and recall three protocols.

Hoefer™ PS Power SupplyNEW

• Easy to read digital display

• Timed or continuous runs, with end-of-run alarm, if desired

• Automatic parameter limit crossover to prevent overheating and protectexperiments and equipment

• Automatic recovery after power failure

• Membrane keypads for easy programming

• Two pairs of power outlets for duplicateparallel runs

Power Supply Selection by Application

Power SupplyApplication Electrophoresis Equipment EPS 2A200

Standard SDS-PAGE Hoefer SE 600 and 660 (16 cm long) X

Mini SDS-PAGE Hoefer miniVE #

Submarine Hoefer HE 33 and 99X #

Western Blotting (mini-tank) Hoefer TE 22 •Western Blotting (standard tank) Hoefer TE 62 •• Recommended

# Possible but not recommended: may exceed safety limits of the instrument

X Has limited voltage range for some applications

SpecificationsPS 2A200

Output Range:Voltage 0 to 200 VCurrent 0 to 2000 Power 1 to 200 W

Timer, Run End 0 to 999 min continuous

Output Connector Type* 4 mm

Programs Stored 3 protocols, 1 phase

AC PowerRequirement (Mains) 90-132/180-265 VAC;

47-63 Hz; 325 W

Safety Features overload/short circuitprotection no-loaddetection

Dimensions 110 x 270 x 220 mm

Weight 2.2 kg

Catalog No. $ ProductBS4 68-4007 1,382.00 PS 2A200 Power Supply, 200 V, 2000 mA, 200 W max

Hoefer™ SE 100 Plate Washer and Storage Unit simplifiesglass plate handling. This unit dramatically reduces thenumber of plates lost to chipping or cracking duringcleaning, then stores the cleaned plates out of harm’sway. The Plate holder is a rectangular container 19 x 10x 12 cm, grooved on all sides and open at the top andbottom. Glass plates fit vertically into the plate holdergrooves. Lengthwise, the plate holder will hold ten plates10 to 18 cm long; widthwise, it will hold twenty plates 8cm long. SE 100 Plate Washer is an ideal accessory forall Hoefer™ vertical units.

Catalog No. $ ProductBS4 68-4025 306.00 Hoefer SE 100 Plate Washer and

Storage Unit

• Soak, rinse and store multiple gel plates with convenient rack and covered tank

• Protects gel plates from chipping and crackingduring handling and storage

• Adjusts for plates from 8 x 10 cm to 18 x 16 cm

• Holds ten 10 to 18 cm plates or twenty 8 cm plates

Hoefer™ SE 100 PlateWasher and Storage Unit

NEW


Horizontal Gel UnitsSp

ecia

lized

Too

ls F

or B

iore

sear

ch

Introduction to Scie-Plas Horizontal Gel Units

Maxi-Plus

Maxi

Midi

Mini-Plus

Mini

Fast-Mini

Battery †

The Scie-Plas ‘Green Range’ of electrophoresis products hasbeen designed by Scientists for Scientists over a period of several years. Scie-Plas is constantly incorporating new ideasinto its products, those of both researchers and the company’s manufacturing engineers. The result is a range of electrophoresis products which is not only user-friendly butalso safe.

Scie-Plas electrophoresis products feature the following :

• The CE logo of safety compliance

• Robust acrylic construction

• Safety lids with integral power leads

• Shrouded power connectors

• Long-life, pure platinum electrodes, which are user replaceable

• Gold plated terminals and stainless steel washerswhich resist corrosion

The Scie-Plas range of Horizontal Gel Electrophoresis Units comprises seven models covering gel sizes from 6 x 7.5 cm upto 25 x 30 cm. Additionally, the two largest models are avail-able with cooled bases to allow gels to be run at higher voltageswithout loss of resolution.

All models incorporate the many design and safety featuresrecommended by scientists. The resulting range of gel units ismanufactured to the highest specification, well finished, easy touse and extremely safe. They conform to all of the requiredEuropean CE safety regulations.

The Mini series are ideal for a wide range of samples including those from plasmid preps, PCR® reactions, restriction fragments, RFLP analyses, etc. Additionally, theyoffer very fast separation of DNA and RNA restriction fragments in agarose gels.

The Midi series accommodates standard gels for both analytical and preparative studies of nucleic acids.


Molecular Biology

Horizontal Gel Units

GEL CASTING TRAYManufactured in UV transparent acrylic.

End grooves for seating the Gel Casting Gates.

Slots for positioning the combs

COMBSA wide range of combsare available for everymodel - colour coded

for thickness

POWERCONNECTION

When the lid is open a physical barrier prevents

power leads from making an electrical

connection to the tank

LIFT OFF LIDSafety lids fit on one

way only, this preventsaccess to live

components

WHITE GEL TABLEEnhances the

visibility of markerdyes and samples

as they migratethrough the gel

CASTING GATESOn Maxi and

Maxi-Plus models,5mm gates fit neatly

into grooves to create convenient

tape-free seals

ELECTRODESOf pure platinum,

and can be easily replaced

by the user

EASILY CARRIEDCarrying handles addstrength to the units,as well as facilitatingtheir transportation,

for example, whenemptying used buffer

COLORED STRIPSWhen attached to the

White Gel Table, thesecolored strips

enhance visibilitywhen sample loading

Introduction to Horizontal Gel Units

The Maxi series are designed for high resolution electrophoresis. Applications include DNA analysis and PCR® and restriction fragmentscreening. Maxi-Plus, with its massive 624 sample capability, provides rapid and convenient screening of PCR® products, eg. HLA typing.

Gel CastingIn both the Battery Gel and the Fast-Mini Gel, agarose is poured directly into the UV transparent unit. The HU6, HU10 and HU13 units,have a 6mm thick UV-transparent gel casting tray. These are manufactured with silicone rubber end gaskets, which fit snugly into precision, machined groves. This allows rapid, simple and reliable tape-free gel pouring, directly in the running tank. Additional gelsmay be cast using a separate gel casting unit. The larger HU20 and HU25 Units, have gel casting gates with edged gaskets. The castinggates are placed in the gel casting tray for leak-free gel pouring. Each unit is supplied with appropriate combs and a gel running/casting tray.



ecia

lized

Too

ls F

or B

iore

sear

ch

Fast Mini and Battery Mini with Built-in Casting Tray

This Fast Mini Horizontal Gel Unit is designed for routineelectrophoresis. Its ultra-compact size requires the useof minimum buffer volumes. The gel is cast directly in theunit, with the casting gates in place. To run the system,the gates are simply removed. Its compact size allows thecomplete UV-transparent unit to be easily placed on atransilluminator for gel visualisation.

The Battery Minigel is designed for electrophoresis withcomplete safety - NO POWER SUPPLY REQUIRED. Itrequires only minimum amounts of gel and running buffer.The unit is ideal for a wide range of samples includingthose from plasmid preps, PCR® reactions etc. The gel iscast directly in the UV-transparent tank, with the gel casting gates in place. Simply remove the gates, add run-ning buffer and samples to run the system. The unit can beused in conjunction with a low voltage power supply, witha specially adapted lid, which is available as an accessory.

Gel Size: 10 x 8 cm

Gel Size: 6 x 7.5 cm

Catalog No. $ Model DescriptionBS4 68-0351 256.00 H1-SET Fast-Mini Horizontal Gel Unit with Built-In Gel Tray:

Includes 2 x Gel Casting Gates, 2 x 1.5 mm 8 Sample Combs

BS4 68-0364 20.00 H1-CG Plastic Casting Gates, pkg. of 2

BS4 68-0340 198.00 BS4-SET Battery Operated Mini Gel Unit with Built-In Gel Casting Tray:Includes 2 x Gel Casting Gates, 1 x 1 mm 8 Sample Comb, 2 x Non-Rechargeable PP3 Batteries

BS4 68-0345 20.00 BS4-CG Gel Casting Gates, pkg. of 2

BS4 68-0346 18.00 BS4-BAT PP3, Non-Rechargeable Batteries, pkg. of 2

Fast Mini

• Accommodates standard gels forboth analytical and preparative studies of nucleic acids

• Compact size

• Low buffer volumes

• Gels cast directly in the unit

• Whole unit can be placed on UVtransilluminator

• Robust UV-transparent acrylic construction

• Dual comb slots

Battery Mini

• Accommodates pre-cast agarose gels

• Battery pack with integrated safety lid

• Safety lid provides complete protection to the user

SpecificationsGel Dimensions, W x L:

Fast-Mini 10 x 8 cm (3.9 x 3.2 in)Battery 6 x 7.5 cm (2.4 x 3 in)

Unit Dimensions, W x L x H:Fast-Mini 13.5 x 15 x 3 cm

(5.3 x 5.9 x 1.2 in)Battery 11 x 17 x 3.5 cm

(4.3 x 6.7 x 1.4 in)

Maximum Sample:Fast-Mini 40 capacityBattery 32

Buffer Volume:Fast-Mini 50 mlBattery 50 ml

Combs Available: Number ofSamples:

Fast Mini 1, 4, 8, 12, 16, 20Battery 4, 8, 12, 16

Thicknesses:Fast-Mini 1.0 mmBattery 1.0, 1.5 mm


Molecular Biology

Horizontal Gel UnitsMini Horizontal with Removable Gel Casting Tray


MINIGEL CASTING for Mini, Mini-Plus and Midi Series

Make sure that the siliconegasket is seated evenly inthe groove, with the endsflush with the top of the tray.Insert the tray so that the sil-icone rubber forms a tight,leak free seal with the wallsof the casting unit.

MULTIPLE MINIGEL CASTING for Mini, Mini-Plus and Midi Series

• Designed for very fast separation ofDNA and RNA restriction fragmentsin agarose gels

• Compact size


• Ideal for rapid electrophoresis

Mini Horizontal Gel Units are ideal for routine rapid electrophoresis. They feature aremovable UV-transparent gel casting tray,with end gaskets which allows the gel to becast directly in the running tank. Extra gelscan be cast using an additional gel casting unit.

Lift the gel casting tray outof the unit. Make sure thatthe silicone gasket is seatedevenly in the groove, withthe ends flush with the topof the tray. Turn the traythrough 90°

Insert the tray so that the silicone rubber forms a tight,leak free seal with the wallsof the gel tank.

The agarose gel should becooled to 50°, poured intothe tray and allowed to set.When ready, lift the runningtray, turn it through 90° andreplace in tank...

Gel is ready for sample loading and run.

Insert the appropriatecomb(s) into the combslot(s). Scie-Plas offers awide range of combs, colour-coded for thickness

The agarose gel should becooled to 50°, poured intothe tray and allowed to set.

When ready, remove traysfrom casting unit and placein running unit for immediateelectrophoresis or storewrapped in clingfilm at 4°C.

SpecificationsGel Dimensions, Mini , W x L 6 x 7.5 cm

(2.4 x 3 in)

Unit Dimensions, Mini, W x L x H 13 x 24 x 6.5 cm(5.1 x 9.5 x 2.6 in)

Max. Sample Capacity, Mini 32

Buffer Volume, Mini 325 ml

Combs Available:No. of Samples 4, 8, 12, 16Thicknesses 1.0, 1.5, 2.0 mm

Catalog No. $ Model DescriptionBS4 68-0365 297.00 HU6 Mini Horizontal Gel Unit with Removable Gel Casting Tray.

Includes: 1 x UV Tray 6 x 7.5cm (W x L), 2 x 1.0mm 8 Sample Combs

BS4 68-0378 59.00 HU6-UT Gel Casting Tray 6 x 7.5cm

BS4 68-0379 11.00 HU-SG Silicone Gasket, 1 m

BS4 68-0380 11.00 HU6-CS Coloured Loading Strips

BS4 68-0381 68.00 HU6-CU External Casting Unit for 3 Gel Casting Trays

BS4 68-0350 50.00 PT-0.2 Replacement 0.2mm Pt Electrode, 50cm

Catalog No. $ DescriptionBS4 68-0366 32.00 Comb 1.0 mm,

4 Sample

BS4 68-0367 32.00 Comb 1.0 mm, 8 Sample

BS4 68-0368 32.00 Comb 1.0 mm, 12 Sample

BS4 68-0369 32.00 Comb 1.0 mm, 16 Sample

BS4 68-0370 33.00 Comb 1.5 mm, 4 Sample

BS4 68-0371 33.00 Comb 1.5 mm, 8 Sample

BS4 68-0372 33.00 Comb 1.5 mm, 12 Sample

BS4 68-0373 33.00 Comb 1.5 mm, 16 Sample

BS4 68-0374 34.00 Comb 2.0 mm, 4 Sample

BS4 68-0375 34.00 Comb 2.0 mm, 8 Sample

BS4 68-0376 34.00 Comb 2.0 mm, 12 Sample

BS4 68-0377 34.00 Comb 2.0 mm, 16 Sample



ecia

lized

Too

ls F

or B

iore

sear

ch


Mini-Plus Horizontal Gel Units are ideal for routine rapid electrophoresis. They feature aremovable UV-transparent gel casting tray, with end gaskets which allows the gel to be castdirectly in the running tank. Extra gels can be cast using an additional gel casting unit.

Make sure that the siliconegasket is seated evenly inthe groove, with the endsflush with the top of the tray.Insert the tray so that the silicone rubber forms a tight,leak free seal with the wallsof the casting unit.

Multiple Mini-Gel Casting for Mini, Mini-Plus and Midi series

Mini-Plus Horizontal with Removable Gel Casting Tray

Insert the appropriatecomb(s) into the combslot(s). Scie-Plas offers awide range of combs,color-coded for thickness

The agarose gel should becooled to 50°, poured intothe tray and allowed to set.

When ready, remove traysfrom casting unit and placein running unit for immediateelectrophoresis or storewrapped in clingfilm at 4°C.

• Designed for very fast separation ofDNA and RNA restriction fragmentsin agarose gels

• Compact size



SpecificationsGel Dimensions Mini-Plus, W x L 10 x 11.5 cm

(3.9 x 4.5 in)

Unit Dimensions Mini-Plus, W x L 16.5 x 23 x 6.5 cm

(6.5 x 9.1 x 2.6 in)

Max. Sample Mini-Plus Capacity 40

Buffer Volume Mini-Plus 450 ml

Combs Available :No. of Samples 4, 8, 10, 12, 16, 20Thicknesses 1.0, 1.5, 2.0 mm

Catalog No. $ Model DescriptionBS4 68-0382 323.00 HU10 Mini-Plus Horizontal Gel Unit with Removable Gel Casting

Tray Includes: 1 x UV Tray 10 x 11.5 cm , 2 x 1.0 mm 16 Sample Combs

BS4 68-0401 68.00 HU10-UT Gel Casting Tray



BS4 68-0403 76.00 HU10-CU External Casting Unit for 3 Gel Casting Trays

BS4 68-0350 50.00 PT-0.2 Replacement 0.2 mm Pt Electrode, 50 cm

For comb specifications andordering details, see page N62.


Molecular Biology

Horizontal Gel Units

The Midi-Horizontal Gel Unit is designed for both analytical and preparative studies of nucleic acids.These units have the same features as the Mini-Units but with the addition of buffer recirculation ports.Four comb positions allow up to 112 samples to be screened on one gel

Lift the gel casting tray out ofunit. Make sure that the siliconegasket is seated evenly in thegroove, with the ends flush withthe top of the tray. Turn the traythrough 90°

Mini-Gel Casting for Mini, Mini-Plus and Midi series

Midi-Horizontal with Removable Gel Casting Tray

• Accommodates standard gels for bothanalytical and preparative studies ofnucleic acids.

• Compact size



• Up to 112 samples canbe screened on one gel

• Ideal for analytical and preparative electrophoresis

• Buffer recirculationavailable as an option

• Four comb slots

Insert the tray so that the siliconerubber forms a tight, leak free sealwith the walls of the gel tank.

The agarose gel should be cooledto 50°, poured into the tray andallowed to set. When ready, lift therunning tray, turn it through 90°and replace in tank...

Gel is ready for sample loading and run.

SpecificationsGel Dimensions Midi, W x L 12.8 x 15 cm

(5.0 x 5.9 in)

Unit Dimensions Midi, W x L x H 20 x 32 x 7 cm

(7.9 x 12.6 x 2.8 in)

Max. Sample Capacity Midi 112

Buffer Volume Midi 900 ml

Combs Available :No. of Samples 10, 12, 16, 20,

24, 28Thicknesses 1.0, 1.5, 2.0 mm

gel size: 12.8 x 15 cm

Catalog No. $ Model DescriptionBS4 68-0404 350.00 HU13 Midi-Horizontal Gel Unit with

Removable Gel Casting TrayIncludes: 1 x UV Tray 12.8 x 15cm , 2 x 1.0 mm 16 SampleCombs




BS4 68-0426 93.00 HU13-CU External Casting Unit for 2 GelCasting Trays

BS4 68-0425 18.00 HU-BRP Buffer Recirculation Ports

BS4 68-0350 50.00 PT-0.2 Replacement 0.2 mm PtElectrode, 50 cm

BS4 68-0405 39.00 – Comb 1.0 mm, 10 Sample

BS4 68-0406 39.00 – Comb 1.0 mm, 12 Sample

BS4 68-0407 39.00 – Comb 1.0 mm, 16 Sample

Catalog No. $ Model DescriptionBS4 68-0408 39.00 – Comb 1.0 mm, 20 Sample

BS4 68-0409 39.00 – Comb 1.0 mm, 24 Sample

BS4 68-0410 39.00 – Comb 1.0 mm, 28 Sample

BS4 68-0411 40.00 – Comb 1.5 mm, 10 Sample

BS4 68-0412 40.00 – Comb 1.5 mm, 12 Sample

BS4 68-0413 40.00 – Comb 1.5 mm, 16 Sample

BS4 68-0414 40.00 – Comb 1.5 mm, 20 Sample

BS4 68-0415 40.00 – Comb 1.5 mm, 24 Sample

BS4 68-0416 40.00 – Comb 1.5 mm, 28 Sample

BS4 68-0417 40.00 – Comb 2.0 mm, 10 Sample

BS4 68-0418 40.00 – Comb 2.0 mm, 12 Sample

BS4 68-0419 40.00 – Comb 2.0 mm, 16 Sample

BS4 68-0420 40.00 – Comb 2.0 mm, 20 Sample

BS4 68-0421 40.00 – Comb 2.0 mm, 24 Sample

BS4 68-0422 40.00 – Comb 2.0 mm, 28 Sample

Designed for both analytical and preparative studies of nucleic acids, Maxi-Horizontal GelUnits feature as standard, buffer recirculation ports, to prevent buffer depletion. Four combpositions permit the screening of up to 160 samples. Gel casting gates, which have a siliconerubber edge gasket, fit into a removable gel casting tray. This provides leak-free gel pouring.

Maxi-Cooled units offer the same features as the standard models but with the addition ofcooling in the base. The cooling allows the gel to be run at higher voltages for quicker running times without the loss of resolution.

Cooled Horizontal Unit

Remove the casting gates

from the gel casting tray.

Make sure that the silicone

gaskets in the casting gates

are seated evenly in the

grooves, with the ends of

the gasket flush with the

tops of the gates. Place the

gates into the grooves of the

gel casting tray, with the sil-

icone rubber gasket facing

the outside of the tray.

Insert the gates into theends of the UV tray and thecomb(s) into the combslot(s)

GEL CASTING for Maxi and Maxi-Plus

Maxi-Standard and Maxi-Cooled with Removable Gel Casting Tray

Gel Size: 20 x 20 cm• Designed for high resolution

electrophoresis. Applicationsinclude DNA analysis and PCR®

and restriction fragment screening.

• Up to 160 samples can bescreened on one gel

• Buffer recirculation ports as standard

• Combs compatible with multichannel pipettes

• Four comb slots

• Cooled option allows shorter runtimes without loss of resolution

When ready, the castinggates and comb(s) areremoved and the gel castingtray placed in the unit forelectrophoresis.

Agarose gel solutionsshould be cooled to 50C ,poured into the tray andallowed to set

SpecificationsGel Dimensions Maxi, W x L 20 x 20 cm (7.9 x 7.9 in)

Unit Dimensions,Maxi, W x L x H 27 x 47.5 x 8 cm

(10.6 x 18.7 x 3.2 in)

Max. Sample CapacityMaxi 160

Buffer Volume Maxi 2,200 ml

Combs Available :No. of Samples 16, 20, 28, 40Thicknesses 1.0, 1.5, 2.0 mm

Catalog No. $ Model DescriptionBS4 68-0427 672.00 HU20 Maxi-Standard Horizontal Gel Unit with Removable Gel

Casting Tray

BS4 68-0454 845.00 CHU20 Maxi-Cooled Horizontal Gel Unit with Removable Gel Casting TrayBoth Models Include: 1 x UV Tray 20 x 20 cm (W x L), 2 x 1.0 mm 16 Sample Combs and 2 Casting Gates


BS4 68-0442 36.00 HU20-CG Gel Casting Gates, pkg. of 2







ecia

lized

Too

ls F

or B

iore

sear

ch



Molecular Biology

Horizontal Gel UnitsMaxi-Plus Standard and Cooled with Removable Gel Casting Tray

The Maxi-Plus Horizontal Gel Unit has been specifically designed to allow rapid and conven-ient screening of PCR® products. When using a 96 well PCR® machine all samples can bescreened on a single gel. Loading is simple using a standard multi-channel pipette. The unitis supplied with a UV-transparent tray for easy visualisation. For varying sample numbers arange of alternative combs can be used. As there are 12 comb positions, up to 624 samplescan be separated on a single gel. Gel casting gates, which have a silicone rubber edge gasket,fit into a removable gel casting tray. These provide leak-free gel pouring.

Maxi-Plus Cooled units offer the same features as the standard models but with the additionof cooling in the base. The cooling allows the gel to be run at higher voltages for quicker running times without the loss of resolution.

Catalog No. $ Model DescriptionBS4 68-0444 680.00 HU25 Maxi-Plus Standard Horizontal Gel Unit with Removable Gel

Casting Tray

BS4 68-0455 939.00 CHU25 Maxi-Plus Cooled Horizontal Gel Unit with Removable Gel CastingTray Both Models Include: 1 x UV Tray 25 x 30 cm (W x L), 6 x 1.0 mm 26 Sample Combs and 2 Casting Gates


BS4 68-0452 46.00 HU25-CG Gel Casting Gates, pkg. of 2





Combs compatible with multichannel pipettes

* The PCR process is covered by US patents owned by Hoffman La Roche Inc.

Gel Size: 25 x 30 cm• Quick and convenient screening of

PCR® products, eg. HLA typing.

• Up to 624 samples using 12 combslots

• Used for mass screening of PCR®

products, eg. HLA typing

• All combs compatible with multichannel pipettes

• Buffer recirculation ports as standard

• Comb height is adjustable toensure adequate well depthacross full gel width

SpecificationsGel Dimensions Maxi-Plus, W x L 25 x 30 cm (9.8 x 11.8 in)

Unit Dimensions Maxi-Plus, W x L x H 33 x 56 x 9 cm (13 x 22.1 x 3.5 in)

Max. Sample CapacityMaxi-Plus 624

Buffer VolumeMaxi-Plus 3,000 ml

Combs Available :No. of Samples 26, 52Thicknesses 1.0, 1.5, 2.0mm



Spec

ializ

ed T

ools

For

Bio

rese

arch

Horizontal Gel Unit Combs – Please Call for Comb Pricing

Scie-Plas manufactures the widestrange of electrophoresis acces-sories in the world, specializing instandard and custom made combs,colour-coded according to theirthickness.

0.75mm - Black 1.0mm - WWhhiittee1.5mm - Red 2.0mm - Blue

Specifications and Ordering InformationMax

SampleVol. per

Tooth Max well for aThickness No. of Width Spacing 5mm deep

Catalog No. Model (mm) Samples (mm) (mm) gel (µl)

BS4-SETBS4 68-0341 HU6-C1.5-12MC 1 4 11.5 1 50BS4 68-0341 H2-C1-4 1 4 11.5 1 50BS4 68-0342 H2-C1-8 1 8 5.25 1 23BS4 68-0343 H2-C1-12 1 12 3.5 1 15BS4 68-0344 H2-C1-16 1 16 2.25 1 10H1-SETBS4 68-0352 H1-C1-1D 1 1 77 2 345BS4 68-0353 H1-C1-4 1 4 22 2 100BS4 68-0354 H1-C1-8 1 8 10 2 45BS4 68-0355 H1-C1-12 1 12 6 2 27BS4 68-0356 H1-C1-16 1 16 4 2 18BS4 68-0357 H1-C1-20MC 1 20 2.8 2 12BS4 68-0358 H1-C1.5-1D 1.5 1 77 2 515BS4 68-0359 H1-C1.5-4 1.5 4 22 2 150BS4 68-0360 H1-C1.5-8 1.5 8 10 2 65BS4 68-0361 H1-C1.5-12 1.5 12 6 2 40BS4 68-0362 H1-C1.5-16 1.5 16 4 2 27BS4 68-0363 H1-C1.5-20MC 1.5 20 2.8 2 18HU6BS4 68-0366 HU6-C1-4 1 4 10.25 3 45BS4 68-0367 HU6-C1-8 1 8 4.5 2 20BS4 68-0368 HU6-C1-12MC 1 12 2.5 2 11BS4 68-0369 HU6-C1-16 1 16 2.2 1 10BS4 68-0370 HU6-C1.5-4 1.5 4 10.25 3 70BS4 68-0371 HU6-C1.5-8 1.5 8 4.5 2 30BS4 68-0372 HU6-C1.5-12MC 1.5 12 2.5 2 17BS4 68-0373 HU6-C1.5-16 1.5 16 2.2 1 15BS4 68-0374 HU6-C2-4 2 4 10.25 3 90BS4 68-0375 HU6-C2-8 2 8 4.5 2 40BS4 68-0376 HU6-C2-12MC 2 12 2.5 2 22BS4 68-0377 HU6-C2-16 2 16 2.2 1 20HU10BS4 68-0383 HU10-C1-4 1 4 18.25 5 80BS4 68-0384 HU10-C1-8 1 8 9 2.5 40BS4 68-0385 HU10-C1-10MC 1 10 7 2 30BS4 68-0386 HU10-C1-12 1 12 5.5 2 25BS4 68-0387 HU10-C1-16 1 16 3.6 2 15BS4 68-0388 HU10-C1-20MC 1 20 3 1.5 12BS4 68-0389 HU10-C1.5-4 1.5 4 18.25 5 125BS4 68-0390 HU10-C1.5-8 1.5 8 9 2.5 60BS4 68-0391 HU10-C1.5-10MC 1.5 10 7 2 45BS4 68-0392 HU10-C1.5-12 1.5 12 5.5 2 35BS4 68-0393 HU10-C1.5-16 1.5 16 3.6 2 25BS4 68-0394 HU10-C1.5-20MC 1.5 20 3 2 20BS4 68-0395 HU10-C2-4 2 4 18.25 5 160

BS4 68-0396 HU10-C2-8 2 8 9 2.5 80BS4 68-0397 HU10-C2-10MC 2 10 7 2 60BS4 68-0398 HU10-C2-12 2 12 5.5 2 50BS4 68-0399 HU10-C2-16 2 16 3.6 2 30BS4 68-0400 HU10-C2-20MC 2 20 3 1.5 25

Horizontal Gel Unit Combs

Specifications and Ordering InformationMax

SampleVol. per

Tooth Max well for aThickness No. of Width Spacing 5mm deep

Catalog No. Model (mm) Samples (mm) (mm) gel (µl)

BS4 68-0405 HU13-C1-10 1 10 9.5 2.5 40BS4 68-0406 HU13-C1-12MC 1 12 8 2 35BS4 68-0407 HU13-C1-16 1 16 5.5 2 25BS4 68-0408 HU13-C1-20 1 20 4 2 17BS4 68-0409 HU13-C1-24 1 24 3 2 13BS4 68-0410 HU13-C1-28MC 1 28 3 1.5 13BS4 68-0411 HU13-C1.5-10 1.5 10 9.5 2.5 60BS4 68-0412 HU13-C1.5-12MC 1.5 12 8 2 50BS4 68-0413 HU13-C1.5-16 1.5 16 5.5 2 35BS4 68-0414 HU13-C1.5-20 1.5 20 4 2 25BS4 68-0415 HU13-C1.5-24 1.5 24 3 2 20BS4 68-0416 HU13-C1.5-28MC 1.5 28 3 1.5 20BS4 68-0417 HU13-C2-10 2 10 9.5 2.5 85BS4 68-0418 HU13-C2-12MC 2 12 8 2 70BS4 68-0419 HU13-C2-16 2 16 5.5 2 50BS4 68-0420 HU13-C2-20 2 20 4 2 35BS4 68-0421 HU13-C2-24 2 24 3 2 25BS4 68-0422 HU13-C2-28MC 2 28 3 1.5 25HU20 & CHU20BS4 68-0428 HU20-C1-16 1 16 8.5 3 35BS4 68-0429 HU20-C1-20MC 1 20 7 2 30BS4 68-0430 HU20-C1-28 1 28 4.8 2 20BS4 68-0431 HU20-C1-40MC 1 40 2.75 2 13BS4 68-0432 HU20-C1.5-16 1.5 16 8.5 3 55BS4 68-0433 HU20-C1.5-20MC 1.5 20 7 2 45BS4 68-0434 HU20-C1.5-28 1.5 28 4.8 2 30BS4 68-0435 HU20-C1.5-40MC 1.5 40 2.75 2 19BS4 68-0436 HU20-C2-16 2 16 8.5 3 75BS4 68-0437 HU20-C2-20MC 2 20 7 2 60BS4 68-0438 HU20-C2-28 2 28 4.8 2 40BS4 68-0439 HU20-C2-40MC 2 40 2.75 2 25HU25 & CHU25BS4 68-0445 HU25-C1-26MC 1 26 7 2 30BS4 68-0446 HU25-C1-52MC 1 52 3 1.5 13BS4 68-0447 HU25-C1.5-26MC 1.5 26 7 2 45BS4 68-0448 HU25-C1.5-52MC 1.5 52 3 1.5 20BS4 68-0449 HU25-C2-26MC 2 26 7 2 60BS4 68-0450 HU25-C2-52MC 2 52 3 1.5 25


Molecular Biology

Horizontal Gel Unit AccessoriesGel Levelling TableColored Strips

The Scie-Plas Gel Levelling Table provides a useful way ofpouring gels of uniform thickness. The table features a large30 x 20 cm platform with large thumb-wheel levelling feet ateach corner and a levelling bubble located in the centre.

Catalog No. $ Model DescriptionBS4 68-0456 137.00 GLT-3020 Gel Levelling Table, 30

x 20 cm

With the use of different dyes andstains for gel band visualisation,Scie-Plas provide red, green andyellow colored adhesive stripswith all units with removablecasting trays. These are appliedto the gel table to facilitate thesample loading process. Theyare easily replaced dependent onthe user’s application and areavailable pre-cut in packs.

Catalog No. $ Model DescriptionBS4 68-0380 11.00 HU6-CS Colored Loading Strips for Mini Horizontal Unit

BS4 68-0402 13.00 HU10-CS Colored Loading Strips for Mini-Plus Horizontal Gel Unit

BS4 68-0424 14.00 HU13-CS Colored Loading Strips for Midi Horizontal Gel Unit

BS4 68-0443 14.00 HU20-CS Colored Loading Strips for Maxi HorizontalHorizontal Gel Unit

BS4 68-0453 20.00 HU25-CS Colored Loading Strips for Maxi-Plus Horizontal Gel Unit

Scie-Plas Gel Scoops are designed to facilitate the transfer of gels from staining/destaining tanks to a transilluminator or similar surface. Providing supportacross the gel, the Scoop eliminates the possibility oftearing - even with low percentage agarose gels.

Catalog No. $ Model DescriptionBS4 68-0457 28.00 HU6-GS Gel Scoop for 6 cm

Wide Gels

BS4 68-0458 31.00 HU10-GS Gel Scoop for 10 cmWide Gels




0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Fluorescent Ruler

• Allowsadvancepouring ofgels

• Level bubble incorporated

• Easy to use LevellingFeet

• Sharp, clear, easily visible markings

• For use with ethidium bromide gels

• Ideal for gel presentation

Catalog No. $ Model DescriptionBS4 68-3075 15.50 GLE-FR Fluorescent Ruler, 24 cm (9.5 in), pkg. of 2

• UV transparent

• For mini,midi andmaxi gels

Gel Rulers

Gel Scoops


Spec

ializ

ed T

ools

For

Bio

rese

arch

GEL CASTINGMODULES

Can increase gelthroughput andreproducibility

POWERCONNECTION

Recessed power con-nectors, integral with

the safety lid. Power isdisabled immediately

lid is removed.

POWER LEADSAll leads are double insulated

and connectors have CE standard4mm fixed shrouds to prevent

finger contact. Adaptors are available for most popular power

supplies.

COOLINGBuffer temperature

can be maintained bycirculating water

(chilled or from tap)through the base -CDC models only.

BUFFER SEALSEasily replaced - hol-

low black PTFE-coatedneoprene forms posi-

tive, leak-free sealbetween plate and

buffer chamber.

SAFETY LIDPower to the tank is

isolated immediatelylid is removed.

Electrode configura-tion ensures that lidis located correctly.

USER-FRIENDLYPLATE CLAMPING

Three thumb screwsallow easy plate

assembly and ensureeven pressure

ELECTRODESOf pure platinum

and can be easilyreplaced.

UNIFORM GEL THICKNESS

Float glass platesensure uniform gel

thickness andstraight sample

migration

COMBSAn extensiverange ofcolourcodedcombs and spacers are available.

Scie-Plas Vertical Gel Electrophoresis units are manufac-tured to a high specification and designed to combineversatility with safety. The robust gel units are easy to useand are offered in five plate sizes: 105 x 100 mm (W x H) mini gels, 205 x 100 mm (W x H) wide minigels, 205 x 200 mm (W x L) standard gels plus 20 x 50cm and 33 x 41 cm sequencing gels. The gel tempera-ture is regulated either by passive or water cooling.

All gel units are supplied with float glass plates to ensurethat gels are of uniform thickness, have even samplemigration and minimum lane distortion. In the dual models, gels can be cast directly in the inner gel runningmodule using an optional extra casting base. Gel castingunits are also available for standard gel pouring. Most commercially available pre-cast gel cassettes fit intothe units.

Accompanying the range are gel casting units which alloweasy cassette assembly and tape free gel pouring, powersupplies and a full range of combs and accessories.

All CDC models have an integrated gel casting system,utilising the gel running module and a casting base.Therefore, there is no need to remove the gels from thecaster prior to electrophoresis.

• Robust acrylic construction

• Gold plated terminals forcorrosion resistance

• Integrated gel casting system available in thedual models

• Float glass plates ensureuniform gel thickness andstraight sample migration

• Combs and SpacersColour Coded according to their thickness

• Easy to use, multiple casting systems

Introduction to Vertical Gel Units

Vertical Gel Units


Molecular Biology

Vertical Gel Units

The Mini 10 Single Plate Vertical Gel Unit isdesigned to provide a safe and easy to operate system for the separation of pro-teins and nucleic acids. This mini unit pro-vides a basic non-cooled single gel systemwhich can be used with most commerciallyavailable pre-cast gels. A special siliconerubber gasket allows the casting of gelsusing ‘non-eared’ or short glass plates, andis available as an accessory. The systemcomes complete with 2 sets of float glassplates, spacers and a 12 sample comb. A wide range of alternative spacers andcombs are also available.

The Standard 20 Single Plate Vertical GelUnit is designed to provide a safe and easy

to operate system for the separation of nucleic acids and proteins. The systemprovides a simple, non-cooled, single gel unit which comes complete with 2 setsof float glass plates, spacers and a 24 sample comb. A wide range of alternativespacers and combs are also available.

Plate Size: 10.5 x 10 cm

Plate Size: 20.5 x 20 cm

Catalog No. $ Model DescriptionBS4 68-0462 411.00 V10-SET Mini 10 Single Plate Vertical Gel Unit. Includes:

2 x 2 mm Notched Glass Plates, 2 x 2 mm PlainGlass Plates, 1 x Set of 1.0 mm Spacers, 1 x Comb 1.0 mm 12 Sample

BS4 68-0463 54.00 V10-NG2 Notched Glass Plates, 2 mm, pkg. of 2

BS4 68-0464 16.00 V10-PG2 Plain Glass Plates, 2 mm, pkg. of 2

BS4 68-0466 19.00 V10-S0.75 0.75 mm Spacer Set, 12 x 103 mm (W x L)

BS4 68-0467 19.00 V10-S1 1.0 mm Spacer Set, 12 x 103 mm (W x L)



BS4 68-0470 21.00 V10-SG Silicone Rubber Gasket

BS4 68-0486 567.00 V20-SET Standard 20 Single Plate Vertical Gel Unit.Includes: 2 x 4 mm Notched Glass Plates, 2 x 4 mm Plain Glass Plates, 1 x Set of 1.0 mmSpacers, 1 x Comb 1.0 mm 24 Sample.

BS4 68-0487 63.00 V20-NG4 Notched Glass Plates, 4 mm, pkg. of 2

BS4 68-0488 31.00 V20-PG4 Plain Glass Plates, 4 mm, pkg. of 2





BS4 68-0494 42.00 V20-SG Silicone Rubber Gasket


SpecificationsGel Dimensions, W x H:

V10-SET 8.0 x 8.5 cm (3.2 x 3.4 in)V20-SET 16.5 x 17.5 cm (6.5 x 6.9 in)

Unit Dimensions, W x L x H:V10-SET 11 x 20.5 x 12 cm (4.3 x 8.1 x 4.7 in)V20-SET 12.5 x 32 x 23 cm (4.9 x 12.6 x 9.1 in)

Max. Sample Capacity:V10-SET 20V20-SET 48

Buffer Volume:V10-SET Upper, 60 ml

Lower, 65 mlV20-SET Upper, 325 ml

Lower, 225 ml

Combs Available :No. of Samples V10-SET

1, 8, 10, 16, 20Thicknesses V10-SET

0.75, 1.0, 1.5, 2.0 mmNo. of Samples V20-SET

1, 10, 18, 24, 36, 48Thicknesses V20-SET

0.25, 0.35, 0.75, 1.0, 1.5, 2.0 mm

• Nucleic acid and proteinseparations, Mini SDS-PAGE, Preparative,Peptide and Gradient pore separations.

• Easy to use, with pre-cast Gels

• Compatible format withBlotting Systems, shownon page N74

• Easy gel pouring with casting systems, shownon page N79

• Wide range of combs available

Mini 10 and Standard 20 Single Plate Vertical Gel Units

For comb specifications and ordering details, see page N71.


Spec

ializ

ed T

ools

For

Bio

rese

arch

TV100 Mini Vertical Gel Unit and Casting System

The TV Mini Vertical Gel Unit and Casting System features a new parallel clamping mechanism that ensures even pressure is impartedonto the gel cassettes or glass plates. This feature eliminates anyundue pressure on the gel and so prevents lane distortion. The gelsare fully submerged in running buffer during electrophoresis, evenlydistributing the heat generated and limiting band distortion. To further enhance resolution or to reduce run times, additional coolingis provided in the super-cooled tank option.

The TV100K can be connected to a re-circulating chiller, the K-ELECTRO4 which will keep the temperature of the running bufferbelow room temperature. The Hand Cast option comes complete withall necessary accessories. Glass plates with bonded spacers areincluded as standard (handcast only), removing the need to align thespacers manually. Asymmetric offset of electrode terminals preventsaccidental polarity reversal.

• Use for:

- Protein and Nucleic Acid Separations

- Mini SDS-PAGE

- Preparative Peptide Separations

- Gradient Pore Separations

• Compatible with the majority of commercially available pre-cast gels up to 10 x 10 cm

• Quick release gel clamping system for easy gel access

• Enhanced cooling improves gel resolution

Handcast Polyacrylamide Gels

• The gel casting system has been modified to make it moreuser friendly

• Casting and running performed in the same module to elimi-nate glass plate transfer

• Ultra soft silicone casting seals prevent gel leakage

Vertical Gel Units

SpecificationsDimensions:

Cassette/Plate, H x W Up to 10 x 10 cm precast or handcast gelsUnit, H x W x D 14.5 x 20 x 15.5 cm (5.7 x 7.9 x 6.1 in)

Maximum Sample Capacity 20 x 2

Buffer Volume:Minimum 400 mlMaximum 1,200 ml

No. of Samples 1, 8, 10, 12, 16, and 20 using combs currently available

Thicknesses 0.75, 1, 1.5, 2 mm

Catalog No $ Model No. ProductBS4 68-3720 778.00 TV100 Tank and Gel Running Module

for PreCast Gels

BS4 68-3721 878.00 TV100K Super Cooled TV100 Tank and GelRunning Module for PreCast Gels

BS4 68-3722 1,021.00 TV100Y Complete Unit for Gel Casting.Includes 2 x 2 mm notched glassplates 2 x 2 mm plain glass plateswith 1mm bonded spacers, 1 x Dummy plate 2 x Combs 1mm12 Sample and casting base withsilicone seals

Catalog No $ Model ProductBS4 68-3723 1,122.00 TV100YK Super Cooled TV100Y complete

unit for Gel Casting includes 2 x2mm notched glass plates 2 x2mm plain glass plates with 1mmbonded spacers, 1 x Dummy plate2 x Combs 1mm 12 Sample andcasting base with silicone seals

BS4 68-3724 417.00 TV100-GRM Gel Running Module

BS4 68-3725 396.00 TV100-TANK Replacement Tank

BS4 68-3726 509.00 TV100-KTANK Super Cooled Replacement Tank

BS4 68-3727 256.00 TV100-LID Replacement Lid

BS4 68-3728 131.00 TV100-CLAMP Replacement Clamp and GasketSet

BS4 68-3729 17.00 TV100-SCW Screw set for TV100-CLAMP, pkg.of 4

BS4 68-3730 89.00 TV100-GS Replacement gasket set (8 per set) for TV100-GRM

BS4 68-3731 36.00 TV100-PGS0.75 Plain 100 x 100 Glass with fixed0.75mm spacers, pkg. of 2

BS4 68-3732 36.00 TV100-PGS1 Plain 100 x 100 Glass with fixed1mm spacers, pkg. of 2

BS4 68-3733 36.00 TV100-PGS1.5 Plain 100 x 100 Glass with fixed1.5mm spacers, pkg. of 2

BS4 68-3734 36.00 TV100-PGS2 Plain 100 x 100 Glass with fixed2mm spacers, pkg. of 2

BS4 68-3735 56.00 TV100-NG Notched Glass 100 x 100 mm,pkg. of 2

BS4 68-3736 17.00 TV100-PG Plain Glass 100 x 100 mm, pkg.of 2 (requires spacers see V10 range)

BS4 68-3737 198.00 TV100-CB Casting Base with Silicone Seals

BS4 68-3738 618.00 TV100-EBGRM Electroblotting Module for TV 100


Molecular Biology

Vertical Gel UnitsTV400 Vertical Gel System and Blotting Unit

• Use for:

- Protein and Nucleic Acid Separations

- SDS-PAGE

- Preparative Peptide Separations

- Gradient Pore Separations

• Runs up to 20 x 20 cm gels

• Cooling Coil inside buffer tank - Provides direct cooling of thebuffer so enhancing gel and blot resolution (K version only)

• Finger stops on tank. - Provide a firm, positive grip of thetank during transportation

New Gel Running Module (GRM)

• Finger lugs - assist in carrying the GRM around the laboratoryand in insertion and removal of the module from the tank

• Ultra soft silicone seal. - Ensures an excellent leak tight sealbetween the glass plates and the inner buffer chamber

• Gel clamps - 3 screws per gel clamp offers a quick and effective time saving assembly / disassembly process

• CE Compliant

New Electro Blotting Module

• Utilizes the same tank for added convenience

• Top and bottom clamps eliminate need to turn the “gel sandwich” through 90o prior to use

• Locking lugs on the base of the “gel sandwich” ensure apositive fit into the module

• Recesses in the feet of the module lock into lugs in the tankwalls to provide stability

SpecificationsSize, H x W Up to 20 x 20.5 cm plate

Gel Size, H x W 17.5 x 16.5 cm (6.9 x 6.5 in)

Unit Dimensions,H x W x D 16.5 x 28.5 x 28.5 cm (6.5 x 11.2 x 11.2 in)

Buffer Volume:Minimum 950 mlMaximum 4.6 L

Sample Capacity 96

No. of Samples 1, 10, 18, 24, 36, 48 using combs currently available

Thicknesses 0.25, 0.35, 0.75, 1, 1.5, 2 mm

The TV Vertical Gel System and Blotting Unit features a new parallelclamping mechanism that ensures even pressure is imparted ontothe gel cassettes or glass plates. This eliminates any undue pressureon the gel and so prevents lane distortion. These gels are fully submerged in running buffer during electrophoresis, evenly distributing the heat generated and improving gel resolution. To further enhance resolution or to reduce run times, additionalcooling is provided in the super-cooled tank options.

The TV400K and TV400YK can be connected to a re-circulatingchiller, the K-ELECTRO4 which will keep the temperature of the running buffer below room temperature. The Hand Cast optioncomes complete with all necessary accessories.

Catalog No $ Model ProductBS4 68-3739 1,120.00 TV400 Tank and Gel Running Module.

Includes 2 x 4mm notched glassplates, 2 x 4mm plain glass plateswith 1mm bonded spacers, 1 xDummy plate, 2 x Combs 1mm24 Sample

BS4 68-3740 1,279.00 TV400K TV400 with Cooling Coil

BS4 68-3741 1,250.00 TV400Y TV400 with Casting Base

BS4 68-3742 1,454.00 TV400YK TV400K with Casting Base

BS4 68-3743 663.00 TV400-GRM Gel-running Module

BS4 68-3744 577.00 TV400-TANK Replacement Tank

BS4 68-3745 742.00 TV400-KTANK Super Cooled Replacement Tank

Catalog No $ Model ProductBS4 68-3746 334.00 TV400-LID Replacement Lid

BS4 68-3747 68.00 TV400-CLAMP Replacement Clamp, pkg. of 4

BS4 68-3748 25.00 TV400-SCW Screw Set for TV400-CLAMP,pkg. of 12

BS4 68-3749 181.00 TV400-GS Replacement Gasket Set forGRM, pkg. of 2

BS4 68-3750 55.00 TV400-PGS0.75 Plain 200 x 200 mm Glass withfixed 0.75mm Spacers, pkg. of 2

BS4 68-3751 55.00 TV400-PGS1 Plain 200 x 200 mm Glass withfixed 1mm Spacers, pkg. of 2

BS4 68-3752 55.00 TV400-PGS1.5 Plain 200 x 200 mm Glass withfixed 1.5mm Spacers, pkg. of 2

BS4 68-3753 55.00 TV400-PGS2 Plain 200 x 200 mm Glass withfixed 2mm Spacers, pkg. of 2

BS4 68-3754 66.00 TV400-NG Notched Glass 200 x 200 mm,pkg. of 2

BS4 68-3755 39.00 TV400-PG Plain Glass 200 x 200 mm, pkg. of 2 (Requires Spacers seeV20 Range)

BS4 68-3756 245.00 TV400-CB Casting Base

BS4 68-3757 945.00 TV400-EBGRM Electroblotting Module for TV 400

BS4 68-3758 58.00 TV400-FPL Fiber Pads, 20 x20 cm, forEBGRM, pkg. of 4

BS4 68-3759 148.00 TV400-CC Compression Cassette forEBGRM


Spec

ializ

ed T

ools

For

Bio

rese

arch

Catalog No. $ Model DescriptionBS4 68-3078 594.00 V10-WCDC Wide Format Mini CDC Vertical Gel Unit

20 cm. Includes: 2 x 4 mm NotchedGlass Plates, 2 x 4 mm Plain GlassPlates, 1 x Dummy Plate, 2 x Sets of 1.0 mm Spacers, 2 x Combs 1.0 mm 24 Sample.

BS4 68-0478 687.00 V10-WCDCY V10-WCDC with accessories and V20-CB Casting Base

BS4 68-0479 59.00 V10W-NG4 Notched Glass Plates, 4.0 mm, pkg. of 2

BS4 68-0480 25.00 V10W-PG4 Plain Glass Plates, 4.0 mm, pkg. of 2

BS4 68-0481 17.00 V10W-DP Dummy Plate





BS4 68-0482 42.00 V10W-SG Silicone Rubber Gasket, pkg. of 2

BS4 68-0483 425.00 V10W-GRM Gel Running Module

BS4 68-0484 234.00 V20-CB Casting Base, with Seals and Cams

BS4 68-0485 27.00 CB20-SEAL Casting Base, Silicone Seals, pkg. of 2

BS4 68-0477 36.00 CB-CAM Casting Base, Cams, pkg. of 2


Catalog No. $ Model DescriptionBS4 68-3079 1,497.00 V20-HCDC Denaturing Gradient Dual Vertical Gel

Unit. Includes: 2 x 100 Watt Heaters, 1 xThermostat, 1 x Temperature Control Unit,2 x 4 mm Notched Glass Plates, 2 x 4 mmPlain Glass Plates, 2 x Sets of 1.0 mmSpacers, 2 x Combs 1.0 mm 24 Sample.

BS4 68-3080 1,612.00 V20-HCDCY V20-HCDC with access & V20-CB Casting Base

BS4 68-0487 63.00 V20-NG4 Notched glass plates, 4 mm, pkg. of 2

BS4 68-0488 31.00 V20-PG4 Plain glass plates, 4 mm, pkg. of 2

BS4 68-0489 21.00 V20-DP Dummy Plate





BS4 68-0494 42.00 V20-SG Silicone Rubber Gasket, pkg. of 2

BS4 68-0496 542.00 V20-GRM Gel Running Module

BS4 68-0484 234.00 V20-CB Casting Base, with Seals and Cams

BS4 68-0485 27.00 CB20-SEAL Casting Base, Seals, pkg. of 2

BS4 68-0477 36.00 CB-CAM Casting Base, Cams, pkg. of 2

BS4 68-0350 50.00 PT-0.2 Replacement 0.2mm Pt Electrode, 50 cm

Denaturing Gradient CDC

SpecificationsGel Dimensions, W x H 16.5 x 8.5 cm (6.5 x 3.4 in)

Unit Dimensions, W x L x H14 x 31 x 14.5 cm (5.5 x 12.2 x 5.7 in)

Max. Sample Capacity 48 x 2

Buffer Volume:Inner (max) 270 mlOuter (max) 2,000 ml

Combs Available :No. of samples 1, 10, 18, 24, 36, 48Thicknesses 0.25, 0.35, 0.75, 1.0, 1.5, 2.0 mm

• Detection of single basechanges and polymor-phisms in genomic clonedand amplified DNA fragmentsn

• Gel Dimensions: 20 x 20 cm

• Two 150 Watt Heaters

• External TemperatureControl Box

• Accurate Thermostat

SpecificationsGel Dimensions, W x H 16.5 x 17.5 cm (6.5 x 6.9 in)

Unit Dimensions, W x L x H 14 x 31 x 30 cm (5.5 x 12.2 x 11.8 in)

Max. Sample Capacity 48 x 2

Buffer VolumeInner (max) 650 mlOuter (max) 3,500 ml

Combs Available:No. of Samples 1, 10, 18, 24, 36, 48Thicknesses 0.25, 0.35, 0.75, 1.0, 1.5, 2.0 mm

This 20 x 10 cm (W x H) wide Mini gel is designed for laboratorieswith large numbers of samples to screen. Running samples on one20 cm wide gel eliminates the problems of comparing samples fromtwo 10 cm wide gels, and is also more convenient.

These vertical units can run two 20 x 20 cm polyacrylamide gels, forthe detection of single base changes and polymorphisms in genomiccloned and amplified DNA fragments. These units utilise the largebuffer volume in the outer tank to act as a heat reservoir. The buffershould be pre-heated prior to electrophoresis. The integral heatingsystem, consisting of two 150 Watt heaters and an external tempera-ture control unit, will then heat and maintain the temperature of therunning buffer, during electrophoresis. The system will operate to amaximum temperature of 70°C, ±1°C. The gels are cast in the gelrunning module, using a gel casting base.

Wide Format Mini CDC

Vertical Gel Units

For comb specifications and ordering details,see page N71.


Molecular Biology

Vertical Gel Units

Compact Electroblotting ModuleThe Compact Electro-blotting Module, which performs western and other typesof blotting, is designed for ease of use and efficiency of transfer. The electrodesare only 6 cm apart. This greatly increases the current strength across the blotting area and also reduces the amount of heat generated. Heat is dissipatedby the large buffer volume and the bottom cooling block of the main buffer tank.The heat dissipation and electrode spacing characteristics of this module allowrapid transfers of up to two gels in as little as 1 hour.

Catalog No. $ Model DescriptionBS4 68-3081 509.00 V10-EB10 Mini Compact Electro-Blotting Unit.

Includes: 10 cm Running Tank and Lid, InternalBlotting Module for 2 Cassettes, 2 x CompressionCassettes and Fiber Pads

BS4 68-3082 288.00 V10-EBGRM Mini Electro-Blotting Module, 2 x Cassettes, Fiber Pads

BS4 68-3083 51.00 EB10-CC Compression Cassette

BS4 68-3084 27.00 EB-FPS Fiber Pads, 10 x 10 cm, pkg. of 4

BS4 68-3085 594.00 V20-EB20 Maxi Compact Electro-Blotting Unit. Includes:20 cm Running Tank and Lid, Internal BlottingModule for 2 Cassettes, 2 x CompressionCassettes and Fibre Pads

BS4 68-3086 683.00 V20-EBGRM Maxi Electro-Blotting Module, 2 x Cassettes, Fibre Pads

BS4 68-0588 72.00 EB20-CC Compression Cassette

BS4 68-0590 55.00 EB-FPL Fibre Pads, 20 x 20 cm, pkg. of 4

1- Outer Buffer Chamber; 2- complete Slab Gel System; 3- Central RunningModule; 4- Electroblotter Module; 5- 2-D Capillary Module

1

2

3

4

5

Compact Electro-Blotting Unit

Electro-Blotting Module

SpecificationsUnit Dimensions, W x L x H

V10-EB10 14 x 20 x 14.5 cm (5.5 x 7.9 x 5.7 in)V20-EB20 14 x 31 x 25 cm (5.5 x 12.2 x 9.8 in)

Modular Systems

Scie-Plas new Modular Systems provide a complete system solution for electrophoresis applications. The new modular components utilise the highquality and ease of use of the successful Compact Dual Cooled, Vertical GelElectrophoresis Tanks. Techniques previously requiring the use of multipleinstruments can now be performed in the same unit. This provides themaximum combination of consistency and reproducibility with economyof cost and space. Slab Gel Electrophoresis, using hand-cast or pre-cast gels, Capillary GelElectrophoresis and Western Blotting can now all be performed with thesemodular components, available in both 10 x 10 cm and 20 x 20 cm formats. 2 slab gels, 10 capillary gels or 2 gels for blotting can be run inthe same outer running tank. Both 10 x 10 cm or 20 x 20 cm systems comprises three modules, each of which is available as a stand alone product.


Spec

ializ

ed T

ools

For

Bio

rese

arch

Vertical Gel Units

Capillary ModuleThe Scie-Plas Capillary Gel Module which performs the first phase of 2-D electrophoresis(Isoelectric Focusing - IEF), allows 10 capillary gels to be run at any one time, using eitherthe 10 x 10 cm or 20 x 20 cm CDC systems. Essentially these gels differ in the length of thecapillary tubes, which are 80 or 170 mm long, allowing a high degree of versatility in the separation desired. The Scie-Plas capillary tubes have a wide capillary bore diameter, whichgreatly eases the extraction of the capillary gel once the IEF phase is completed. After focusing, which typically takes between 3 to 4 hours, the tube gel can then be extracted andthe samples separated on a slab gel for the 2-D, size determining phase. The second separation can take as little as 1 hour to complete and therefore a complete 2-D separationcan take as little as 4 hours

Catalog No. $ Model DescriptionBS4 68-3087 495.00 V10-CAP Mini Capillary Electrophoresis Unit. Includes: Running Tank

and Lid, Internal Running Module for 10 tube gels, 10 x 1.0mm ID Capillary tubes, 10 x Blanking Ports.

BS4 68-3088 288.00 V10-CAPGRM Mini Capillary Module, Requires Accessories

BS4 68-3089 64.00 V10-CAPROD 1.0 mm ID 80 mm L Capillary Tubes, pkg. of 10

BS4 68-3090 64.00 V10-CAPROD4 4.0 mm ID 80 mm L Capillary Tubes, pkg. of 10

BS4 68-3091 15.00 V10-CAPB Blanking Ports, pkg. of 10

BS4 68-3092 721.00 V20-CAP Maxi Capillary Electrophoresis Unit. Includes: Running Tankand Lid, Internal Running Module for 10 Tube Gels, 10 x1.0mm ID Capillary Tubes, 10 x Blanking Ports

BS4 68-3093 418.00 V20-CAPGRM Maxi Capillary Module, Requires Accessories

BS4 68-3094 127.00 V20-CAPROD 1.0mm ID 170 mm L Capillary Tubes, pkg. of 10

BS4 68-3095 127.00 V20-CAPROD4 4.0 mm ID 170 mm L Capillary Tubes, pkg. of 10

BS4 68-3096 Call V20-CAPB Blanking Ports, pkg. of 10

SpecificationsUnit Dimensions, W x L x H

V10-CAP 14 x 20 x 14.5 cm(5.5 x 7.9 x 5.7 in)

V20-CAP 14 x 31 x 25 cm(5.5 x 12.2 x 9.8 in)

2-D Electrophoresis Systems

Catalog No. $ Model DescriptionBS4 68-3097 843.00 V10-2DSYS Mini 2-D Electrophoresis System. Includes: 10 cm Compact

Dual Cooled Unit, Casting Base, Mini Capillary Module plusaccessories

BS4 68-3098 34.00 V10-C1.5-1D Comb, 1.5 mm. 1 sample + dye track

BS4 68-0468 19.00 V10-S1.5 Spacer Set, 1.5 mm

BS4 68-3099 40.00 V10-GEP Gel Extraction Platform

BS4 68-3100 1,202.00 V20-2DSYS Maxi 2-D Electrophoresis System. Includes: 20 cm CompactDual Cooled Unit, Casting Base, Mini Capillary Module PlusAccessories

BS4 68-3101 47.00 V20-C1.5-1D Comb, 1.5 mm 1 Sample and Dye Track

BS4 68-0492 23.00 V20-S1.5 Spacer Set, 1.5 mm

BS4 68-3102 64.00 V20-GEP Gel Extraction Platform

Complete Modular Systems

Catalog No. $ Model DescriptionBS4 68-3103 1,126.00 V10-MODSYS Complete Modular Mini Vertical Gel System. Includes: 10

cm Compact Dual Cooled Unit, Casting Base, Capillary Module, Electro-Blotting Module plus accessories

BS4 68-3104 1,542.00 V20-MODSYS Modular Maxi Vertical Gel System. Includes: 20 cm Compact Dual Cooled Unit, Casting Base, Capillary Module,Electro-Blotting Module plus accessories

Modular Electrophoresis SystemsNEW

Vertical Gel Unit Combs – Please Call for Comb Pricing

Scie-Plas manufactures the widest range of elec-trophoresis accessories in the world, specialising instandard and custom made combs. In order to easilymatch sets of combs and spacers of the same thick-ness, Scie-Plas now manufacture all of their combsand spacers to a colouring system.

0.25mm - Natural 0.35mm - Natural 0.75mm - Black 1.0mm - WWhhiittee 1.5mm - Red 2.0mm - Blue

Specifications and Ordering Information

Tooth Max SampleThickness No. of Width Spacing Volume

Catalog No. Part No. (mm) Samples (mm) (mm) (µl)

BS4 68-3119 V20-C1.5-1D 1.5 1 152 n/a 2280

BS4 68-0554 V20-C1.5-10 1.5 10 11 5.5 165

BS4 68-0555 V20-C1.5-18MC* 1.5 18 6 3 90

BS4 68-0556 V20-C1.5-24 1.5 24 4.75 2 71

BS4 68-0557 V20-C1.5-36MC* 1.5 36 2.5 2 37

BS4 68-0558 V20-C1.5-48 1.5 48 2.35 1 35

BS4 68-3120 V20-C2-1D 2.0 1 152 n/a 3040

BS4 68-0559 V20-C2-10 2.0 10 11 5.5 220

BS4 68-0560 V20-C2-18MC* 2.0 18 6 3 120

BS4 68-0561 V20-C2-24 2.0 24 4.75 2 95

BS4 68-0562 V20-C2-36MC* 2.0 36 2.5 2 50

BS4 68-0563 V20-C2-48 2.0 48 2.35 1 47

33 cm Wide Combs suitable for: DNA Sequencing, SEQ-3341

BS4 68-0516 V33-C0.25-40 0.25 40 4 3 5

BS4 68-0517 V33-C0.25-60MC* 0.25 60 2 2.5 2.5

BS4 68-0518 V33-C0.25-80 0.25 80 2.5 1.1 2.5

BS4 68-0519 V33-C0.35-40 0.35 40 4 3 7

BS4 68-0520 V33-C0.35-60MC* 0.35 60 2 2.5 3.5

BS4 68-0521 V33-C0.35-80 0.35 80 2.5 1.1 4

20 cm Wide Shark’s Tooth Combs suitable for: 20 cm Wide Dual CooledMini, V10-WCDC; Standard Single Plate, V20-SET; Compact Dual CooledPlate, V20-CDC and V20-HCDC; DNA Sequencing, SEQ-2050

BS4 68-0564 SC2-M0.25-24 0.25 24 0.25 5.6 7

BS4 68-0565 SC2-M0.25-30MC* 0.25 30 0.25 4.5 5

BS4 68-0566 SC2-M0.25-36 0.25 36 0.25 4.0 5

BS4 68-0567 SC2-M0.25-48 0.25 48 0.25 2.8 3

BS4 68-0568 SC2-M0.35-24 0.35 24 0.25 5.6 9

BS4 68-0569 SC2-M0.35-30MC* 0.35 30 0.25 4.5 7

BS4 68-0570 SC2-M0.35-36 0.35 36 0.25 4.0 7

BS4 68-0571 SC2-M0.35-48 0.35 48 0.25 2.8 5

33 cm Wide Shark’s Tooth Combs suitable for: DNA Sequencing, SEQ-2050

BS4 68-0522 SC33-M0.25-48 0.25 48 0.25 5.6 7

BS4 68-0523 SC33-M0.25-60MC* 0.25 60 0.25 4.5 5

BS4 68-0524 SC33-M0.25-96 0.25 96 0.25 2.8 3

BS4 68-0525 SC33-M0.35-48 0.35 48 0.25 5.6 7

BS4 68-0526 SC33-M0.35-60MC* 0.35 60 0.25 4.5 7

BS4 68-0527 SC33-M0.35-96 0.35 96 0.25 2.8 5* Compatible with Multi-channel Pipettes.

Specifications and Ordering Information

Tooth Max SampleThickness No. of Width Spacing Volume

Catalog No. Part No. (mm) Samples (mm) (mm) (µl)

10 cm Wide Combs, suitable for: Mini Vertical, V10-SET; Compact DualCooled Mini Vertical, V10-CDC

BS4 68-3105 V10-C0.75-1D 0.75 1 70 n/a 525

BS4 68-3106 V10-C0.75-8MC* 0.75 8 6 3 45

BS4 68-0528 V10-C0.75-10 0.75 10 4 3 30

BS4 68-0529 V10-C0.75-12 0.75 12 3.75 2.25 28

BS4 68-0530 V10-C0.75-16MC* 0.75 16 2.5 2 18

BS4 68-3107 V10-C0.75-20 0.75 20 2 15 15

BS4 68-3108 V10-C1-1D 1.0 1 70 n/a 700

BS4 68-3109 V10-C1-8MC* 1.0 8 6 3 60

BS4 68-0531 V10-C1-10 1.0 10 4 3 40

BS4 68-0532 V10-C1-12 1.0 12 3.75 2.25 37

BS4 68-0533 V10-C1-16MC* 1.0 16 2.5 2 25

BS4 68-3110 V10-C1-20 1.0 20 2 15 20

BS4 68-3111 V10-C1.5-1D 1.5 1 70 n/a 1050

BS4 68-3112 V10-C1.5-8MC* 1.5 8 6 3 90

BS4 68-0534 V10-C1.5-10 1.5 10 4 3 60

BS4 68-0535 V10-C1.5-12 1.5 12 3.75 2.25 56

BS4 68-0536 V10-C1.5-16MC* 1.5 16 2.5 2 37

BS4 68-3113 V10-C1.5-20 1.5 20 2 1.5 30

BS4 68-3114 V10-C2-1D 2.0 1 70 n/a 1400

BS4 68-3115 V10-C2-8MC* 2.0 8 6 3 120

BS4 68-0537 V10-C2-10 2.0 10 4 3 80

BS4 68-0538 V10-C2-12 2.0 12 3.75 2.25 75

BS4 68-0539 V10-C2-16MC* 2.0 16 2.5 2 50

BS4 68-3116 V10-C2-20 2.0 20 2 1.5 40

20 cm Wide Combs, suitable for: 20 cm Wide Dual Cooled Mini, VerticalV10-WCDC; Standard Single Plate, V20-SET; Compact Dual Cooled PlateVertical Gel Unit, V20-CDC and V20-HCDC; DNA Sequencing, SEQ-2050

BS4 68-0540 V20-C0.25-24 0.25 24 4.75 2 11

BS4 68-0541 V20-C0.25-36MC* 0.25 36 2.5 2 6

BS4 68-0542 V20-C0.35-24 0.35 24 4.75 2 16

BS4 68-0543 V20-C0.35-36MC* 0.35 36 2.5 2 8

BS4 68-3117 V20-C0.75-1D 0.75 1 152 n/a 1140

BS4 68-0544 V20-C0.75-10 0.75 10 11 5.5 82

BS4 68-0545 V20-C0.75-18MC* 0.75 18 6 3 45

BS4 68-0546 V20-C0.75-24 0.75 24 4.75 2 35

BS4 68-0547 V20-C0.75-36MC* 0.75 36 2.5 2 18

BS4 68-0548 V20-C0.75-48 0.75 48 2.35 1 17

BS4 68-3118 V20-C1-1D 1.0 1 152 n/a 1528

BS4 68-0549 V20-C1-10 1.0 10 11 5.5 110

BS4 68-0550 V20-C1-18MC* 1.0 18 6 3 60

BS4 68-0551 V20-C1-24 1.0 24 4.75 2 47

BS4 68-0552 V20-C1-36MC* 1.0 36 2.5 2 25

BS4 68-0553 V20-C1-48 1.0 48 2.35 1 23


Molecular Biology

Vertical Gel Unit Combs


DNA SequencingSp

ecia

lized

Too

ls F

or B

iore

sear

ch

Scie-Plas DNA sequencing units aredesigned with cabinet style doors and asafety lid to provide easy access for sample loading without compromisingsafety. All components are shielded andthe unit cannot operate until the doorsare closed and the safety lid is in place. Acombination of rubber mounted, preci-sion machined aluminium heat transferplates, float glass plates and clamps,ensure excellent heat distribution andstraight sample migration through the gel.A drainage port in the upper buffer tankfacilitates emptying of the running buffer.

An optional fan kit provides adjustablethermostatic control of the gel andenables gels to be run at higher speeds.With the fan kit a 20 x 50 cm, 0.35mm6% gel can be run at 55°C within 1 hour45 minutes (including the pre-run).

POWER CONNECTION

Gold plated terminals resist corrosion.

Recessed connectors, inte-gral with the safety lid isolate

power when lid is removed

ELECTRODESOf pure platinum, the

electrodes are both protect-ed and user-replaceable

BUFFER SEALSEasily replaced

- double format in silicone dovetailfor leak-free sealing and easycleaning

DRAINAGE TAP

Allows easy and safeemptying ofupper buffertank

GEL THICKNESSFloat glass plates ensureuniform gel thickness andstraight sample migration

COMBSAn extensive range of combs of variousthicknesses are available including aseries of sharks tooth models

PLATE CLAMPSScrew clamps for easy

plate assembly

TWO GEL SIZES20 x 50 cm and 33 x 41 cm

HEAT SINK PLATE

A heavy duty aluminium back plate helps disperseheat evenly and results ingels free from ‘smiling’and lane distortion

POWER LEADSAll leads are double

insulated and connectorshave CE standard 2mm

fixed shrouds to preventfinger contact.

Safety cover with integralconnectors locates oneway only - this preventsaccess to live components

Removable lower buffertank for easy cleaning

Cabinet style doors foreasy access and sampleloading - no power canbe applied until the safe-ty doors are closed

Optional thermostatic fankit allows gels to be runat higher speeds Catalog No. $ Model Description

BS4 68-0497 1,036.00 SEQ2050 DNA Sequencing Gel Unit, 20 x 50 cm with Integral Aluminium HeatSink Plate. Includes: 2 x Notched Glass Plate, 2 x Plain Glass Plate, 1 x Set of 0.35mm Melinex Spacers,1 of 0.35 mm Melinex 48 SampleShark’s Tooth Comb

BS4 68-0499 76.00 SEQ2050-NG Notched Glass Plate, pkg. of 2

BS4 68-0500 59.00 SEQ2050-PG Plain Glass Plate, pkg. of 2

BS4 68-0501 25.00 SEQ50-SM0.25 0.25 mm SpaceaSet, 2 x 50 cm (W x L)

BS4 68-0502 25.00 SEQ50-SM0.35 0.35 mm Spacer Set, 2 x 50 cm (W x L)

BS4 68-0506 42.00 SEQ20-SG Silicone Rubber Gasket

BS4 68-0507 1,091.00 SEQ3341 DNA Sequencing Gel Unit, 33 x 41 cm with Integral Aluminium HeatSink Plate. Includes: 2 x Notched Glass Plate, 2 x Plain Glass Plate, 1 x Set of 0.35mm Melinex Spacers, 1 of 0.35 mm Melinex 48 SampleShark’s Tooth Comb.

BS4 68-0508 74.00 SEQ3341-NG Notched Glass Plate, pkg. of 2

BS4 68-0509 68.00 SEQ3341-PG Plain Glass Plate, pkg. of 2



BS4 68-0515 51.00 SEQ33-SG Silicone Rubber Gasket

BS4 68-0498 722.00 FSH-KIT Thermostatic Fan, for SEQ2050 and SEQ3341


SpecificationsGel dimensions, W x L 20 x 50 cm (7.9 x 19.7 in)

Dimensions, W x L x H 17.5 x 51.5 x 48 cm(6.9 x 20.3 x 18.9 in)

Max. Sample Capacity 96

Max Buffer Volume:Upper 800 mlLower 800 ml

Combs Available:No. of Samples 1, 10, 18, 24, 36, 48Thicknesses 0.25, 0.35, 0.75, 1.0, 1.5,

2.0 mm

Gel Dimensions, W x L 33 x 41 cm (12.9 x 16.1 in)

Dimensions, W x L x H 17.5 x 39 x 56 cm(6.9 x 15.4 x 22.1 in)

Max. Sample Capacity 48

Max Buffer Volume:Upper 700 mlLower 700 ml

Combs Available:No. of Samples 40, 48, 60, 80, 96Thicknesses 0.25, 0.35 mm

DNA Sequencing Units

See page N71 for comb specifications and ordering details.


Molecular Biology

Electrophoresis Focusing UnitIsoelectric Focusing Unit

The modular design, of the Scie-Plas, Iso-electric focusing unit, enables the user tocarry out almost all of the flatbed electrophoresis techniques. The large 270 x270mm cooling plate allows for the runningof virtually all of the available pre-cast gelsand self-cast gels. The removable coolingplate has a specially designed ceramic surface, which provides homogeneous thermostatting over it’s entire surface. This provides even heat dissipation, particularly important when using ultra-thinIEF gels at high voltages. Gels can be electrophoresis at temperatures as low as 4°C.

Markings on the ceramic plate show the position of the electrodes when using themost popular sizes of commercially available pre-cast gels. The markings, alsocoincide with markings on the electrode stand, which allows for the alignment ofthe electrodes before lowering them onto the gel. The coded grid allows for theaccurate measurement of sample migration.

The positions of the electrodes are adjusted by moving them in an electrodeframe. The electrode frame is also designed for easy electrode tensioning andreplacement. Buffer chambers, in the running tank, provide large volumes of running buffer for electrophoresis using wicks.

Glass electrode plate

Cooling plate

• Compact system for usewith HorizontalElectrophoresisTechniques

• Large Ceramic CoolingPlate – 270 x 270mm

• Printed Grid to Measure Migration Rates

• Electrode Frame with Easy to PositionElectrodes

• Electrodes easy to Tension and Replace

SpecificationsGel Dimensions, W x L V20-CDC 20 x 20 cm (7.9 x 7.9 in)

Unit Dimensions, W x L x H 37.5 x 40.5 x 10 cm (14.8 x 15.9 x 3.9 in)

Cooling Plate Size 270 x 270 mm (10.6 x 10.6 in)

Running Buffer Volume 600 mls per chamber

Catalog No. $ Model DescriptionBS4 68-3121 1,103.00 IEF-SYS Complete IEF Unit.

Includes: RunningTank, Cooling Plate,Glass Electrode Frameand Electrodes.

Accessories

BS4 68-3122 466.00 IEF-CP Cooling Plate

BS4 68-3123 331.00 IEF-GF Glass Electrode Frame

BS4 68-3124 212.00 IEF-CE Cathode Electrode

BS4 68-3125 212.00 IEF-AE Anode Electrode


Spec

ializ

ed T

ools

For

Bio

rese

arch

Blotting Units

These units are designed to produce an extremely uniformsystem for the transfer of proteins and nucleic acids. Thevery low buffer volume and current, 0.8mA per cm2 of gel,produces very little heat, preventing band distortion.Transfers can be achieved in less than one hour, dependingon the molecular weight of the molecules to transfer. Eithersingle gels or multiple gel stacks can be used with the units.

The units are manufactured from rugged acrylic compo-nents and are built to comply with all the statutory safetyregulations. One electrode is manufactured from stainlesssteel and the other from platinised titanium, therefore mak-ing them virtually corrosion-free. This prevents depositsbeing placed on the membrane and the electrodes will lastalmost indefinitely as they will not deteriorate. Two sizes ofunit are available, 10 x 10 cm and 20 x 20 cm electrodes.

Designed to provide a safe and easy to operate system, for the transfer of proteinsand nucleic acids and proteins from a gel matrix onto a suitable transfer mem-brane. Two sizes of units can be used to blot up to four gels, of either 10 x 10cm, 10 x 20 cm or 20 x 20 cm. The user-replaceable electrode cassettes consistof densely coiled platinum wire which results in the generation of a very uniformelectric field. The electrode separation is calculated for optimum transfer. Theunits have a water cooled base and a stirring bar can be placed under the com-pression cassettes to assist in temperature control. The compression cassettescan be locked to minimise gel movement during their insertion into the tank. Anopen square grid design for the cassettes provides a maximum area for transferand is strong enough to maintain a firm contact between the gel and the transfermembrane. If only small gels are to be blotted an optional buffer saver block isavailable for the EB20 unit.

• Robust construction

• Safety lid provides complete protection to the user

• Connectors: 4 mm male fully shrouded

• Corrosion-free gold platedconnectors and terminals

• An open square grid designprovides maximum area for transfer

Catalog No. $ Model DescriptionBS4 68-0586 615.00 EB10 Electro-Blot Unit for 10 x 10 cm Gels BS4 68-0586

EB10. Includes: 4 x Compression Cassettes, 1 x Fiber pads

BS4 68-3129 call EB10-CC Compression Cassette, 10 x 10

BS4 68-0590 55.00 EB-FP Fiber Pads, 20 x 20 cm, pkg. of 4

BS4 68-0587 859.00 EB20 Electro-Blot Unit for 10 x 20 cm or 20 x 20 cm gels.Includes: 4 x Compression Cassettes, 1 x FiberPads

BS4 68-0588 72.00 EB20-CC Large Compression Cassette, 20 x 20 cm

BS4 68-0589 69.00 EB20-SCC Small Compression Cassette, 10 x 20 cm

BS4 68-0591 196.00 EB-BSB Buffer Saving Block

SpecificationsGel Dimensions, W x L

V20-CDC 20 x 20 cm (7.9 x 7.9 in)

Unit Dimensions, W x L x H:EB10 14 x 20 x 14.5 cm (5.5 x 7.9 x 5.7 in)EB20 14 x 31 x 25 cm (5.5 x 12.2 x 9.8 in)

Total Blotting Area:EB10 8.5 x 9.5 cm (3.4 x 3.7 in)EB20 18 x 20 cm (7.1 x 7.9 in)

Buffer Volume:EB10 1.3 litersEB20 3 liters

Blot Capacity:EB10 4EB20 4

• Fast transfer times

• Corrosion-free electrodesfor long life

• Large active transfer area

• Low buffer volume

• Low heat production –less band distortion

• Multiple gel system

Catalog No. $ Model DescriptionBS4 68-0592 496.00 V10-SDB 10 x 10 cm Semi-Dry

Blotting System

BS4 68-0593 1,063.00 V20-SDB 20 x 20 cm Semi-DryBlotting System


V20-CDC 20 x 20 cm (7.9 x 7.9 in)

Unit Dimensions, W x L x H:V10-SDB 16.5 x 17.5 x 6.5 cm (6.5 x 6.9 x 2.6 in)V20-SDB 27.5 x 26.5 x 6.5 cm (10.8 x 10.4 x 2.6 in)

Electroblotters Semi-Dry Blotters


Molecular BiologyBlotting Units

A range of Dot Blot and Slot Blotmicrofiltration manifolds for DNAand RNA filter blot hybridisationsand immunological (Ag/Ab)screening applications. Thesemanifolds are machined fromhigh density acrylic with precisionlapped mating surfaces, whichensure uniform filter contact. In

conjunction with the gasket supplied, they greatly reduce the possibilityof sample leakage. Assembly of the manifolds is achieved simply byaligning the mating screws and tightening the stainless steel thumb-screws. A permanent filter template is provided with each manifold tosimplify the cutting of filters to the exact size. A vacuum of approximate-ly 600mm Hg (0.8 Bar) is required during sample application.

Catalog No. $ Model DescriptionBS4 68-0594 461.00 DHM-48 48-Well Dot Blot Hybridisation

Manifold, in 3 x 16 Array, Consistingof Paired Upper Dot-FormingModules (Dots 3.0mm in Diameter)and Lower Vacuum Chamber Module

BS4 68-0595 501.00 DHM-96 96-Well Dot Blot HybridisationManifold, in 8 x 12 Array, Consistingof Paired Upper Dot-FormingModules (Dots 3.0 mm D) and LowerVacuum Chamber Module

BS4 68-0596 532.00 SHM-24 24-Well Slot Blot HybridisationManifold, in 2 x 12 Array, Consistingof Paired Upper Slot-FormingModules (Slots 0.5 x 6.0 mm) andLower Vacuum Chamber Module

BS4 68-0597 570.00 SHM-48 48-well Slot Blot HybridisationManifold, in 3 x 16 Array, Consistingof Paired Upper Slot-FormingModules (Slots 0.5 x 6.0 mm) and Lower VacuumChamber Module

The Scie-Plas Capillary BlottingUnit features a permanent opti-mised wick system which elimi-nates the use of traditional over-hanging filter wicks. This newsystem draws up more fluid thanconventional systems, thusensuring faster and more evenblots. Multiple gels can be trans-ferred simultaneously, side byside in the same unit - simply bymasking the area surroundingthe gels.

Other convenient features include:

• Stackable and compact

• Accommodates various membrane sizes and types

• 15 x 26 cm or 28 x 26 cm effective wick dimensions

• Robust toughened PVC construction.

Catalog No. $ Model DescriptionBS4 68-3127 269.00 CP-1526 Capillary Blotting Unit

(15 cm x 26 cm)

BS4 68-3128 311.00 CP-2826 Capillary Blotting Unit (28 cm x 26 cm)

Dot Blot

• Low cost

• Simple construction

• Easy assembly

• Four sample configurations

• Alpha-numeric sample identification

• Permanent wick with optimised capillary action

• Fast, easy set-up

• DNA transfer in 2 hours or less; RNA transfer in 3hours or less

• Efficient transfer of highand low M.Wt. fragments

• Floating lid ensures evenpressure without gel compression

Principle:Through capillary action, the buffer travelsfrom the reservoir to the blot pack via poroussupports, permanent wick, gel and mem-brane.This action optimises the transfer oflow and high Molecular Weight DNA/RNAfrom gel to membrane without mechanicaldamage to even the thinnest of gels.

Slot Blot

Dot and Slot Blotters Capillary Blotters


Power SuppliesSp

ecia

lized

Too

ls F

or B

iore

sear

ch

4-way adaptor

Scie-Plas Mini Power Suppliesare ideal for use with small hor-izontal agarose gel elec-trophoresis tanks. They arecompact, lightweight, single out-let power supplies designed forapplications requiring up to 125volts/200mAmps and 200volts/100mAmps. Both operatein constant voltage mode andare adjustable in 25 volt incre-

ments. The operating current is displayed in milliampson the LCD front panel. A 4-way output adaptor allowsup to four gels to be run simultaneously (of equal volt-ages) from the one supply.

SpecificationsGel dimensions, W x L

V20-CDC 20 x 20 cm (7.9 x 7.9 in)

Dimensions W x L x H:MPSU-125 19.6 x 13.9 x 7.8 cm (7.7 x 5.5 x 3.1 in)MPSU-200 19.6 x 13.9 x 7.8 cm (7.7 x 5.5 x 3.1 in)

Voltage:MPSU-125 25 to 125 VMPSU-200 25 to 200 V

Current:MPSU-125 0 to 200 mAMPSU-200 0 to 100 mA

Power:MPSU-125 25 W MaxMPSU-200 20 W Max

Outputs:MPSU-125 1MPSU-200 1

Power Supply Accessories

In the past, the researcher has encounteredcompatibility problems with purchasingelectrophoresis equipment from differentLife Science companies. This is becausemanufacturers fit power connectors to their electrophoresis equipment andpower output sockets to their power supplies which are compatible with eachother but not necessarily compatible with equipment manufactured by othercompanies.

Scie-Plas Ltd have reviewed this problem from the researchers point of view and come up with two solutions which completely iradicate any compatibilityconflicts.

Firstly, all Scie-Plas power supplies are fitted with ubiquitous power outlet sock-ets, specifically designed to accommodate all the different types of power con-nector. These are of two types:

1) Standard 4mm power output sockets which are fitted to power supplies of low to mid range voltages used in standard electrophoresisprocedures.

2) High Voltage 2mm power output sockets which are fitted to E833 and E862 power supplies of high voltages used in DNA sequencing procedures.

Electrophoresis units and sequencers from other Life Science companies plugdirectly into Scie-Plas standard and high voltage power supplies.

Secondly, to make Scie-Plas electrophoresis units compatible with non-Scie-Plaspower supplies, 3 different types of adaptor can be purchased.

The complete compatibility of Scie Plas units and power supplies give theresearcher the confidence to purchase lab equipment from Scie-Plas with theknowledge that compatibility conflicts will not render any of their equipmentunusable.

User Replaceable Cables are also available with either 2mm or 4mm connectors.

Catalog No. $ Model DescriptionBS4 68-0616 14.00 4/4MMA 4 mm Shrouded 4 mm Fixed Plug, pkg. of 2

BS4 68-0617 14.00 4/2MMA 4 mm Fixed to 2 mm Fixed Plug, pkg. of 2

BS4 68-3129 15.00 2/4MMA 2 mm Fixed to 4 mm Fixed Plug, pkg. of 2

BS4 68-3130 57.00 CABLE-2 2 x 1 m Power Leads, with 2 mm Connectors

BS4 68-3131 57.00 CABLE-4 2 x 1 m Power Leads, with 4 mm Connectors

• 4/4MMA adapters connect standard voltageelectrophoresis units to alllow to mid range voltagepower supplies with 4mmoutput sockets.

• 4/2MMA adapters connect standard voltageelectrophoresis units to allhigh voltage power supplieswith 2mm output sockets

• 2/4MMA adapters connectSequencers to all low tomid range voltage powersupplies with 4mm outputsockets

Mini Power Supplies

Catalog No. Model Volts Description

BS4 68-0608 MPSU-125/200 115V 125 V, 200 mAmp$ 465.00 Mini Power Supply

BS4 68-3176 MPSU-125/200 210-250V 125 V, 200 mAmp$ Mini Power Supply

BS4 68-0609 MPSU-200/100 115V 200 V, 100 mAmp$ 496.00 Mini Power Supply

BS4 68-3177 MPSU-200/100 210-250V 200 V, 100 mAmp$ Mini Power Supply

BS4 68-0610 MPSU-PA4 210-250V Four Output $ 96.00 Adaptor

• Compact andlightweight

• Economical

• LCD display

• 4-way adaptorconverts unitsfrom single tofour poweroutputs.

Mini Power Supplies


Molecular Biology

Power Supplies

The three Consort Mini PowerSupplies are designed to coverthe range of voltages and cur-rents generally used with smallelectrophoresis units.

The voltage and current can beadjusted at any time during a run.They are displayed as bright, easy

to read digits on a large display.

To increase safety to users, none of the outlets are direct-ly wired to earth, and the output connections are deeplyrecessed. Other safety features include full protectionagainst both overload and accidental short circuit.

• Small, portable and safe

• OverloadProtection

• Short CircuitProtection

• Constant voltage, currentor power

• Automaticcrossover

• OverloadProtection

• Short CircuitProtection

SpecificationsDimensions, W x L x H:

All Models 15 x 20 x 12 cm (5.9 x 7.9 x 4.7 in)

Outputs:All Models 3

SpecificationsAll Models:

Dimensions, W x L x H 30 x 28 x 12 cm (11.8 x 11 x 4.7 in)Timer 0 to 99.99 minPrograms 9 setsOutputs 4

The Consort Maxi Power supplies cover a wide range of voltages and currents.Eleven different models are available which offers the researcher the widestchoice of current and voltage combinations.

Each model is fully programmable, with up to nine different programs perma-nently stored at any one time. Each of these programs can have up to nine param-eters so that very complex, multiple step techniques can be easily programmedand stored. All models can be set to automatically terminate and optionally soundan alarm after a set time or volt-hour has elapsed.

All models enable runs at constant voltage, current and power with automaticcrossover. Models 833 and 862 are fitted with high voltage 2mm output sockets.These are especially for use with high voltage DNA sequencers which are fittedwith 2mm connectors. Standard voltage electrophoresis equipment can be con-nected to these power supplies by using adaptor 4/2MMA. For more informationon adapters see page N76.

Consort Maxi Power Supplies

Catalog No. Catalog No.115V 210-250V Model Description

BS4 68-3165 BS4 68-3135 E835300 Volt, 500 mAmp, 150 Watts Power Supply$ 1,315.00 1,315.00

BS4 68-3166 BS4 68-3136 E831300 Volt, 1000 mAmp, 150 Watts Power Supply$










Consort Mini Units

Catalog No. Catalog No.115V 210-250V Model Description

BS4 68-3162 BS4 68-3132 E122150 Volt, 150 mAmp, 25$ 607.00 607.00 Watts Power Supply

BS4 68-3163 BS4 68-3133 E132300 Volt, 150 mAmp, 25$ Watts Power Supply

BS4 68-3164 BS4 68-3134 E143400 Volt, 250 mAmp, 50$ 841.00 841.00 Watts Power Supply

Consort Mini Power Supplies Consort Maxi Power Supplies


Electrophoresis AccessoriesSp

ecia

lized

Too

ls F

or B

iore

sear

ch

Scie-Plas offers five sizesof gradient mixers, 15,25, 50, 100 and 500 ml,total volume. The small15 and 25 ml mixers areideal for the preparationof centrifugation gradients, using sucroseor cesium chloride solutions. The larger 50,

100 and 500 ml mixers are mainly used for the preparation of lin-ear polyacrylamide gel gradients.

The 500 ml mixer is configured to be used in conjunction with themulticaster systems. (see page N79).

The four small mixers are produced from a single acrylic block. Thelarge 500 ml unit is made from acrylic tubes. They all consist of twochambers, a reservoir and a mixing chamber, with an interconnect-ing valve. A second valve (not on GM500) regulates the output flowfrom the mixing chamber. A magnetic stirring bar is placed in themixing chamber to maintain a constant gradient. All of the mixershave a flat base to enable them to be placed on a magnetic stirrer.They also have a support rod which can be used to fix the mixers toa retort stand for extra stability.

Catalog No. $ ProductBS4 68-0574 254.00 GM1515 ml Gradient Mixer

BS4 68-0575 275.00 GM2525 ml Gradient Mixer




Sturdy racks, designed for safe drying and storage of glass plates. Thesmall rack is designed to hold up to 20, 2mm thick plates while thelarger rack can hold up to 10, 5mm thick glass plates.

Catalog No. $ ProductBS4 68-0572 24.00 GLE-MGR Mini Glass Plate Rack for 20,

2 mm Plates

BS4 68-0573 28.00 GLE-LGR Large Glass Plate Rack for 10, 5 mm Plates

Gradient Mixers Glass Plate Racks


Molecular Biology

Electrophoresis Accessories

2-Gel Cam Caster10-Gel MulticasterCaster

• Guaranteed leak proof seal

• User friendly

• Fully compatible with Scie-PlasVertical Units

Multicaster

• Solid acrylic construction

• User replaceable Silicone seals

• Levelling feet and level bubble


V20-CDC 20 x 20 cm (7.9 x 7.9 in)

Unit Dimensions, W x L x H:V10-MC10 11.5 x 16.5 x 15 cm

(4.5 x 6.5 x 5.9 in)

Catalog No. $ Model ProductBS4 68-0578 268.00 V10-SC2 2-Gel Cam Caster System for V10 Electrophoresis Units. Includes

casting base, Casting Upstand, 2 x Silicone Seals and 2 x Cams

BS4 68-0475 191.00 V10-CB Gel Casting Base for V10-SC2. Includes Casting Base, 2 xSilicone Seals and 2 x Cams

BS4 68-3147 254.00 V10-GCU Gel Casting Upstand for V10-SC2


BS4 68-0477 36.00 CB-CAM Cams, pkg. of 2

BS4 68-0580 357.00 V20-SC2 2-Gel Cam Caster System for V20 Electrophoresis Units. IncludesCasting Base, Casting Upstand, 2 x Silicone Seals and 2 x Cams

BS4 68-0484 234.00 V20-CB Gel Casting Base for V20-SC2. Includes Casting Base, 2 xSilicone Seals and 2 x Cams

BS4 68-3148 339.00 V20-GCU Gel Casting Upstand for V20-SC2


BS4 68-0477 36.00 CB-CAM Cams, pkg. of 2

BS4 68-0582 310.00 V10-MC10 10-Gel Multicaster System for V10 Electrophoresis Units. Includes:10 x 1 mm Separation Sheets, 2 x 0.4 mm Spacer Aligners

BS4 68-0583 18.00 MC10-SS Separation Sheets, 1 mm, pkg. of 2

BS4 68-0584 25.00 MC10-SA Spacer Aligners, 0.4 mm, pkg. of 2

BS4 68-0585 21.00 MC10-SG Silicone Rubber Gasket

Multiple Gel Casting Systems

The Scie-Plas Vertical 2- Gel Cam Casting Systems allow two gels to be cast and run in theminimum number of steps. These simple systems incorporate clamping bars and screwswhich hold the glass plates tightly together along with a Cam pin system which pulls the Glassplate sandwiches down onto silicone mats forming a guaranteed leak proof seal. The CamCaster systems have been designed to compliment the Scie-Plas Vertical Gel Units.They usethe Central Gel Running Module from the Vertical Gel rig which allows gels to be cast thenrun with the minimum of manipulation. After casting, the Running module with newly castgels is simply removed from the casting base and placed in the tank for electrophoresis.Additional gels can be cast while the gels are running by utilising the SC2 Cam Caster whichcomes complete with upstand.

The Cam Casters come in two sizes, V10-SC2/V10-CB for V10 sized gels and V20-SC2/V20-CBfor V10W and V20 sized gels. The V10-CDCY, V10W-CDCY and V20-CDCY systems come complete with casting base and provide complete Vertical Gel running/ casting systems. See pages N66 and N67 for details on Scie-Plas Vertical Gel Systems.

MulticasterThe Scie-Plas Multi-Caster can cast up to ten V10 sized uniform single percentage gels or gradient gels at any one time. This unit allows simple, leak-free filling from both top and bottom. Separation sheets allow easy separation of the gels after casting. Gels can be storedrefrigerated for several months.

Scie-Plas Gel Casting Systems are complimented by a large variety of combs and spacers,resulting in the widest choice of gel thickness and sample number available. Combs can becustom made to your specifications at little extra cost.



ecia

lized

Too

ls F

or B

iore

sear

ch

Scie-Plas manufacture two sizes of vacuum, heated, gel dryer, 45 x 34 cm and 50 x 40 cm. Theseare very versatile, able to dry single gels up to 40 x 50 cm in size or multiple small format gels.

The units have two timers, one for the temperature and one for the vacuum pump. The dry-ing temperature can be set between ambient and 90°C and regulated to ±2°C, and the dry-ing time set up to 5 hours in 1 minute steps. The vacuum pump can also be timed to auto-matically switch off, any time up to 5 hours in 1 minute steps.

The units are extremely robust in their construction. The base is of cast aluminium for evendistribution of heat. The user friendly control panel is constructed from stainless steel forstrength. Although solidly built the units are light for easy transportation.

The Scie-Plas Vacuum pump uses 3-piston technology to create a uniquely quiet and vibra-tion free pump. This means that it is particularly suited for continuous running in a lab envi-ronment. The strength of the vacuum is clearly displayed on a dial and can be controlled atany time to prevent possible damage to fragile materials. The pump is contained within aneasy to clean, stainless steel casing and is fitted with corrosion resistant PTFE seals and a hardanodised cylinder. Contamination is kept to a minimum by a water trap and 30 micron filterwhich are easily changed by the user. Quick release fittings enable the pump to be connect-ed and disconnected quickly and easily.

The pump uses high air-flow rather than high vacuum. This is advantageous because strongvacuums can damage materials and also because a high air-flow pump is much more effec-tive when there are small leaks preventing a full vacuum from being formed.

Gel Dryer

• Even heat distribution via an 800 Wattheating membrane

• Dries sequencing gels up to 40 x 50cm in as little as 30 minutes

• Dries multiple small format gels quickly

• Accurate temperature control up to90°C

• 5 hour Timer for heating element

• 5 hour Timer for vacuum pump

Vacuum

• User changeable Inlet filter included

• Virtually noise and vibration free

• Designed for continuous running if required

• For use with Gel dryers, Micro ArrayAssays and Vacuum Beds

SpecificationsGel Dryer

Unit Dimensions, H x W x D:GD-4534 11 x 57 x 40 cm (4.3 x 22.4 x 15.8 in)GD-5040 12 x 63 x 48 cm (4.7 x 24.8 x 18.9 in)

Timers :Vacuum 0 to 5 hrsTemperature 0 to 5 hrs

Dries Gel up to Size:GD-4534 45 x 34 cm (17.7 x 13.4 in)GD-5040 50 x 40 cm (19.7 x 15.8 in)

Weight 14 kg

Vacuum Pump

Unit Dimensions 31.5 x 18 x 22 cm

Maximum Vacuum -440 mbar

Max. Airflow 70 liters/min

Noise Level 45 dBa at 1 m

Weight 7 kg

Gel Dryer Vacuum

Vacuum and Heated Gel Dryer

Catalog No. Catalog No.115V 210-250V Model Product

BS4 68-0598 BS4 68-3178 GD-4534 45 x 34 cm Complete Slab Gel Dryer System Includes:Stainless steel screen, Mylar sheet, Porous polyethylene sheet,

$ 1,835.00 1,924.00 clear silicone rubber overlay sheet

BS4 68-0603 BS4 68-3179 GD-5040 50 x 40 cm Complete Slab Gel Dryer System. Includes:Stainless steel screen, Mylar sheet, Porous polyethylene sheet,

$ clear silicone rubber overlay sheet.

BS4 68-3149 GD-PUMP Vacuum Pump for GD-4534 and GD-5040$ 4,421.00

Vacuum and Heated Gel Dryer

Catalog No. $ Model ProductBS4 68-0599 125.00 VGD-SSS Stainless steel screen for GD-4534

BS4 68-0600 34.00 VGD-MS Mylar sheet for GD-4534

BS4 68-0601 96.00 VGD-PPS Porous polyethylene sheet for GD-4534

BS4 68-0602 115.00 VGD-SRO Clear silicone rubber overlay sheet for GD-4534

BS4 68-0604 168.00 GD-SSS Stainless steel screen for GD-5040

BS4 68-0605 46.00 GD-MS Mylar sheet for GD-5040

BS4 68-0606 129.00 GD-PPS Porous polyethylene sheet for GD-5040

BS4 68-0607 156.00 GD-SRO Clear silicone rubber overlay sheet for GD-5040


Molecular Biology

Ultra Violet Sterilization

The PCR process is covered by US patents owned by Hoffman LaRoche

The Scie-Plas UV Sterilization cabinet has been designed to efficiently decontam-inate reagents and equipment prior to carrying out PCR® reactions. The power-ful UV lights denature nucleic acids in 5 to 30 minutes making them unsuitablefor amplification, therefore eliminating any possible cross contaminationbetween samples. The UV lights are timer controlled, thus minimising the time ofUV exposure. Safety interlocks on the cabinet doors prevents the user from anyexposure to the UV light. The 10mm thick optical acrylic cabinet also acts as anefficient shield of beta radioactive emissions and can therefore be safely usedwith isotopes such as 32P. A white light provides the user with good visibilitywhen working within the cabinet.

Catalog No. $ Model DescriptionBS4 68-0618 2,328.00 GLE-UVSC UV Sterilization Cabinet, 115 V

BS4 68-0719 89.00 RPP-TY6854 Safety Tray, 68 x 54 cm

BS4 68-0713 89.00 RPP-TW6854 Safety Tray Liners, APET, pkg. of 25, 210-250

• Destroys unwanted PCR products in less than 30 minutes

• Built in timer control

• Protects the sample from user contamination

• Protects the user from Biohazard samples

• Four powerful, timer controlled UV tubes, combined with optimal reflectors, provide efficient irradiation of the complete work surface

• Doors equipped with safety cutouts

• Use with safety trays and easy to clean tray liners, RPP-TY6854, RPP-TW-6854 (not included)

SpecificationsDimensions, H x W x D 66 x 56 x 42 cm (26 x 22.1 x 16.5 in)

White Light 15 Watt

UV Light 15 Watt

Weight 19 Kg

PCR Cabinet



ecia

lized

Too

ls F

or B

iore

sear

ch

These multi-channel gel loadingsyringes offer a new, better wayto transfer and load your electrophoresis samples with theadvantages listed above. They areavailable for three gel thicknesses. For the best results,select the needle design whichmost closely matches your gel thickness.

Catalog No. $ ProductBS4 68-0008 755.00 12-Channel Gel Loading Syringe, 0.2 mm

BS4 68-0009 763.00 8-Channel Gel Loading Syringe, 0.2 mm





BS4 68-0012 64.00 Single Channel DNA Repl. Syringe, 0.2 mm, 10 µl



Quick and EasyThe adjustable gel loadingsyringes (AGLS) allows quick andeasy loading of DNA samples onthe 96-lane ABI PRISM 377 DNAsequencing instrument. Eightsamples can be transferredsimultaneously from a microwellplate with 9 mm spacing to a 96-lane gel with 10.8 mm spacing.

Easy Needle AdjustmentAn easy to use sliding plate makes adjustment of the needle spacingpossible without repositioning of hands. Simply slide the plate up ordown for the appropriate needle spacing. There’s no need to pausebetween the sample filling and gel loading procedure since the slidingplate handle is within easy reach of your fingers on the back of theAGLS. As a result, gels are loaded more efficiently, decreasing diffusion-related band broadening and loading order errors.

Needle designs are available for gel thicknesses of 0.2,0.3, and 0.4 mm.

• 0.2 mm - For use with standard DNA sequencing gel plates or new96-lane notched plate. Allows insertion of the needle between theplates for dense sample loading and improved resolution.

• 0.3 mm – For use with new 96-lane notched plate. Allows inser-tion of needles between notched plates with greater durability.

• 0.4 mm – For use with standard DNA sequencing gel plates ornew 96-lane notched plate. Ideal for gravity-loading techniqueswhere samples are loaded at the top junction of the gel platesrather than inserting the needles between the plates.

Catalog No. $ ProductBS4 68-0000 1,213.00 8-Channel Adjustable Gel Loading Syringe,

for 0.2 mm gels

BS4 68-0001 1,203.00 8-Channel Adjustable Gel Loading Syringe, for 0.3 mm gels

BS4 68-0002 1,102.00 8-Channel Adjustable Gel Loading Syringe, for 0.4 mm gels

BS4 72-7142 143.00 AGLS Repl. Needle, 0.2 mm, pkg. of 6



BS4 68-0006 10.00 Needle Cleaning Wires for 0.2 and 0.3 mm Needles,pkg. of 10

BS4 68-0007 10.00 Needle Cleaning Wires for 0.4 mm Needles, pkg. of 10

• Simplify and speed sample loading of 96-lane gels on ABI PRISM®

377 DNA sequencinginstrument

• Easy adjustment of needle spacing

• Needle designs for 0.2, 0.3, and 0.4 mm thickness gels for optimal loading

• Removable needles forcomplete interchange-ability of needlesdesigns, and clogged or damaged needles

• Accurately transfers sample volumes from 0.2 to 10 µl

Harvard Apparatus carries a complete line of syringes for differentapplications. See Pumps Section A.

• 0.2, 0.3 and 0.4 mm needle designs for optimal loading

• Rapid handling of multiple samples

• No disposable tips tochange or position to fitbetween gel casting plates

• Adjustable volume stopsfor reproducibility

• Fits most popular gel combconfigurations (square andshark tooth)

Multiple-Channel Gel Loading Syringes


Molecular Biology

Genomics

With the new HydroShear WashKit, you will not need to look anyfurther than Genomic Solutionsfor your DNA shearing protocols. The kit removes anytrace of previous samples, eliminating carryover contami-

nation. At the same time, the kit allows you to minimize batch-to-batch variation. Complete with three different wash solutions, the HydroShear Wash Kit includes all reagents necessary toperform DNA shearing using the HydroShear.

With one kit you will be able to run 50 shearing cycles. Each kit contains Wash Solution I (HCl), Wash Solution II (NaOH) and WashSolution III (TE).

Catalog No. $ Model ProductBS4 68-3792 call JHSH215001 Hydroshear Wash Kit

HydroShear Hydroshear Wash Kit

The HydroShear offers the simplest, most reproducible,and most controllable methodavailable for generating randomDNA fragments. This software-driven device useshydrodynamic shearing forcesto fragment DNA strands.

With the HydroShear, virtuallyany source of DNA at any concentration in volumes assmall as 40 µl can be randomlyfractured to within a two-foldsize distribution. For instance, ifyour target size is 2 kb, you cancalibrate the HydroShear to produce a distribution centeredon 2 kb with 90% of your DNA

falling between 1.3 kb and 2.6 kb — ideal for plasmid sequencinglibraries. Furthermore, because of the repeatability of theHydroShear process, the distribution will be the same each day evenwith multiple users.

Catalog No. $ Model ProductBS4 68-3786 call HSA01 HydroShear 115 V (or 230 V)

Replacment Parts

BS4 68-3787 call JHSH204004 Standard 1 kb to 9 kb Shearing Assembly

BS4 68-3788 call JHSH010002 Replacement Syringe

BS4 68-3789 call JHSH110003 Syringe Adapter

BS4 68-3790 call JHSH204006 Custom 650 bp to 5,000 bpShearing Assembly

BS4 68-3791 call JHSH204007 Custom 4 kb to 40 kbShearing Assembly

Reference

* Peter J. Oefner, Scott P. Hunicke-Smith, Lillian Chiang, Fred Dietrich, John Mulligan andRonald W. Davis.“Efficient random subcloning of DNA sheared in a recirculating point-sink flow system.” Nucleic Acids Research, 1996, Vol. 24, No. 20 3879-3886.

• High cloning efficiency ofprocessed DNA*

• Small volume: 40 µl samples can be sheareddirectly without dilution,perfect for precious DNA samples

• Tight “two-fold” size distributions*

• Consistency regardlessof DNA concentration orsize, independent of user

• Easy, fast operation: loadDNA, run system, andwash in approximately 10minutes

• Ideal for plasmidsequencing libraries

• Helps to eliminate carryover contamination

Hydroshear HandleThe HydroShear handle accessory makes turning the front knob easier than ever. This item is especially helpful to researchers whouse the HydroShear several times a day. The handle alleviates repetitive stress on the wrist.

Catalog No. $ Model ProductBS4 68-3793 call JHSH200004 Hydroshear Ergonomic Valve

Handle

For more information on Genomic Solutions, please contact us at:

Phone 734-975-4800 • Fax 734-975-4808

Email [email protected]

Web www.genomicsolutions.com


GenomicsSp

ecia

lized

Too

ls F

or B

iore

sear

ch

OmniGrid Slides

Quality microarraysrequire quality printingsurfaces. Genomic Solutionsoffers a variety of microar-ray surface chemistriesdesigned to minimize

background fluorescence, while efficiently coupling nucleic acids to theslide surface. These slides are all quality controlled and promise sharp uniform features for your DNA microarray experiments. Choose betweenOmniGrid® Amino, Aldehyde and Epoxy coupling chemistries. All threetypes of slides are availble with bar-coding for easy sample tracking.

OmniGrid slides are supported by a variety of reagents designed to optimize your microarraying experiments from printing to scanning.

OmniGrid Amine SlidesSpecial low-fluorescent, ultra-flat glass is used to produce a uniformcovalently bonded amine-silane surface. The process used to manufacture these slides has been optimized to produce the idealdensity of reactive groups that shows negligible variation betweenbatches. OmniGrid Amine slides rely on electrostatic binding of thephosphodiester backbone to form a stable attachment of the nucleicacid to the slide surface.

These slides are an outstanding choice for spotting features that havenot been chemically modified by the addition of other functionalgroups, such as primary amines. Both moderately long (50mers or longer) oligonucleotides and PCR products work well with these slides.

OmniGrid Amine slides provide unsurpassed S/N (Signal-to-Noise)characteristics and ease of handling in standard 75 x 25 mm size.The barcoded option for the OmniGrid microarray slides givesresearchers an additional level of automated sample tracking. Foradded convenience, Genomic Solutions offers a line of ready-to-use,concentrated OmniGrid reagents for users’ microarraying needsfrom spotting to fluorescent probe dissolution.

A special OmniGrid Sample Kit is available. It contains the followingcomponents:

Qty Item

5 pack OmniGrid Amine Slide 5 pack

10 ml 2X Spotting Buffer 1

10 ml 2X Spotting Buffer AM-1

10 ml 2X Spotting Buffer AM-2

10 ml 1X Hybridization Buffer

1 Manuals and QuickStart Guide

Catalog No. $ ProductBS4 68-3796 call Omnigrid Amine Slide, pkg. of 5

BS4 68-3797 call Omnigrid Amine Slide, pkg. of 25

BS4 68-3798 call Omnigrid Amine Slide Barcoded, pkg. of 5

BS4 68-3799 call Omnigrid Amine Slide Barcoded, pkg. of 25

BS4 68-3800 call Omnigrid Amine Sample Kit

Spot Composition

PCR or cDNA Oligonucleotide

NH3+ Linker No Linker NH3+ Linker No Linker

Aldehyde Amine Aldehyde Amine

Epoxy Epoxy

Still not sure? Buy a sampler kit complete with reagents!

Choosing the best OmniGrid Slide

OmniGrid Epoxy SlidesSpecial low-fluorescent, ultra-flat glass is used to produce a uniformsurface featuring reactive epoxy groups. Epoxides are strained threemember cyclic ethers that are highly reactive. They readily react withprimary amines. For best performance, these slides should be usedwith nucleic acids that have been chemically modified at either the 3’or 5’ with an amine linker. The epoxy surface is reactive enough tobind to amines found in the bases of nucleic acids, but not as efficiently. A secondary benefit of the covalent bond formed betweenthe surface and the terminus of the nucleic acid is the exposure ofvirtually the entire probe length for base pairing with its complementary sequence.

OmniGrid Epoxy slides provide unsurpassed S/N characteristics andease of handling in standard 75 mm x 25 mm size. The barcodedoption for the OmniGrid microarray slides gives researchers an additional level of automated sample tracking. For added convenience Genomic Solutions offers a line of ready-to-use andconcentrated OmniGrid reagents for users’ microarraying needsfrom spotting to fluorescent probe dissolution.

A convenient OmniGrid Aldehyde Sample Kit is available. It containsthe follow components:

Qty Item

5 pack OmniGrid Epoxy Slide


100 ml 100 ml 4X Epoxy Blocking Buffer



Catalog No. $ ProductBS4 68-3806 call Omnigrid Epoxy Slide, pkg. of 5

BS4 68-3807 call Omnigrid Epoxy Slide, pkg. of 25

BS4 68-3808 call Omnigrid Epoxy Slide Barcoded, pkg. of 5

BS4 68-3809 call Omnigrid Epoxy Slide Barcoded, pkg. of 25

BS4 68-3810 call Omnigrid Epoxy Sample Kit


Molecular Biology

Genomics

OmniGrid Aldehyde SlidesSpecial low-fluorescent, ultra-flat glass is used to produce a uniformsurface featuring reactive aldehyde groups. These groups readilyreact with primary amines, and are intended for use with nucleicacids that have been modified with this chemistry. Either 5’ or 3’amine modified PCR products and moderately long oligonucleotides(50mers and longer) work well with this surface chemistry. Thecovalent bond formed at the terminus of the nucleic acid offers bothstability and maximal base pairing opportunity.

OmniGrid Aldehyde slides provide unsurpassed S/N characteristicsand ease of handling in standard 75 mm x 25 mm size. The barcoded option for the OmniGrid microarray slides gives researchersan additional level of automated sample tracking. For added convenience Genomic Solutions offers a line of ready-to-use, concentrated OmniGrid reagents for users’ microarraying needsfrom spotting to fluorescent probe dissolution.

A convenient OmniGrid Aldehyde Sample Kit is available. It containsthe follow components:

Qty Item

5 pack OmniGrid Aldehyde Slide




5 pack OmniGrid Amine Slide 5 pack

Catalog No. $ ProductBS4 68-6801 call Omnigrid Aldehyde Slide, pkg. of 5

BS4 68-6802 call Omnigrid Aldehyde Slide, pkg. of 25

BS4 68-6803 call Omnigrid Aldehyde Slide Barcoded, pkg. of 5

BS4 68-6804 call Omnigrid Aldehyde Slide Barcoded, pkg. of 25

BS4 68-6805 call Omnigrid Aldehyde Sample Kit

OmniGrid ReagentsThe first step in printing a DNA microarray is choosing the appro-priate spotting buffer to dissolve the samples that will be spotted.Genomic Solutions offers several reagents that have been optimizedto work with OmniGrid slides to aid in consistency and convenience.Each type of slide surface chemistry has a set of reagents that offerenhanced performance and ease of use. Reference the table above todetermine which buffers are compatible with the specific slide chem-istry. Each buffer has its own properties and the user determineswhich buffer performs best in the user’s experiments and spottingsetup. OmniGrid 2X Spotting Buffer 1 is the best all-around choiceand a good starting point for further optimization.

Be sure to use OmniGrid 1X Hybridization Buffer to dissolve cDNAfluorescently labeled probes. This solution has been optimized towork well with all OmniGrid substrate surface chemistries.

When selecting OmniGrid Epoxy slides, use OmniGrid 4X BlockingBuffer to further reduce background and other processing artifacts.

OmniGrid Slides

Reagent Selection Guide

Slide Type

OmniGrid Reagent Anime Epoxy Aldehyde

2X Spotting Buffer 1 X X X

2X Spotting Buffer 2 X X X

2X Spotting Buffer AM-1 X

2X Spotting Buffer AM-2 X

4X Blocking Buffer X

1X Hybridization Buffer X X X

Catalog No. $ ProductBS4 68-3811 call 2X Spotting Buffer 1, 10 ml

BS4 68-3812 call 2X Spotting Buffer 1, 100 ml



BS4 68-3815 call 2X Spotting Buffer AM-1, 10 ml




BS4 68-3819 call 4X Blocking Buffer, 100 ml (For Epoxy Only)



BS4 68-3822 call 1X Hybridization Buffer, 10 ml



Certain methods of sample preparation, analysis or use ofour products may be covered by patents or other intellectual property rights held by others in certain countries. Genomic Solutions does not encourage or support the unauthorized or unlicensed use of any technology. Use of Genomic Solutions products is recommended only for technology for which the end userhas a license under proprietary rights of third parties or fortechnology for which a license is not required.

OLIGONUCLEOTIDE ARRAYS. Genomic Solutions Inc is not licensed under any patents owned by Oxford GeneTechnology Limited (“OGT”).A license to OGT patents maybe necessary to manufacture or use certain oligonucleotidearrays.To enquire about a license to OGT’s oligonucleotidearray patents, please contact:[email protected] For more information on Genomic Solutions,

please contact us at:

Phone 734-975-4800 • Fax 734-975-4808




GenomicsSp

ecia

lized

Too

ls F

or B

iore

sear

ch

Designed specifically for hybridizing microarrays, the HybChambersare easier to use than any other hybridization chambers on the market. Biochips printed on a microarrayer, such as GenomicSolutions OmniGrid® or BioRobotics MicroGrid, can be placed inthese cost-effective chambers for waterbath hybridization protocols.

The NEW HybChamber Mica provides greater protection againstambient light degradation of fluorescent labels during hybridization.The Mica has a darker, semitransparent top plate which allows more convenient visualization of microarray slides during allhybridization steps.

Each HybChamber has two slide compartments. The novel designallows easy separation of the base and top plate via six butterflyscrew fasteners. The butterfly screws allow easy tightening and loosening of the chamber components. Captive screw fastenersensure easy and complete sealing. The design also allows easy slideremoval from the base unit.

Catalog No. $ Model ProductBS4 68-3794 call HYB-03 HybChamber, Dual Hybridization

Chamber

BS4 68-3795 call HYB-04 HybChamber Mica, Dual TintedHybridization Chamber

HybChambers

• Two models now available:

- NEW HybChamber Mica

- Standard HybChamber

• Each chamber can hold two microarrays

• Cost effective chamber for waterbath hybridizations

• Quick and easy access to slide chambers

• Efficient processing of multiple chambers - interlockingdesign allows chambers to be stacked in waterbaths

SpecificationsTemperature Supports temperatures up to 70°C

Compact Format 1.57 x 1.57 cm (4 x 4 in)

For more information on Genomic Solutions, please contact us at:

Phone 734-975-4800 • Fax 734-975-4808




Molecular Biology

Electrophoresis Imaging ProductsGel Explorer™ Gel Documentation Imaging System

This new Gel Documentation Imaging System provides for the analy-sis of many applications including DNA/RNA gels, protein gels, blotsand arrays, TLC plates, and colony counting. The system is availablewith several camera options and includes many features offered onmore expensive Gel Doc systems. Interior White Light and Dual WaveUV Epi Lighting provide even illumination of sample gels. A slide out

SpecificationsDimensions, H x W x D 36 x 24.5 x 19.25 in

Power Variable Electronic, 100 V to 240 V Ibs4ut

Field of View 21 x 25 cm

EPI Illumination Wavelength 254 nm, 365 nm and White Light

EPI Illumination Intensity Fixed Intensity

Camera 10 Bit Non-Cooled CCD, Canon G5 Digital 5 Megapixel Monochrome Megapixel 10 Bit Non-Cooled CCD, Color Megapixel

Format 1/1.8 in 1/2 in 1/2 in

Digitization, bits per color 24 bits 10 bits 10 bits

Shades of Gray (# of colors) 786 1024 1024

Chip Size N/A 7.6 x 6.2 mm 7.6 x 6.2 mm

Pixel Size N/A 4.65 x 4.65 µm 4.65 x 4.65 µm

Resolution 2592 x 1944 1360 x 1024 1360 x 1024

Quantum Efficiency at 425 µm N/A N/A N/A

Integrated Zoom 16x N/A N/A

Movie Mode (30 frames/sec) yes yes yes

Amount of Cooling Below Ambient C N/A N/A N/A

Interface USB Firewire Firewire

Focal Length 7.2 to 28.8 mm 8 to 48 mm 8 to 48 mm

Aperature F2.0 F1.0 F1.0

Base System BS4 72-6629 BS4 72-6631 BS4 72-6633$ 5,695.00 6,779.00 6,779.00

Base System 1-D Analysis Software BS4 72-6630 BS4 72-6632 BS4 72-6634$ 6,995.00 7,995.00 8,403.00

Transilluminator tray permits easy gel access for placement or cuttingof the gel. A light tight housing is lockable to keep wandering handsout of sensitive areas in the lab. All system functions are controlled byan easy to use touchpad mounted on the top face of the unit. A masterdoor cutoff switch allows users to over-ride the door cutoff allowingthe user to open the door and have the system remain on.

All camera options for the Gel Explorer™ include a 600 nm filter forEthidium Bromide imaging. A manual zoom lens of f1.0 is included.Both Gel Explorer™ Systems are fully upgradable with optional 1-DAnalysis and Acquisition Software.

Catalog No. $ ProductBS4 72-6635 414.00 Housing Cover for Gel Explorer™

• Several camera choices available

• 10 Bit Megapixel Firewire camera standard

• Easily view 10 x 10 cm to 25 x 40 cm gels with one system

• Fully upgradable

NEW


Electrophoresis Imaging ProductsSp

ecia

lized

Too

ls F

or B

iore

sear

ch

The Polaroid DS-34 is a fixed focal length camera with avariety of hood options, permitting photography of a widerange of image areas without a darkroom.

The hoods contain lenses of calibrated diopters which setthe focal length to accommodate the image area, resultingin sharp pictures without focusing. A set of threaded glassfilters for lens mounting is also available. They combinewith any of the transilluminators to make an instant photodocumentation system.

Catalog No. $ ProductBS4 68-0892 791.00 DS-34 Polaroid Instant Camera

BS4 68-0893 120.00 Camera Hood for 7.6 x 10.2 cm (3 x 4 in) Gel







BS4 68-0900-XX 82.00 *Hood Mounting Plate for DS-34Camera (Standard)

BS4 68-0901-XX 69.00 *Hood Mounting Plate for DS-34Camera (Mid Size)

BS4 68-0902 60.00 Hood Mounting Plate for DS-34Camera (Mini)

BS4 68-0903 76.00 Filter Kit DS-34 Electrophoresis (#8Yellow, #15 Orange/Yellow, #58 Green)

* Note: XX will indicate hood cut out.

Hood Camera

Filters

Polaroid Camera and Spot Pickers

OneTouch Manual Spot Picker for 2D GelsThis New OneTouch Spot Picker is designed to effortlessly excise bands from 2Dgels and dispense them into microtitre plates or tubes. No more cumbersomescalpels or blades and no more gel cutting! Simply find the band you want, pressdown, and the band will be cleanly removed from the gel.

Catalog No. $ ProductBS4 72-6590 139.00 OneTouch 2D Gel Spot Picker, 1.5 mm

BS4 72-6591 139.00 OneTouch 2D Gel Spot Picker, 3.0 mm

BS4 72-6592 139.00 OneTouch 2D Gel Spot Picker, 5.0 mm

• Quick and easily remove bands from 2D gels

• Available in 3 sizes

• Permits photography of a wide range of imageswithout dark room

OneTouch Plus Spot Picker with Disposable TipsThis New OneTouch Plus Spot Picker excises bands from polyacrylamide oragarose 2D gels and dispenses them into microtitre plates or tubes in onemotion. The OneTouch Plus uses disposable tips to avoid contamination betweensamples. The unit uses specially designed thin walled, sharp tips with floating filters to eject the gel plug from the tip. Available in 1.5 mm and 3.0 mm diameters. Tips are packaged in 10 racks of 96 tips.

Catalog No. $ ProductBS4 72-6593 215.00 Onetouch Plus Spot Picker Disposable, 1.5 mm

BS4 72-6594 215.00 Onetouch Plus Spot Picker Disposable, 3.0 mm

BS4 72-6595 85.00 Tips for OneTouch Plus Band Picker, 1.5 mm

BS4 72-6596 85.00 Tips for OneTouch Plus Band Picker, 3.0 mm

• Quick and easily remove and dispense bands from gels

• Available in 2 sizes with disposable tips

PowerPicker 1D Band PickerThis PowerPicker 1D Band Picker is ideal for the removal of 1D bands from acry-lamide and agarose gels. The PowerPicker is constructed of electropassivatedsurgical grade stainless steel. The cutter is 5 mm x 1.5 mm, roughly the size of aband in a 1D gel lane.

Catalog No. $ ProductBS4 72-6597 159.00 PowerPicker 1D Gel Band Picker

• Quick and easily excise bands from1D gels

NEW

NEW

NEW


Molecular Biology

Transillumination Products

The Variable Inten-sity ElectronicTransilluminators allow users toadjust the UV intensity anywherefrom 100% all the way down to 0%during gel preparation to minimizephoto-nicking of gels, then raisethe intensity to whatever level isneeded for maximum fluores-cence. At the 100% position, theintensity on the mid-range filtersurface is over 9000 µW/ cm2.

These electronic transilluminators(U.S. Patent #5,434,478) providehigher intensity and offer consis-tent lamp stability than other unitson the market. Other featuresinclude a stainless steel top for corrosion resistance and easycleaning, extended-life 5000 hourfilter glass, and fan cooling. It isavailable in two chassis sizes with asingle filter glass ranging in size

from 15 x 15 cm to 20 x 40 cm. UV blocking shield and 115 V and 230 Vpower cords are included with every unit.

• Variable intensity adjustment

• Patented electronic ballasting

• Special 5000 hour ExtendedLife Filter resists solarization

• No start-up or line flicker;lower power requirements

• Longer tube life

• Stainless steel covers

• Interior fan drafting

• No ballast hum

• Higher output intensity

• High frequency operation

• 2 Year Limited Warranty

• 100 V, 115 V and 230 V universal power input on all units

SpecificationsDimensions, H x W x D:

Standard Size 12.7 x 47 x 38 cm (5 x 18.5 x 15 in)Mid Size 12.7 x 24 x 38 cm (5 x 9.5 x 15 in)

Variable Intensity Transilluminators

Infinite Variable Intensity UV Transilluminators*

Catalog No.

Size Filter (cm) Wavelength 115 VAC, 60 Hz $

Standard 15 x 15 300 nm BS4 68-0946 1,130.00

Standard 20 x 20 300 nm BS4 68-0948

Standard 21 x 25 300 nm BS4 68-0950 1,993.00

Standard 16 x 36 300 nm BS4 68-0952

Standard 20 x 40 300 nm BS4 68-0954 2,050.00

Standard 20 x 40 365 nm BS4 68-0956

Mid Size 15 x 15 300 nm BS4 68-0958 1,130.00

Mid Size 20 x 20 300 nm BS4 68-0960

Mid Size 21 x 25 300 nm BS4 68-0962 1,604.00

Mid Size 20 x 20 365 nm BS4 68-0964* Note: For Accessories, please refer to page N92.


Transillumination ProductsSp

ecia

lized

Too

ls F

or B

iore

sear

ch

Designed to give effective diffusedlight over entire the 20 x 40 cm(7.9 x 15.75 in) viewing surface.

The removable power plug andstainless steel work surface make theunit easy to clean and rust-resistant.

The unit measures, H x W x D, 13 x48 x 38 cm (5 x 18.75 x 15 in).

Catalog No. $ ProductBS4 68-1047 515.00 White Light Illuminator, 115 VAC, 60 Hz

BS4 68-1048 271.00 White Light Illuminator, 230 VAC, 50 Hz

BS4 68-1113 6.00 Cool White Replacement Tube, 6 W

• Ideal for viewingcoomassie blue stainedDNA gels, methylene bluestained DNA gels, silverstained protein DNA gels,autoradiographs, PAGEand microtitration plates

• Provides effective diffused light

• Polished Coilzac™ reflector

• 1 year limited warranty

White Light Illuminator

If versatility is tantamount andbench space is a premium, thisnew Electronic Multiwave™ is foryou. This unit supplies three elec-tronic transilluminators in onechassis. A simple electronic switchwill provide any of the threeinstalled wavelengths. Two side-by-side 20 x 20 cm filter surfaces pro-vide the flexibility to combine anythree of the four available wave-lengths.

The Dual-Light™ Transilluminatorsoffer two 20 x 20 cm filter surfacesand a selection of either two wave-lengths or one wavelength andwhite light. Cool white light filtersurface is designed to provide evenillumination with an average lightstrength measurement of 5000-Lux. This is correct surface andbackground lighting for coomassieblue stained protein gels, methyl-ene blue stained DNA gels, silver

stained protein gels, autoradiographies, and microtiter plates.UV blockingshield and 115 V and 230 V power cords are included with every unit.

SpecificationsModels Multiwave™ and Dual-Light™

Dimensions, H x W x D 12.7 x 47 x 38 cm (5 x 18.5 x 15 in)

• Multiwave is 3 transillum-inators in one chassis — it provides either:- 2 wavelengths andwhite light- 3 wavelengths

• Dual-Light provides either:- 2 wavelengths

- 1 wavelength and white light

• High frequency operation

• Interior fan drafting

• No ballast hum

• No line or start-up flicker

• Dual line fusing; removable cord

• Stainless steel covers

• Lower power requirements

• 2 Year Limited Warranty

• 100 V, 115 V and 230 Vuniversal power input onall units

Multiwave™ and Dual-Light™ * Transilluminators

Catalog No.

Size Filter (cm) Wavelength 115 VAC, 60 Hz $

Multiwave™ 20 x 20 365/300/White nm BS4 68-0966 1,871.00

Multiwave™ 20 x 20 365/300/254 nm BS4 68-0968

Multiwave™ 20 x 20 365/254/White nm BS4 68-0970 1,982.00

Multiwave™ 20 x 20 300/254/White nm BS4 68-0972

Dual-Light™ 20 x 20 365/White nm BS4 68-0974 1,320.00

Dual-Light™ 20 x 20 365/254 nm BS4 68-0976

Dual-Light™ 20 x 20 300/White nm BS4 68-0978 1,542.00

Dual-Light™ 20 x 20 300/254 nm BS4 68-0980

Dual-Light™ 20 x 20 254/White nm BS4 68-0982 1,542.00* Note: Optional Dual Intensity version is available, call Harvard Apparatus for details.

Multiwave™/Dual-Light™

Transilluminators


Molecular Biology

UV Products

Patented

BS4 68-1064

SpecificationsLarge Unit:

Chamber 15 x 48 x 37 cm (6 x 19 x 14.5 in)Exterior 30 x 55 x 42 cm (11.75 x 21.5 x 16.5 in)Weight 15.9 kg (35 lbs)

Small Unit:Chamber 15 x 25 x 30 cm (6 x 10 x 12 in)Exterior 27 x 32 x 34 cm (10.5 x 12.5 x 13.5 in)Weight 10.4 kg (23 lbs)

UV Crosslinker Applications

• Crosslinking of DNA/RNA to transfer membranes

• Northern and Southern dot or blot

• Nicking ethidium-bromide stained DNA in agarose gels

• Gene mapping for creating cleavage inhibiting thymine dimers

• REC-A mutation screening

• Drug screening analysis

• UV sterilization and sensitivity testing for host strain verification

• EPROM erasing

• Curing of UV sensitive inks, adhesives and polymers

• Microprocessor controlled

• Large LED display

• Cycle complete beeper

• Small bench footprint

• Door-mounted viewing window

• Fully programmable

• Touchpad membrane switch

• Photo-feedback sensor

• Two convenient sizes

• Laydown front door

• Four selectable modes:

- Auto optimal crosslink preset at 120,000 microjoules

- Adjustable energy programming from 0 to 999,900 microjoules

- Auto time preset at 5 minutes

- Adjustable time programming from 0 to 999.9 minutes

• More accurate energy measurements

• Patented electronic ballasting

• Exclusive real-time intensity monitoring function

• Increased lamp intensity for shorter crosslinking times

• Higher ballast efficiency for longer lamp life and lower power consumption

• Sliding/removable sample tray

• 100V, 115V and 230V universal power input

• 2 year Limited Warranty

Proper UV crosslinking shows enhanced transfer to DNA or RNA membrane when receiving an optimal dose of UV energy. All thesecrosslinkers are designed to optimize UV energy, while ensuringDNA/RNA membranes are consistently crosslinked. By use of an internalphoto-feedback system with the microprocessor control, researchershave control over UV energy level, exposure time and intensity.Additionally, this control system automatically adjusts to variations in UVintensity that occur as UV source ages, insuring consistent crosslinking.

Electronic Ballast UV CrosslinkersThese Crosslinkers crosslink DNA or RNA to nitrocellulose, nylon ornylon-reinforced transfer membranes. Studies show ultraviolet energycan be used as an alternative to oven baking for the crosslinkingprocess. UV energy completes the process in seconds compared tohours. These units utilize the patented electronic ballast for increasedintensity, accuracy and shorter crosslinking time. All Crosslinkersoperate at 100V, 115V or 230V in one unit via universal power supply.

BS4 68-1066

Harvard Apparatus carries an extensive line of incubators, heaters, coolers and stirredbaths and circulators. For complete details, see our General Lab Section O.

Ultra Vilolet Crosslinkers

UV Crosslinkers

Catalog No.

Ballast Size Wavelength 115 VAC, 60 Hz $

Electronic Small 254 nm BS4 68-1064 1,486.00

Electronic Large 254 nm BS4 68-1066

* Note: Special 300 nm and 365 nm wavelength versions are also available. Please contact Harvard Apparatus for further details.


UV ProductsSp

ecia

lized

Too

ls F

or B

iore

sear

ch

These UV transmitting work sur-faces offer transilluminator usersvital protection for the most sen-sitive and expensive part of theirinstrument – the filter glass.

Filter glass is necessary to blockout the visible light emitted by UV tubes, and normally lasts thousandsof hours. However, even the most careful users will nick and scratchthe glass when working with gels on its surface. Such scratches caninterfere with gel pictures and decrease the usefulness of the unit,eventually requiring expensive replacement of the filter glass.

These UV transmitting work surfaces are the ideal solution to thisproblem. Gels can be prepared and cut on the transilluminator with-out fear of scratching the glass. The economically priced work surfacecan be replaced whenever it gets too scratched for use. It comes in twosizes to fit any brand of transilluminator: standard size 34.3 x 46.4 cm(13.5 x 18.25 in) and mid-size 22.2 x 35.6 cm (8.75 x 14 in).

Catalog No. $ ProductBS4 68-1040 74.00 UV Transmitting Work Surface, Standard

BS4 68-1041 71.00 UV Transmitting Work Surface, Mid Size

These UV blocking protective eye/face wear comply with ANSI-Z87specifications for safety eye wear, OSHA Safety and Health Standardsfor General Industry and NIOSH document HSM-73-11009 criteria fora recommended standard for occupational exposure to UV radiation.

Catalog No. $ ProductBS4 68-1042 12.00 ULTRA-100 Spectacles

BS4 68-1043 14.00 ULTRA-200 Goggles

BS4 68-1044 43.00 ULTRA-300 Face Shield

This low cost, compact pocket size, transistor-ized lamp uses 4 AA batteries (not included).It has one 4 watt self-filtered long wave (365 nm) tube plus visible spot light.

A convenient carrying cord makes the pocket-size ultraviolet lamps ideal for field use in

counterfeit detection, gemology, invisible coding and marking, mineralogy,non-destructive testing, philately, rodent and insect contamination detection,security and more.

Goggles

Spectacles

Face Shield

• Low cost

• Compact size

• Ideal for field use

SpecificationsDimensions, H x W x D 3.8 x 5 x 16.5 cm (1.5 x 2 x 6.5 in)

Weight 0.2 kg (6 oz)

Catalog No. $ ProductBS4 68-1045 21.00 Pocket-Size UV Lamp, 365 nm

BS4 68-1086 11.00 UV Replacement Tube, 365 nm, 4 Watt

Ultra-Glo™

Ultra-Glo™ UV-to-visible lightconverter changes UV radiationof any wave length into visiblelight, providing an inexpensiveand easy-to-use visible lightsource for imaging visible-stained gels on a conven-tional UV transilluminator. With Ultra-Glo™, there is no need topurchase separate transillumi-nators, eliminating the extracost and bench space and theinconvenient switching of lightboxes. Simply place an Ultra-Glo™ panel on the UV surface ofa transilluminator for visiblelight imaging.

Ultra-Glo™ diffuses as it fluoresces, and actually providesbetter illumination than manywhite light illuminators.

Catalog No. $ ProductBS4 68-1036 103.00 Ultra-Glo™ Red, 30.5 x 22.25 cm (12 x 8.75 in)

BS4 68-1037 130.00 Ultra-Glo™ Red, 42 x 24 cm (16.5 x 9.5 in)

BS4 68-1038 103.00 Ultra-Glo™ Blue, 30.5 x 22.25 cm (12 x 8.75 in)

BS4 68-1039 130.00 Ultra-Glo™ Blue, 42 x 24 cm (16.5 x 9.5 in)

• Ultra-Glo™ Red is ideal formost applications includingcoomassie blue, autoradi-ograms, and colony/plaquecounting

• Ultra-Glo™ Blue providesmore suitable contrast forviewing silver stains

• Patent # 5,998,789

UV Transmitting Work Surface

Pocket-Size UV Lamp

UV Protective Wear


Molecular Biology

UV Lamps

Each of these compact portables has an internal rechargeable leadacid battery, eliminating replacements. One full charge (24 hours)gives 5 to 7 hours of operation. All are equipped with built-in charg-ers that plug into wall outlet for intermittent or continuous recharging.Engineered for easy operation, comfortable use and reliability. RuggedABS plastic shell. Ideal for use in non-destructive testing, mineralogy,security control, genetic research, field UV fluorescence analysis, artconservation, antiques, leak detection and more.

Three models are available. Each is provided with a specific tube to pro-vide a certain wavelength of light. The basic models are supplied with two6 watt tubes with a specific wavelength. Two multi-wavelength models pro-vide both short and long wavelengths. A white light version is also available.

The single wavelength models can operate with either tube individually orboth tubes simultaneously. Single tube operation extends battery life whiledual tube operation substantially increases the output intensity. Each lamputilizes a specular high UV reflectance reflector multiplying and focusingUV irradiance. Extended life UV transmitting filter resists solarization, pro-vides service for thousands of hours in short wave and mid-range models.

SpecificationsDimensions, H x W x D 14 x 8 x 27 cm (5.5 x 3 x 10.5 in)

Weight 1.4 kg (3 lbs)

UV TubesThe following list contains fluorescent type UV tubes (hot cathode dual bi-pin) that are most commonly used in laboratories today. These tubes aremanufactured to industry-wide standards and can be installed as replace-ments in most ultraviolet equipment. If you require assistance when select-ing tubes, please call Ultra-Lum for the necessary cross-reference data.

Catalog No. $ ProductBS4 68-1087 15.00 UV Replacement Tube, 365 nm, 6 W

BS4 68-1091 30.00 UV Replacement Tube, 300 nm, 6 W

BS4 68-1095 24.00 UV Replacement Tube, 254 nm, 6 W

BS4 68-1113 6.00 Cool White Replacement Tube, 6 W

Portable/Rechargeable Lamps

Catalog No.

Tubes Wavelength 115 VAC, 60 Hz $ 230 VAC, 50 Hz $

2 x 6 watt 365 nm BS4 68-1098 149.00 BS4 68-1099 140.00

2 x 6 watt 300 nm BS4 68-1100 BS4 68-1101

2 x 6 watt 254 nm BS4 68-1102 236.00 BS4 68-1103 246.00

2 x 6 watt Cool White BS4 68-1104 BS4 68-1105

1 x 6 watt/ 300 nm/ BS4 68-1106 273.00 BS4 68-1107 270.001 x 6 watt 365 nm

1 x 6 watt/ 254 nm/ BS4 68-1108 BS4 68-11091 x 6 watt 365 nm

Catalog No. $ ProductBS4 68-1072 93.00 UV Blocking Shield (Hinges from Front),

Standard Size

BS4 68-1073 70.00 UV Blocking Shield (Hinges from Front), Mid Size

BS4 68-1074 82.00 UV Blocking Cover (Hinges from Back), Standard Size

BS4 68-1075 62.00 UV Blocking Cover (Hinges from Back), Mid Size

BS4 68-1076 60.00 Fan, Cooling (115V/60Hz) for Thriftline™

BS4 68-1077 60.00 Fan, Cooling (230V/50Hz) for Thriftline™

BS4 68-1078 33.00 Dual Intensity Option for Thriftline™

BS4 68-1079 104.00 Power Boost (Electronic Models Only), Single Intensity

BS4 68-1080 104.00 Power Boost (Electronic Models Only), Variable Intensity

BS4 68-1081 73.00 UV Diffusion Screen

Transilluminator Accessories

Portable/Rechargeable Lamps

Harvard Apparatus now owns Clark Electromedical.See the Cell Biology Section M for the industrystandard capillary glass.

Replacement Tubes

Catalog No. $ Type Watts Base

UV-A Longwave 365 nm Blacklight

BS4 68-1082 F4T5BL 4 Mini

BS4 68-1083 7.00 F6T5BL 6 Mini

BS4 68-1084 F8T5BL 8 Mini

BS4 68-1085 12.00 F15T8BL 15 Med

UV-A Longwave 365 nm Blacklight (Self-Filtering)

BS4 68-1086 11.00 F4T5BLB 4 Mini

BS4 68-1087 F6T5BLB 6 Mini

BS4 68-1088 15.00 F8T5BLB 8 Mini

BS4 68-1089 F15T8BLB 15 Med

UV-B Mid-Range 300 nm Sunlight-Erythemal

BS4 68-1090 F4T5E 4 Mini

BS4 68-1091 30.00 F6T5E 6 Mini

BS4 68-1092 F8T5E 8 Mini

BS4 68-1093 39.00 F15T8E 15 Med

UV-C Shortwave 254 nm Germicidal

BS4 68-1094 21.00 G4T5 4 Mini

BS4 68-1095 G6T5 6 Mini

BS4 68-1096 21.00 G8T5 8 Mini

BS4 68-1097 G15T8 15 Med


UV LampsSp

ecia

lized

Too

ls F

or B

iore

sear

ch

These handheld lamps are powerful ultraviolet sources. A wide range of21 models in a variety of UV wavelengths and wattages is available. Eachlamp is manufactured with a silver-anodized, durable and attractive aluminum housing. Its narrow profile fits comfortably in the hand. The strap handle allows easy carrying and facilitates the use of each lamp.

Inside each lamp a specular aluminum reflector is used to optimize UVirradiance. Properly placed for fingertip control, the on/off switch is located on the end of the lamp. Standard with all short wave (254 nm)and mid-range (300 nm) ultraviolet lamps is the extended life UV transmitting filter glass, assuring higher UV intensity for thousands ofhours. These lamps are available in three UV wavelengths: 254 nm, 300nm and 365 nm. Dual-WaveTM handheld lamps are also available, as wellas special versions with solid-state ballasts for AC and battery operation.

We have a complete family of lamp stands for use with handheld UV lamps,see to the left. The unique Flex-Moun™ Stands provide unlimited versatil-ity. Cantilever mounting eliminates restrictions for positioning of materi-al/object. Lamps can be positioned in any desired angle or direction.

Catalog No. $ ProductBS4 68-1114 102.00 Flex-Mount Lamp Stand (4/6 Watt)

BS4 68-1115 109.00 Flex-Mount Lamp Stand (8 Watt)

Handheld UV Lamps

Handheld UV Lamps

Catalog No.

# 115 VAC, 230 VAC, Model Ultraviolet Wavelength Tubes Wattage Lamp Dimensions Net Wt. 60 Hz $ 50 Hz $

UVA-14 365 nm, Long Wave 1 4 7 x 2.75 x 3 in 1 lbs BS4 68-1116 79.00 BS4 68-1117 79.00

UVA-16 365 nm, Long Wave 1 6 10 x 2.75 x 3 in 2 lbs BS4 68-1118 BS4 68-1119

UVA-18 365 nm, Long Wave 1 8 13.25 x 2.75 x 3 in 2.5 lbs BS4 68-1120 108.00 BS4 68-1121 108.00

UVA-28 365 nm, Long Wave 2 2 x 8 13.25 x 2.75 x 3 in 3 lbs BS4 68-1122 BS4 68-1123

UVB-14 300 nm, Mid-Range 1 4 7 x 2.75 x 3 in 1 lbs BS4 68-1124 210.00 BS4 68-1125 148.00

UVB-16 300 nm, Mid-Range 1 6 10 x 2.75 x 3 in 2 lbs BS4 68-1126 BS4 68-1127

UVB-18 300 nm, Mid-Range 1 8 13.25 x 2.75 x 3 in 2.5 lbs BS4 68-1128 276.00 BS4 68-1129 277.00

UVB-28 300 nm, Mid-Range 2 2 x 8 13.25 x 2.75 x 3 in 3 lbs BS4 68-1130 BS4 68-1131

UVC-14 254 nm, Short Wave 1 4 7 x 2.75 x 3 in 1 lbs BS4 68-1132 194.00 BS4 68-1133 136.00

UVC-16 254 nm, Short Wave 1 6 10 x 2.75 x 3 in 2 lbs BS4 68-1134 BS4 68-1135

UVC-18 254 nm, Short Wave 1 8 13.25 x 2.75 x 3 in 2.5 lbs BS4 68-1136 262.00 BS4 68-1137 267.00

UVC-28 254 nm, Short Wave 2 2 x 8 13.25 x 2.75 x 3 in 3 lbs BS4 68-1138 BS4 68-1139

UVAC-16 365 nm/254 nm 2 2 x 6 10 x 2.75 x 3 in 2 lbs BS4 68-1140 257.00 BS4 68-1141 322.00

UVAC-18 365 nm/254 nm 2 2 x 8 13.25 x 2.75 x 3 in 2.5 lbs BS4 68-1142 BS4 68-1143

UVAB-16 365 nm/300 nm 2 2 x 6 10 x 2.75 x 3 in 2 lbs BS4 68-1144 391.00 BS4 68-1145 243.00

UVAB-18 365 nm/300 nm 2 2 x 8 13.25 x 2.75 x 3 in 2.5 lbs BS4 68-1146 BS4 68-1147

UVA-14T 365 nm, Long Wave Self-Filtering Tube Type 1 4 7 x 2.75 x 3 in 1 lbs BS4 68-1148 156.00 BS4 68-1149 79.00

UVA-16T 365 nm, Long Wave Self-Filtering Tube Type 1 6 10 x 2.75 x 3 in 2 lbs BS4 68-1150 BS4 68-1151

UVA-18T 365 nm, Long Wave Self-Filtering Tube Type 1 8 13.25 x 2.75 x 3 in 2.5 lbs BS4 68-1152 165.00 BS4 68-1153 108.00

UVA-28T 365 nm, Long Wave Self-Filtering Tube Type 2 2 x 8 13.25 x 2.75 x 3 in 3 lbs BS4 68-1154 BS4 68-1155

UVA-115T 365 nm, Long Wave Self-Filtering Tube Type 1 15 18.25 x 2.75 x 3 in 3.25 lbs BS4 68-1156 235.00 BS4 68-1157 235.00

Flex-Mount™ Lamp Stands

For UV Replacement Tubes, see page N93.


Molecular Biology

Centrifuges

Catalog. No. $ ProductBS4 68-3265 1,754.00 Spectrafuge 16M Microcentrifuge with 18 Place Rotor, 120 V,

50/60 Hz, Standard Grey

BS4 68-3266 1,754.00 Spectrafuge 16M Microcentrifuge with 18 Place Rotor, 230 V,50/60 Hz, Standard Grey

BS4 68-3267 1,754.00 Spectrafuge 16M Microcentrifuge with 18 Place Rotor, 120 V,50/60 Hz, Blue Accents

BS4 68-3268 1,754.00 Spectrafuge 16M Microcentrifuge with 18 Place Rotor, 230 V,50/60 Hz, Blue Accents

BS4 68-3269 1,754.00 Spectrafuge 16M Microcentrifuge with 18 Place Rotor, 120 V,50/60 Hz, Teal Accents

BS4 68-3270 1,754.00 Spectrafuge 16M Microcentrifuge with 18 Place Rotor, 230 V,50/60 Hz, Teal Accents

BS4 68-3271 1,754.00 Spectrafuge 16M Microcentrifuge with 18 Place Rotor, 120 V,50/60 Hz, Purple Accents

BS4 68-3272 1,754.00 Spectrafuge 16M Microcentrifuge with 18 Place Rotor, 230 V,50/60 Hz, Purple Accents

BS4 68-3273 1,754.00 Spectrafuge 16M Microcentrifuge with 18 Place Rotor, 120 V,50/60 Hz, Red Accents

BS4 68-3274 1,754.00 Spectrafuge 16M Microcentrifuge with 18 Place Rotor, 230 V,50/60 Hz, Red Accents

BS4 68-3262 43.00 Individual Adapters for 500 µl tubes (Ø 8 mm), pkg. of 6 pieces

BS4 68-3263 43.00 Individual Adapters for 250 and 400 µl tubes (Ø 6 mm), pkg. of 6 pieces


SpecificationsMaximum Speed 14,000 rpm

Maximum RCF (g-force) 16,000 x g

Acceleration Time 10 sec

Deceleration Time 9 sec

Maximum Radius for1.5/2.0 ml 7.3 cm

Timer 1 to 30 Minimum or hold

Noise Level 55 dB (A)

Dimensions, H x W x D 17.8 x 21 x 22.6 cm (7 x 8.25 x 8.9 in)

Weight 4.5 kg (10 lb)

Electrical 120 V or 230 V, 50/60Hz (*100 V, 50/60Hzavailable upon request)

*Note: 100 V units available, please call for details

Spectrafuge 16M Microcentrifuge

Labnet’s new high speed Spectrafuge™ is theculmination of many years of centrifuge designexperience combined with the latest brushlessdrive technology. In the development process,we sought out our customer’s ibs4ut and produced a microcentrifuge that met all theirrequirements. The result is a remarkably quietand cool running unit that requires a minimum of bench space. Although theSpectrafuge is a high performance, brushless microcentrifuge, it is priced below mostbrush models. See our New StripSpin™ Tube adapter for this unit.

Catalog. No. $ ProductBS4 68-3280 105.00 StripSpin Adapter for Spectrafuge

Microcentrifuges

* The PCR process is covered by patents owned by Hoffmann LaRoche, Inc.

** G-force will vary across strip, specification given is an average.

• Spin PCR* strips in the Spectrafuge™

Microcentrifuge

• Accepts 2 x 8 tube PCR* strips or 16 individual 0.2 ml tubes

• Snaps onto standard 18 place Spectrafugerotor, to left.

• Perfect for quick spins

• Maximum 14,000rpm/9,400 x g

• Rotor cover fits over adapter

• Easily removed and replaced with one hand


Maximum RCF (g-force) 9,400 x g**

Maximum Capacity Two – 8 x 0.2 ml PCR strip, 16 x 0.2 ml tubes

StripSpin 0.2 ml Strip Tube Adapter

• High Performance, Quality,and Value

• Brushless motor maintenance free

• Exceptionally small footprint

• High maximum speed(14,000 rpm/ 16,000 x g)

• Extremely quiet operation

• Unique airflow pattern -samples stay cool

• Cold room compatible

• Complete with rotor 18 x 1.5/2.0 ml

• Economically priced

• Choice of 5 accent colors

NEW NEW


CentrifugesSp

ecia

lized

Too

ls F

or B

iore

sear

ch

The speed range of the Spectrafuge 7M is perfect for a variety of applica-tions including quick spin downs, microfiltrations and small volumeblood separations. The fixed angle rotor accommodates twelve 1.5/2.0ml tubes directly or 0.5 ml tubes with the supplied adapters. Operation ofthe centrifuge is controlled by a 60 minute timer and speed selection iscontinuously variable to 10,000 rpm. A locking mechanism prevents thelid of the centrifuge from being opened while the rotor is spinning.

• Exceptional value

• Variable speed to 10,000 rpm

• Exceptionally quiet operation

• Minimal temperature rise while running

• Solid, durable construction

• Complete with 12 x 1.5/2.0 ml rotor & adapters for 0.5 ml tubes

Spectrafuge 7MMicrocentrifuge

Cat. No. $ ProductBS4 68-3260 979.00 Spectrafuge 7M Microcentrifuge with Rotor, 120 V, 50/60 Hz

BS4 68-3261 979.00 Spectrafuge 7M Microcentrifuge with Rotor, 230 V, 50/60 Hz




Labnet’s Spectrafuge MiniCentrifuges are ideal for quickspin downs and microfiltration.Each unit is supplied with a 6 x1.5/2.0 ml rotor and adaptersfor 0.5 and 0.4 ml tubes as wellas a rotor that will hold 2 x 0.2ml strip tubes, such as thoseused for thermal cycling.Maximum speed for the minicentrifuge is 6000 rpm, corre-sponding to 2000 x g in the sixplace rotor. Each unit has anon/off switch allowing the userto stop the motion of the rotorbefore opening the centrifugelid. A new lid hinge designincorporates a stainless steel pin for durability. The small footprintallows the Spectrafuge Mini Centrifuge to fit on even the most crowded bench, making it a truly personal unit.

Each Spectrafuge Mini Centrifuge comes complete with 1.5/2.0 ml micro-tube rotor, strip tube rotor and adapters for 0.5 ml and 0.4 ml tubes.



Acceleration Time 20 sec

Deceleration Time 20 sec

Maximum Radius for 1.5/2.0 ml 6.4 cm

Timer 1 to 60 Minimum or hold

Noise Level 52 dB (A)

Dimensions, H x W x D 19.3 x 21 x 22.6 cm (7.6 x 8.25 x 8.9 in)


Electrical 120 V or 230 V, 50/60 Hz

Cat. No. $ ProductBS4 68-3340 304.00 Spectrafuge Mini with Smoke Gray Lid, 115 VAC, 60 Hz

BS4 68-3341 304.00 Spectrafuge Mini with Blue Lid, 115 VAC, 60 Hz

BS4 68-3342 304.00 Spectrafuge Mini with Teal Lid, 115 VAC, 60 Hz

BS4 68-3343 304.00 Spectrafuge Mini with Purple Lid, 115 VAC, 60 Hz

BS4 68-3344 304.00 Spectrafuge Mini with Red Lid, 115 VAC, 60 Hz

BS4 68-3345 319.00 Spectrafuge Mini with Smoke Gray Lid, 220 VAC, 50 Hz

BS4 68-3346 319.00 Spectrafuge Mini with Blue Lid, 220 VAC, 50 Hz

BS4 68-3347 319.00 Spectrafuge Mini with Teal Lid, 220 VAC, 50 Hz

BS4 68-3348 319.00 Spectrafuge Mini with Purple Lid, 220 VAC, 50 Hz

BS4 68-3349 319.00 Spectrafuge Mini with Red Lid, 220 VAC, 50 Hz

BS4 68-3262 43.00 Individual Adapters for 0.5 ml tubes, pkg. of 6



BS4 68-3351 31.00 Replacement 6 x 1.5 ml Rotor

BS4 68-3352 31.00 Replacement Strip Tube Rotor*When ordering 220V units supplied with European plug ends.

SpecificationsCapacity 6 x 1.5/2.0 ml tubes or 2 x 0.2 ml strip tubes

Max speed/g-force 6000 rpm/2000 x g

Dimensions 153 x 153 x 102 mm (6 x 6 x 4.5 in)


Electrical* 120V or 220V, 50/60 Hz

• Versatile, compact, andeasy to use

• Join the miniature revolution!

• Supplied with rotors for1.5/2.0 ml tubes and 0.2 ml PCR strips

• 6000 rpm/2000 x g

• On/off switch – allowsuser to stop rotor beforeopening lid - forimproved safety

• Durable lid hinge

• Interchangeable rotors

• New hinge, with stainless steel pin is virtually indestructible

• 6 x 6 inch (153 x 153mm) footprint

• Available in five differentlid colors

• Improved lid release iseasy to work yet durable

Spectrafuge™ Mini CentrifugeNEWNEW


Molecular Biology

Centrifuges

The Z180M compact Microcentrifuge is designed for high or low speed centrifugation of microsamples. Available with an 18 or 24 place rotor, theZ180M will accept tubes from 200 µl to 2.0 ml.

Speeds from 4,000 rpm to 14,000 rpm (maximum 13,000 rpm with 24 placerotor) are easily and accurately selected with the variable control knob. The broad speed range and high g-force make the Z180M valuable for DNAapplications as well as cytological, plasma and serum applications.

• Variable Speedto 14,000 rpm

• Rapid acceleration/deceleration

• Volumes from200 µl to 2.0 ml

• Cold room compatible

• Cool running

• Economical

SpecificationsZ180M-18 Z180M-24

Angle Rotors for 1.5 ml/2.0ml (Ø 11mm) 18 x 1.5 ml, 45° 24 x 1.5 ml, 45°

Maximum Speed 14,000 rpm 13,000 rpm

Maximum RCF (g-force) for 1.5 ml/2.0 ml 16,000 x g 15,682 x g

Acceleration Time 12 sec 16 sec

Deceleration Time 13 sec 20 sec

Maximum Radius for 1.5 ml/2.0 ml 7.3 cm 8.3 cm

Timer (Minutes) 1 to 30 1 to 30

Dimensions, H x W x D:Centrifuge Only 23 x 23 x 25 cm (9 x 9 x 10 in) 23 x 23 x 25 cm (9 x 9 x 10 in)Centrifuge in Carton 42 x 42 x 42 cm 42 x 42 x 42 cm

(16.5 x 16.5 x 16.5 in) (16.5 x 16.5 x 16.5 in)

Weight 7.5 kg (16 lb) 9.2 kg (20 lb)

Catalog No. $ ProductBS4 68-3281 1,663.00 Z180M Microcentrifuge with 18 Place Rotor, 120 V, 50/60Hz

BS4 68-3282 1,663.00 Z180M Microcentrifuge with 18 Place Rotor, 230 V, 50/60Hz



BS4 68-3277 1,841.00 Z180M Microcentrifuge with Strip Tube EZ-8 Rotor, 120V, 50/60Hz

BS4 68-3278 1,841.00 Z180M Microcentrifuge with Strip Tube EZ-8 Rotor, 220V, 50/60Hz

BS4 68-3285 979.00 Rotor for Z180M, 18 x 1.5 ml, 45°

BS4 68-3286 979.00 Rotor for Z180M, 24 x 1.5 ml, 45°




Z180M Variable SpeedMicrocentrifuge

The EZ-8 Strip Tube consists of eight 1.5 ml sampletubes connected in a strip format for easy handling andmanipulation. All of the tubes are opened and closed atthe same time with the attached on-piece cap. The capseals each individual tube tightly and will not open during heating. Samples can be labeled on the cap’slarge writing surface. A workstation rack holds four striptubes, spaced for easy access when the lids are open.

For faster and easier sample processing, the EZ-8 StripTubes are compatible with 8-channel pipettes. In addition,all tasks that would normally be completed for each indi-vidual tube, such as capping and uncapping, labeling andtransferring to a centrifuge rotor, now require just one step.

EZ-8 Strip Tubes are supplied in packages of 63 strips, theequivalent to 504 individual tubes. The strips are certifiedRNnase/DNase free and can be autoclaved for sterility

Catalog No. $ ProductBS4 68-3380 779.00 EZ-8 Rotor for Z180M Variable

Speed Microcentrifuges

BS4 68-3275 25.00 EZ-8 1.5 ml Strip Tubes, pkg. of 63 strips

BS4 68-3276 11.00 Rack for EZ-8 Strip Tubes, holds 4 strips

BS4 68-3280 105.00 EZ-8 Strip Tube Adaptor, permits EZ-8 Strips to be used on 7MSpectrafuges, see page N96

• Process mini-preps and other micro-tube sampleseight times faster!

• Eight 1.5 ml tubes connected in a strip format foreasy handling

• Compatible with multichannel pipettes for faster,more efficient processing

• One piece cap seals each tube tightly and opensall tubes at one time

• Large writing surface on cap for sample identification

• EZ-8 Rotor spins four EZ-8 strips

EZ-8 Rotor and EZ-8 Strip Tubes

NEW NEW


CentrifugesSp

ecia

lized

Too

ls F

or B

iore

sear

ch

The Z200A accepts up to 12 x 15 ml conical or round bottom tubes. Adapters areavailable for tubes with smaller dimensions. For larger volumes, the Z200Aaccommodates an angle rotor for 6 x 50 ml conical and round bottom tubes.

• Variable Speed to6,000rpm

• Rapid Acceleration/Deceleration

• Volumes up to 50 ml

• Safety Lid Lock

• Cool Running

• Quiet Operation

• Economical

SpecificationsRotor for Rotor for12x15 ml, 28° 6x50 ml, 28°

Volume Maximum 12 x 15 ml 6 x 50 ml

Speed:Maximum Speed 6,000 rpm 6,000 rpmMaximum RCF (g-force) 4,185 x g 3,823 x gMinimum Speed 250 rpm 250 rpmMinimum RCF (g-force) 7 x g 7 x gMaximum Radius 10.4 cm 9.5 cmAcceleration Time 38 sec 46 secDeceleration Time 63 sec 57 secSpeed Setting Knob controlled, 250 rpm

increments Speed Display Preset and actual speed -

displayed digitally

Housing ABS plastic housing resistant against shockand chemicals

Safety Lid lock system automaticimbalance indication withsafety cut off manufacturedaccording to internationalsafety standards (IEC1010, UVV VBG 7z)

Dimension, H x W x D 26 x 28 x 37 cm (10.2 x 11.0 x 14.6 in)

Weight 15 kg (33 lb)

Power Consumption 100 W

Catalog No. $ ProductBS4 68-3289 1,594.00 Z200A Compact Laboratory Centrifuge without Rotor, 120 V,

50/60 Hz

BS4 68-3290 1,594.00 Z200A Compact Laboratory Centrifuge without Rotor, 230 V,50/60 Hz

BS4 68-3291 363.00 Angled Rotor, 12 x 15 ml, Angle of Rotor 28˚, Max. Ø: 17.5 mm,length Maximum 133 mm

BS4 68-3292 609.00 Angled Rotor,6 x 50 ml, Angle of Rotor 28˚, Max. Ø: 30 mm, length Maximum 115 mm

BS4 68-3293 23.00 Extra Shield, 15 ml for -96 Rotor

BS4 68-3294 37.00 Extra Shield, 50 ml for -96 Rotor

BS4 68-3295 74.00 Adapter, 15 ml conical in 50 ml rotor, pkg. of 4

BS4 68-3296 61.00 Adapter for 10 to 12 ml Tubes; Ø max: 17.5 mm, length Minimum:95 mm, length Maximum 115 mm, pkg. of 4

BS4 68-3297 61.00 Adapter for 5 ml Tubes (10 to 12 x 75 mm); Ø max: 13.5 mm,length Minimum: 70 mm, length Maximum 90 mm, pkg. of 4

BS4 68-3298 74.00 Adapter 5 to 7.0 ml Tubes; Ø max: 13.5 mm, length Minimum:95 mm, length Maximum 115 mm, pkg. of 4

BS4 68-3299 19.00 Cushion for 12, 13 x 75 mm Tubes in BS4 68-3298, pkg. of 12

Z200A Universal Compact Laboratory Centrifuge

Catalog No. $ ProductBS4 68-3354 274.00 Minifuge with 6 x 1.5/2.0 ml Rotor and

Adapters for 0.5 and 0.4 ml tubes, 120 VAC

BS4 68-3355 263.00 Minifuge with 6 x 1.5/2.0 ml Rotor andAdapters for 0.5 and 0.4 ml tubes, 220 VAC

BS4 68-3356 263.00 Minifuge S with 0.2 ml strip tube rotor, 120 VAC

BS4 68-3357 263.00 Minifuge S with 0.2 ml strip tube rotor, 220 VAC

BS4 68-3262 43.00 Adapters for 0.5 ml Tubes, set of 6*

BS4 68-3263 43.00 Adapters for 0.25 and 0.4 ml Tubes, set of 6*

BS4 68-3264 43.00 Adapters for 0.2 ml Cycling Tubes, set of 6*

*Note:Adapters for use only with 1.5 ml rotor.

The standard Mini-fuge accommodates6 x 1.5/2.0 ml tubesand microcentrifugefilter units directly.Adapters are sup-plied for spinning0.5 ml and 0.4 mltubes.

The new Minifuge Shas a rotor thatholds two 8 x 0.2 mlPCR strip tubes or16 individual 0.2 mltubes. It can be usedto spin samplesdown from the wallsor caps of tubes andother applicationsrequiring low g-force.

Operating the Mini-fuge is extremelysimple - just close

the clear lid to start and open to stop. Both units requirejust 12 x 12 cm of bench space, making them ideal for usein places where space is at a premium. The Minifuges aresafe for cold room use. The 220 V units are CE approved.

Minifuge Centrifuge

• Spins microtubes or PCRStriptubes

• Two models to choose from:

- Minifuge for 1.5/2.0 ml tubes

- Minifuge S for two 8 x 2.0 ml strip tubes

• Extremely small footprint

• Starts and stops in seconds

• Ideal for quick spin downs,microfiltrations and cell separations

SpecificationsMaximum Speed RCF:

Minifuge 6000 rpm/2000 x gMinifuge S 6000 rpm/1177 x g†

Capacity:Minifuge 6 x 1.5 / 2.0 ml tubesMinifuge S 2 8 x 0.2 ml strip tubes

Dimensions, H x W x D 10.2 x 12 x 12 cm (4 x 4.7 x 4.7 in)


Electrical 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz or 220 VAC, 50/60 Hz†Note: G-force with vary across strip. Specification provides is an average.

NEW NEW


Molecular Biology

Centrifuges

SpecificationsZ233M-2 Z233MK-2

Speed:Maximum Speed 14,000 rpm 14,000 rpmMaximum RCF (g-force) 18,620 x g 18,620 x gMinimum Speed 250 rpm 250rpmMaximum Radius 9.8 cm 9.6 cmAcceleration Time 43 sec 37 secDeceleration Time 42 sec 37 sec

Temperature Range n/a -10° to 40°C

Dimensions, H x W x D 26 x 28 x 37 cm 29 x 32 x 54 cm (10.25 x 11 x 14.6 in ) (11.4 x 12.6 x 21.25 in)

Weight 15 kg (33 lb) 30 kg (86 lb)

Catalog No. $ ProductBS4 68-3333 2,456.00 Z233M-2 Microcentrifuge without

Rotor, High Speed, 120 V, 50/60 Hz

BS4 68-3334 2,456.00 Z233M-2 Microcentrifuge withoutRotor, High Speed, 230 V, 50/60 Hz

BS4 68-3335 6,152.00 Refrigerated Z233MK-2Microcentrifuge without Rotor, High Speed, 120 V, 50/60 Hz6,

BS4 68-3336 6,152.00 Refrigerated Z233MK-2Microcentrifuge without Rotor, High Speed, 230 V, 50/60 Hz

BS4 68-3262 43.00 Individual Adapters for 500 µl tubes(Ø 8 mm), pkg. of 6 pieces

BS4 68-3263 43.00 Individual Adapters for 250 and 400 µltubes (Ø 6 mm), pkg. of 6 pieces

BS4 68-3264 43.00 Individual Adapters for 200 µl tubes(Ø 6 mm), pkg. of 6 pieces

BS4 68-3304 37.00 Adapting Plate for 0.5, 0.6 ml tubes, Ø 8mm

BS4 68-3305 37.00 Adapting Plate for 0.4, 0.25 ml tubes,Ø 6mm

Z233M-2 and Z233MK-2 HighPerformance MicrocentrifugeAmbient and RefrigeratedModelsThe Z233M-2 and Z233MK-2 Microcentrifugesare designed for high speed centrifugation ofmicro samples. Five different rotors are avail-able, with capacities from 18 to 64 samples.The rotors and adapters allow processing oftubes from 0.2 ml to 2.0 ml. Precise controlover a wide speed range makes the Z233 seriesvaluable for a variety of applications includingmicrofiltration, cell separations and pelleting ofnucleic acids and proteins.

Both the ambient Z233M-2 and refrigeratedZ233MK-2 feature user-friendly, microprocessor control panels for programming runparameters. Rotor speed/g-force, run time and temperature (refrigerated unit only)are set using easy to turn knobs while their values are shown on digital displays. Duringa run, the touch of a button switches display between actual and preset values.

The maintenance-free, induction drive motors are extremely quite and provide quickacceleration to a maximum speed of 14,000rpm (18,620 x g). Acceleration and deceleration rates can be set at fast, for efficient sample separation or slow, for the protection of delicate samples.

Operation of these centrifuges can be timed, from one to sixty minutes, or set for con-tinuous run. The “quick” button activates a momentary spin. The unit will run at thepreset speed and elapsed time will be displayed while the “quick” button is pressed.

• Digital temperature controland display

• Sample cooling to 4°C and below even at maximum speed

• Space saving design takesup only 12.6 x 21.25” ofbench space

• Powerful CFC-free refrigeration system

• Variable speed: 250rpm to 14,000rpm

• High RCF: up to 18,620 x g

• Brushless, induction drivemotors are maintenancefree and ultra-quiet

• Microprocessor controloffers precise speed, time,and temperature settings

• Digital display of all runparameters

• Automatic g-force conversion

• A variety of rotors availablewith capacities up to 44 x 1.5 ml and 64 x 0.5 ml

• Timed, continuous, ormomentary operation

Angled Rotors for Z233 Centrifuges

Specifications18 x 1.5/2.0 ml, 24 x 1.5/2.0 ml, 44 x 1.5/2.0 ml, 64 x 0.5 ml, 24 x 1.5 ml 45° 40° 40° 40° and 24 x 0.5 ml, 40°

Volume Maximum 36 ml 300 ml 88 ml 32 ml 48 ml

Speed:Maximum Speed 14,000 rpm 14,000 rpm 14,000 rpm 14,000 rpm 14,000 rpmMaximum RCF (g-force) 15,994 x g 18,620 x g 18,400 x g 17,960 x g 18,400 x gMaximum Radius 7.3 cm 8.5 cm 8.4 cm 8.2 cm 8.4 cmAcceleration Time Fast/Slow 9/20 sec 15/26 sec 17/25 sec 17/25 sec 17/25 secDeceleration Time Fast/Slow 11/18 sec 15/28 sec 19/34 sec 19/34 sec 19/34 sec

Minimum Temperature with Z233MK-2 Only:

At Maximum Speed -6°C -2°C 3°C 3°C 3°C

At 12,000 rpm -10°C -7°C -5°C -5°C -5°C

Catalog No. BS4 68-3302 BS4 68-3303 BS4 68-3337 BS4 68-3338 BS4 68-3339

$ 363.00 431.00 609.00 708.00 609.00

High Performance Microcentrifuges & Accessories

BS4 68-3337

BS4 68-3338 BS4 68-3339

NEW


CentrifugesSp

ecia

lized

Too

ls F

or B

iore

sear

ch

• Compact Versatility

• More than 13 rotor options

• Accommodates tubes from 0.2 mlto 100 ml

• Quiet, maintenance-free induction drive

• Automatic rotor recognition system

• Imbalance sensor with safety shut down

• Compact, space saving design

• Microprocessor control with digital display

• Corrosion resistant, stainless steelrotor chamber

• Automatic g-force calculation and display

SpecificationsMaximum Volume 400 ml (4 x 100 ml)

Maximum Speed 13,500 rpm


Timer 1 to 60 min or continuous

Brake Dynamically controlled

Temperature Range -10 to +40˚C (Z300-K only)

Dimensions, H x W x D:Z300 47.5 x 35.5 x 33 cm

(18 x 14 x 13 in)Z300-K 66 x 42 x 33.5 cm

(26.4 x 16.5 x 13.2 in)

Weight:Z300 40 kg (88 lb)Z300K 76 kg (167.2 lb)

The Z300 series includes both the ambient Z300 and refrigerated Z300 K centrifuges. Variousfixed angle and swing-out rotors are available to process a variety of different tube types from0.2 to 100 ml. These units are well suited for all standard blood collection, conical andmicrocentrifuge tubes as well as standard and deep well microplates. High speed and g-forcemake the Z300 series ideal for applications ranging from cell culture to molecular biology.

Powerful, brushless motors quickly accelerate rotors to the preset speed. Braking is dynam-ically controlled to bring the rotors to a soft stop without disrupting fragile samples.Operation of the centrifuge may be timed, continuous or momentary.

Microprocessor based control panels allow quick and easy programming. Operating param-eters are set with convenient turn knobs while their values (run time, rpm, g-force and tem-perature) are shown on large digital displays.

The rotor recognition system in the Z300 series provides safety and convenience when dif-ferent rotors are used. Each rotor is recognized at the beginning of a run and automaticallylimited to its rated maximum speed. In addition, by recognizing the rotor, the microproces-sor can accurately calculate and display g-force during a run.

Ambient air circulates throughout the chamber of the Z 300 preventing significant rises insample temperature. The powerful refrigeration system in the Z 300 K can maintain samplesat or below 4ºC, even at maximum speed.

Catalog No. $ ProductBS4 68-3317 3,072.00 Z300 Universal Centrifuge without Rotor, 120 V, 50/60 Hz

BS4 68-3318 3,072.00 Z300 Universal Centrifuge without Rotor, 230 V, 50/60 Hz



BS4 68-3328 73.00 100/80 ml Tube Inserts, pkg. of 6

BS4 68-3329 73.00 50 ml Conical Tube Inserts, pkg. of 6

BS4 68-3330 73.00 15 ml Conical Tube Inserts, pkg. of 6

BS4 68-3331 73.00 10 ml Tube Inserts, pkg. of 6

BS4 68-3332 73.00 5 ml Tube Inserts, pkg. of 6

Z300 and Z300-K Universal Laboratory Centrifuges

Swing-Out Rotors and AngleRotors, see page N101.

NEW


Molecular Biology

Centrifuges

Swing-Out Rotors for Z300/Z323 Universal Centrifuges

Specifications4 x 100 ml 4 x 50 ml 8 x 15 ml 2 x 3 Microplatew/Buckets

Volume Maximum 400 ml 300 ml 120 ml n/a

Speed:Maximum Speed 4,000 rpm 4,000 rpm 5,000 rpm 3,500 rpmMaximum RCF (g-force) 2,504 x g 2,540 x g 4,164 x g 1,500 x gMaximum Radius 14 cm 14.2 cm 14.9 cm 11 cmAcceleration Time 25 sec 19 sec 23 sec 45 secDeceleration Time 29 sec 20 sec 29 sec 29 secCatalog No. BS4 68-3321 BS4 68-3322 BS4 68-3323 BS4 68-3324$ 1,718.00 856.00 856.00 1,663.00

Specifications6 x 50 ml, 18° 12 x 15 ml, 18° 44 x 1.5/2.0 ml, 18°

Volume Maximum 300 ml 180 ml 88 ml with 2.0 ml tubes

Speed:Maximum Speed 6,000 rpm 6,000 rpm 13,500 rpmMaximum RCF (g-force) 3,863 x g 4,306 x g 17,110 x gMaximum Radius 9.6 cm 10.7 cm 8.4 cmAcceleration Time 21 sec 21 sec 34 secDeceleration Time 20 sec 37 sec 37 sec

Catalog No. BS4 68-3325 BS4 68-3326 BS4 68-3327

$ 979.00 893.00 893.00

Angle Rotors for Z300/Z323/Z400 Universal Centrifuges

Z300 Universal Centrifuge AccessoriesBS4 68-3322

BS4 68-3325

BS4 68-3326

BS4 68-3324 BS4 68-3321

NEW


CentrifugesSp

ecia

lized

Too

ls F

or B

iore

sear

ch

Both models are equipped with a user-friendly, microprocessor based control panelwhich, although it displays all parameters digitally, utilizes easy to use knobs to controlspeed, time, braking power and temperature.

The brushless induction drive guarantees smooth, quiet operation, eliminates carbondust residue and is virtually maintenance free. It also allows short acceleration anddeceleration times, pre-programmed for each rotor.

Z323Continuous airflow throughout the centrifuge chamber and housing prevents sampletemperature from rising significantly above ambient during centrifugation. Betweenruns, an independent fan assists in minimizing temperature rise. Even during extend-ed operation at maximum speed, the temperature rise of the 24 x 1.5 ml microrotoris minimal. The steel housing provides stability and safety, which are long establishedfeatures of Hermle Centrifuges.

Z323-KThe Z323-K is a high performance refrigerated model, designed to keep samples cool.In fact, every available rotor can be cooled below 0°C, even at maximum speed.

The Z323-K is equipped with a special “pre-cool” program, designed to protect tem-perature sensitive samples. Just press the “pre-cool” key and the centrifuge rapidlycools down to the selected temperature.

The refrigeration system is CFC-free. The extensive insulation and brushless motorreduce operating noise to inaudible levels.

VersatileA wide range of accessories for a variety of applications:

• Swinging bucket rotor: Accepts four hermetically sealed round buckets for100 ml or 4 x 15 ml. Maximum speed: 5,000 rpm / 3,910 x g

• Angle rotor 6 x 85 ml: Accepts 85 ml, 50 ml or smaller tubes using adapters.Maximum speed: 13,500 rpm / 20,980 x g

• 24 place angle rotor for 1.5 ml to 2.0 ml tubes. Maximum speed: 17,000rpm / 26,810 x g

RotorsBoth the Z323 and Z323-Z have a wide range of rotors and accessories.

Z323 and Z323-K High Performance Universal Centrifuges

• Two models to choose from:- Z323 – Air Cooled- Z323-K – Refrigerated

• Speed is selectable in 10 rpm & 500 rpm increments

• Time may be set from 1 to 60 mm. or “continuous”

• Time remaining to complete a run is also displayed

• Radius correction feature allows g-value calculationwith compensation for vaiying tube size andadapters

• Braking power can be adjusted to any of ten available intensity levels

• Displays actual and selected sample temperature

• Quick button for short runs with corresponding digital display of elapsed time in seconds

• Automatic “precool” program

• Automatic rotor recognition

• Program memory to store 10 complete runs

• Diagnosis of errors integrated in the software

• Imbalance cutout with indicator

• Preset temperature range -10°C to +40°C

SpecificationsCentrifuge Z323 Z323 K

Maximum Speed 17,000 rpm 17,000 rpm

Maximum RCF 26,810 x g 26,810 x g

Maximum Volume 4 x 100 (400 ml) 4 x 100 (400 ml)

6 x 85 (510 ml) 6 x 85 (510 ml)

Dimensions, H x W x D 36.8 x 39.4 x 54.6 cm 36.8 x 68.6 x 54.6 cm

(14.5 x 15.5 x 21.5 in) (14.5 x 27 x 21.5 in)

Weight 44 kg (97 lbs) 79 kg (174 lbs)

Electrical 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz or 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz or220 VAC, 50/60 Hz 220 VAC, 50/60 Hz

Catalog No. $ ProductBS4 68-3358 4,674.00 Z323 High Performance Universal

Centrifuge, 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz

BS4 68-3359 4,674.00 Z323 High Performance UniversalCentrifuge, 220 VAC, 50/60 Hz

BS4 68-3360 7,876.00 Z323K High Performance UniversalCentrifuge, 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz

BS4 68-3361 7,876.00 Z323K High Performance UniversalCentrifuge, 220 VAC, 50/60 Hz

Max. Max.Catalog No. $ Rotors Speed RCFBS4 68-3321 1,718.00 Swing out Rotor, 4 Buckets/Cvrs 5,000 rpm 3,910 x g

BS4 68-3322 856.00 Swing out Rotor, 4 x 50 ml 4,000 rpm 2,540 x g

BS4 68-3323 856.00 Swing out Rotor, 8 x 15 ml 5,000 rpm 4,164 x g

BS4 68-3324 1,663.00 Microtiter Rotor, 2 x 3 plates 3,500rpm 1,500 x g

BS4 68-3325 979.00 Angle Rotor, 6 x 50 ml 6,000 rpm 3,960 x g

BS4 68-3326 893.00 Angle Rotor, 10 x 15 ml Falcon 6,000 rpm 4,300 x g

BS4 68-3327 893.00 Angle Rotor, 44 x 2.0 ml/1.5 ml 13,500 rpm 17,110 x g

BS4 68-3365 1,125.00 Angle Rotor, 24 x 15 ml 3,500 rpm 2,000 x g

BS4 68-3366 733.00 Hematocrit Rotor, 24 capillaries 12,000 rpm 17,700 x g



BS4 68-3369 2,032.00 Angle Rotor, 8 x 30 ml 13,500rpm 19,150 x g




BS4 68-3373 1,077.00 Angle Rotor, 64 x 0.5 ml 13500rpm 16,700 x g

NEW


Molecular Biology

Centrifuges

Z400 Ambient CentrifugeThe Z400 is cooled by a continuous flow of ambient air through therotor chamber and housing. Airflow patterns are designed to preventsample temperature from rising significantly above ambient, evenduring extended runs. In addition to cooling, the ducting systemserves to keep operating noise to a minimum.

Desired speed is set in rpm using the appropriate knob on the control panel. During a run, the actual speed is displayed in rpm. Set parameters can be displayed by pressing the preset button.

Z400-K Refrigerated CentrifugeThe Z400-K features a CFC-free refrigeration system to keep temper-ature sensitive samples cool. This powerful system can maintain all

Catalog No. $ DescriptionBS4 68-3374 4,305.00 Z400 Laboratory Centrifuge, 120 VAC, 50/60Hz

BS4 68-3375 4,305.00 Z400 Laboratory Centrifuge, 220 VAC, 50/60Hz

BS4 68-3376 7,752.00 Z400-K Refrigerated Centrifuge, 120 VAC, 50/60Hz

BS4 68-3377 7,752.00 Z400-K Refrigerated Centrifuge, 220 VAC, 50/60Hz

BS4 68-3324 1,663.00 Swing-Out Rotor with 2 Carriers for Microplates,see page N101

BS4 68-3325 979.00 Angled Rotor, 6 x 50 ml, see page N101

BS4 68-3326 893.00 Angled Rotor, 12 x 15 ml, see page N101

BS4 68-3327 893.00 Angled Rotor, 44 x 1.5 ml, see page N101

BS4 68-3365 1,225.00 Angle Rotor, 24 x 15 ml, see page N102

BS4 68-3366 733.00 Hematocrit Rotor, 24 capillaries, see page N102

BS4 68-3372 770.00 Angle Rotor, 24 x 2.0 ml/1.5 ml, see page N102

BS4 68-3373 1,077.00 Angle Rotor, 64 x 0.5 ml, see page N102

BS4 68-3378 1,185.00 Swing-Out Rotor, 20 x 15 ml

BS4 68-3379 1,185.00 Swing-Out Rotor, 12 x 50 ml

BS4 68-3380 779.00 Angled Rotor, 48 Place, 24 x 0.5 ml & 24 x 1.5 ml

Z400 and Z400-K Universal Laboratory Centrifuges

• Wide speed range - from 250 rpm to 13,000 rpm

• More than 13 different rotor options

• Angle and swing-out rotors accommodate nearly every sizetube and bottle from 0.2 ml to 250 ml

• Automatic rotor recognition system limits rotors to theirrated maximum speed

• Imbalance sensor with safety shutdown

• Last run stored in memory - simply press start to repeat

• Quiet, maintenance-free induction drive

• Large, easy-to-read digital displays show all run parameters

• Electronic lid lock prevents lid from being opened whilecentrifuge is in operation


• User friendly, hybrid control panel with easy-to-use knobsand digital displays

• Quick spin button for short runs with display of elapsed time

• Powerful refrigeration system (Z400-K)

• Selectable rates of acceleration and deceleration

• G-force conversion program

SpecificationsZ400 Z400-K

Maximum Speed 13,500rpm 13,500rpm

Maximum RCF 17,310 x g 17,310 x g

Maximum Volume 2000 ml (4 x 500 ml) 2000 ml (4 x 500 ml)

Temperature Range - -10° to +40°C

Dimensions, H x W x D 37.5 x 41 x 56.5 cm 34 x 64 x 59 cm(16.1 x 14.8 x 22.2 in) (13.4 x 29.1 x 22.8 in)

Weight 55 kg (121 lbs) 79 kg (174 lbs)

Electrical 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz or 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz or220 VAC, 50/60 Hz 220 VAC, 50/60 Hz

of the Z400-K’s rotors at or below 4°C, even at rotor speeds of up to13,500rpm. The Z400-K is well insulated to minimize operating andcompressor noise.

Operating temperature can be set from -10°C to +40°C in 1°increments. During a run, the actual temperature is displayed. The set temperature can be viewed by pressing the preset button.

NEW


Radiation Protection ProductsSp

ecia

lized

Too

ls F

or B

iore

sear

ch

Introduction to Radiation Protection Products

Radioactive compounds have been used in research labo-ratories for many years and the results of this research havebenefited mankind considerably. In life science research,radioactive compounds are used in the detection ofnucleic acids and proteins as well as in many other tech-niques such as radioimmunoassay and as tracers in meta-bolic studies. The most often used isotopes which emitbeta (ß) radiation particles are: [32P] phosphorous,[35S] sulphur, [14C] carbon and [3H] tritium. While[125I] iodine, [133Xe] xenon, [57Co] cobalt, [99mTe]technetium, [123I] iodine and [67Ga] gallium, emitgamma (g) particles.

Generally, beta emissions are negatively charged particles(electrons), emitted from the nucleus of an atom.Depending on the particular atom, the energy level of thecharged particle will vary. Phosphorous is regarded ashaving a high energy level of beta radiation particles,being 10 times greater than that of tritium, and which cantravel up to seven metres in air. Phosphorous is thereforeknown as a "hard" emitter of beta radiation, while tri-tium, sulphur and carbon are regarded as "soft" emittersof beta radiation.

125I is a weak emitter of gamma radiation particles.Gamma emissions are a form of electromagnetic radia-tion similar to that of light, generated by the nucleardecay of an unstable isotope. They are much more penetrating than beta emissions and can travel very long distances in air.

Custom Built ProductsScie-Plas Limited manufacture the complete range of radiation protection products shown in this catalogue. Many styles and sizes of appara-tus are listed for use with different applications. However, if you cannot find the exact product you are looking for, it can be custom made toyour specific requirements at little extra cost. Please contact Scie-Plas for a quotation.

Beta Protection ProductsBeta emissions of 32P, 35S, 3H and 14C can be effectively blocked by using 10mm thick optical acrylic, which is now the accepted stan-dard for shielding beta emissions in biological research. The properties of this acrylic material are ideal for the construction of beta radia-tion protection products. It is easy to bend, fabricate and machine into a wide range of products. Also, being transparent, the visibility ofthe working environment is not impaired.

Gamma Protection ProductsProtection from gamma emitting isotopes, such as 125I, 133Xe, 57Co, 99mTe, 123I and 67Ga has, until recently, been achieved by leadshielding. This has its obvious disadvantages, being very heavy and non-transparent. However, a new lead containing acrylic co-polymerresin is now readily available. The lead content of the resin is 30% wt/wt and is chemically introduced into the acrylic resin as anorganolead salt. This material is transparent with a very light brown tint and it exhibits virtually all the normal chemical and physicalproperties of conventional acrylic resin. Scie-Plas Limited provide a range of products using 12mm thick lead-acrylic, which is equivalentto 0.5mm thick lead. This range of products effectively blocks gamma emissions from 125I and any gamma emitters of lesser energy. It isNOT suitable for use with more energetic isotopes of iodine. However, a 35mm thick shield is available, which is equivalent to 1.7mm thicklead, which can be used with isotopes of higher energy.

SAFETY PRECAUTION12mm thick lead-acrylic is suitable only for the protection of gamma emissions from 125I and not from other higher energetic isotopes ofiodine.Lead or lead-acrylic is not recommended for shielding beta emissions. When a beta particle collides with an atom with a high atom-ic number, such as lead, a hazardous X-ray-like emission, known as BREMSSTRHBLUNG is generated. To avoid producing significantamounts of bremsstrhblung, use only optical clear acrylic products to shield beta emissions.

BOXESare ideal for storage

of racked samples orcontaminated acces-

sories

SHIELDS15° models for sitting; 45°

model for standing.Compatible with Safety

Trays

WASTEBINSare a convenient

solution for the disposalof small

contaminated items

WASTESACKSare tailored to fit

WasteBins and allowfor easy disposal of

contents

WORK-RACKSand Rack Inserts

fit both Gammaand Beta storage

boxes

HAND GUARDSoffer hand protec-

tion when pipetting

SAFETY TRAYSprovide surface protection,

spill containment and aclearly defined work area

TIPBINSare a convenient solu-tion for the disposal of

small contaminateditems


Molecular Biology

Radiation Protection ProductsRadiation Shielding

Adjustable 0 to 15°Angle ShieldsThese shields are easily adjusted from anupright position, to having an angle of 15°,depending on the application required. Theycan also be used in either a wide or tall posi-tion. When configured in a horizontal posi-tion, it creates a convenient side shield. Thestandard 12mm thick gamma shield can beused with 125I and a thicker 35mm shieldcan be used with isotopes of higher energy.

Fixed 45˚ Angled Shields

Fixed 15˚ Angled Shields

Adjustable Angle Shield

• 10mm clear opticalacrylic or 12mm leadacrylic for unobstructedview

• Choice of angle, to suitlocation

• Most shields available in2 sizes - small and large

• Large flat base modelsfor under-bench protection

• Curved Base models arecompatible with Scie-Plas Safety Trays

Many different styles and sizes of shield are available depending on therequirements of the user. Most shields are available in two sizes, smalland large, and have either a large flat base, 300 mm deep, for under-bench protection or a curved base, 150mm deep, for use with aScie-Plas Safety Tray.

range of gamma shields

Catalog No. $ Model ProductBS4 68-0619 126.00 RPP-S015 Adjustable Angle Beta Shield

BS4 68-0620 871.00 RPP-GS015 Adjustable Angle 12 mm Thick Gamma Shield

BS4 68-0621 2,203.00 RPP-GS015T Adjustable Angle 35mm Thick Gamma Shield

SpecificationsMaterial:

Beta 10 mm acrylicGamma 12 mm lead acrylic

Dimensions (upright and horizontal):Upright 540 x 350 mm BS4 68-0619Base 350 x 540 mm

Upright 540 x 350 mm BS4 68-0620Base 350 x 540 mm

Upright 540 x 350 mm BS4 68-0621Base 350 x 540 mmHarvard Apparatus now owns Biochrom

(formerly Pharmacia Biotech (Biochrom) Ltd.). We manufacture an excellent range of highquality spectrophotometers. See page N124 for complete details.

used as a side shield



ecia

lized

Too

ls F

or B

iore

sear

ch

Fixed 15° angle shields provide clear, non-distorted vision, reducing light images andshadows, especially when the user is in asitting position. They are available in twosizes, small or large, with either a large flatbase to provide under bench protection, ora curved base, which fits conveniently over safety trays.

Hourglass Shields have identical features tothe fixed 15° Angle Shields but are cut in anhourglass shape. The curved sides providethe user with easier access to the centralarea behind the shield.

Beta/Gamma DuoShields provide the convenience of 32P and 125I protection from oneshield. It comprises 7mm lead acrylic fastened by 4 nylon pins to 10mm acrylic to form acombined shield with excellent optical properties. The problem of Bremsstrhblung gener-ation from the lead acrylic is eliminated as virtually all ß radiation is removed prior to thebeta particles (electrons) reaching the lead acrylic layer. Featuring a curved base,DuoShields are fully compatible with the range of Scie-Plas Safety Trays.

Catalog No. $ Model ProductBS4 68-0622 94.00 RPP-S15S Small Fixed 15° Angle Shield - Flat Base, Beta Small Fixed 15°

BS4 68-0623 94.00 RPP-S15SC Angle Shield - Curved Base, Beta

BS4 68-0624 762.00 RPP-GS15S Small Fixed 15° Angle Shield - Flat Base, Gamma

BS4 68-0625 762.00 RPP-GS15SC Small Fixed 15° Angle Shield - Curved Base, Gamma

BS4 68-0626 110.00 RPP-S15L Large Fixed 15° Angle Shield - Flat Base, Beta

BS4 68-0627 110.00 RPP-S15LC Large Fixed 15° Angle Shield - Curved Base, Beta

BS4 68-0628 1,003.00 RPP-GS15L Large Fixed 15° Angle Shield - Flat Base, Gamma

BS4 68-0629 1,014.00 RPP-GS15LC Large Fixed 15° Angle Shield - Curved Base, Gamma

BS4 68-0638 135.00 RPP-SH Hourglass Shield - Flat Base, Beta

BS4 68-0639 135.00 RPP-SHC Hourglass Shield - Curved Base, Beta

BS4 68-0640 1,003.00 RPP-GSH Hourglass Shield - Flat Base, Gamma

BS4 68-0641 1,003.00 RPP-GSHC Hourglass Shield - Curved Base, Gamma

BS4 68-3150 1,491.00 RPP-BGSC DuoShield - Curved Base, Beta/Gamma

Fixed 15° Angle Shields & Hourglass Shields

15° Gamma Shields Hourglass Shields



Dimensions (upright and horizontal):Upright 450 x 300 mm BS4 68-0622Base 300 x 300 mm













• 10mm clear optical acrylic or 12mmlead acrylic for unobstructed view

• Most shields available in 2 sizes - small and large

• Large flat base models for under-bench protection

• Curved Base models are compatiblewith Scie-Plas Safety Trays

DuoShield

• Suitable for use with both 32P and 125I

DuoSheild

NEW


Molecular Biology

Radiation Protection ProductsFixed Angle Shields

Fixed 45° Angle Shields Fixed 45° angle shields provide clear, non-distorted vision, reducing light images and shadows, especiallywhen the user is in a standing position. They are available in two sizes, small or large, with either a largeflat base to provide under bench protection, or a curved base, which fits conveniently over safety trays.

3-Sided Shield A 3-Sided shield, which can be used in conjunction with our range of Beta Shields, providing further allround protection.

Base PlatesThese rectangular base plates provide under bench protection and are used in conjunction with any ofour Shields. The plate is manufactured with cushioned anti-slip feet.

Catalog No. $ Model ProductBS4 68-0630 126.00 RPP-S45S Small Fixed 45° Angle Beta Shield - Flat Base, Beta

BS4 68-0631 126.00 RPP-S45SC Small Fixed 45° Angle Beta Shield - Curved Base, Beta

BS4 68-0632 1,045.00 RPP-GS45S Small Fixed 45° Angle Shield - Flat Base, Gamma

BS4 68-0633 1,045.00 RPP-GS45SC Small Fixed 45° Angle Shield - Curved Base, Gamma

BS4 68-0634 141.00 RPP-S45L Large Fixed 45° Angle Shield - Flat Base, Beta

BS4 68-0635 141.00 RPP-S45LC Large Fixed 45° Angle Shield - Curved Base, Beta

BS4 68-0636 1,132.00 RPP-GS45L Large Fixed 45° Angle Shield - Flat Base, Gamma

BS4 68-0637 1,132.00 RPP-GS45LC Large Fixed 45° Angle Shield - Curved Base, Gamma

BS4 68-0642 141.00 RPP-SB 3-Sided Shield, Beta

BS4 68-0643 108.00 RPP-BP Base Plate, Beta

BS4 68-0644 1,027.00 RPP-GBP Base Plate, Gamma

45° Gamma Shields45° shield with 3-sided shield for back protection

base plates for bench protection



Dimensions (upright and horizontal):RPP-S45S 450 x 300 mmBase 300 x 300 mm

RPP-S45SC 450 x 300 mmBase 150 x 300 mm

RPP-GS45S 450 x 300 mmBase 300 x 300 mm

RPP-GS45SC 450 x 300 mmBase 150 x 300 mm

RPP-S45L 600 x 350 mmBase 350 x 300 mm

RPP-S45LC 600 x 350 mmBase 150 x 350 mm

RPP-GS45L 600 x 350 mmBase 350 x 300 mm

RPP-GS45LC 600 x 350 mmBase 150 x 350 mm

RPP-SB 500 x 460 x 300 mmRPP-BP 450 x 406 mmRPP-GBP 450 x 406 mm



ecia

lized

Too

ls F

or B

iore

sear

ch

Beta Mini-Box with Hinged LidThe smallest box in our range. Ideal for storage when space is at a premium. Interchangeablebox inserts for either 16 x 1.5 ml or 20 x 0.5 ml Eppendorf tubes.

Midi-Boxes with Hinged LidsThe Midi-Box has a hinged lid and is designed to hold interchangeable inserts holding a double number of microcentrifuge tubes than the Mini-Box, as well as 32 x 2 ml Cryotubes.This model is available for either Beta or Gamma protection.

Box with 2 ‘Pig Pens’, Inserts and Hinged LidsThis box features two completely isolated chambers, each with their own hinged lid. Eachchamber contains a removable insert for the safe support of vials. Available for either Beta orGamma radiation protection.

Catalog No. $ Model ProductBS4 68-0647 85.00 RPP-B5 Mini-Box with Hinged Lid, Beta

BS4 68-0648 19.00 RPP-BI-16 Mini-Box Insert - 16 x 1.5 ml Eppendorf tubes

BS4 68-0649 19.00 RPP-BI-20 Mini-Box Insert - 20 x 0.5 ml Eppendorf tubes

BS4 68-0650 94.00 RPP-B6 Midi-Box with Hinged Lid, Beta

BS4 68-0651 514.00 RPP-GB6 Midi-Box with Hinged Lid, Gamma

BS4 68-0652 24.00 RPP-BI-32 Midi-Box Insert - 32 x 1.5 ml Eppendorf tubes

BS4 68-0653 24.00 RPP-BI-40 Midi-Box Insert - 40 x 0.5 ml Eppendorf tubes

BS4 68-0654 24.00 RPP-BI-8 Midi-Box Insert - 16 x 1.5 ml and 16 x 0.5 ml tubes

BS4 68-0655 24.00 RPP-BI-9 Midi-Box Insert - 32 x 2 ml Cryotubes

BS4 68-0679 178.00 RPP-BX1 2 Pig-Pen Box, Beta

BS4 68-0680 566.00 RPP-GBX1 2 Pig-Pen Box, Gamma

Note:Two Mini-Box inserts will fit into a Midi-Box.

32 x 1.5 ml EppendorfsRPP-BI-32

40 x 0.5 ml EppendorfsRPP-BI-40

16 x 1.5 ml and 16 x 0.5 mlEppendorfs RPP-BI-8

32 x 2.0 ml CryotubesRPP-BI-9

Mini-BoxMidi-Box Tip-Box

Maxi-Box

Flipper-Box

Storage Boxes

‘Pig Pen’ Box

Scie-Plas Limited manufactures a wide range of boxes and bins, for the storage of samples and waste materials. Interchangeable inserts between the boxes can holdEppendorf tubes, Centrifuge tubes, Falcon tubes, Scintillation vials, Universals andCryotubes of various sizes. A range of heavy-duty waste bags, with drawstrings for easysealing, is available to fit inside the waste bins.



Dimensions, H x W x D:RPP-B5 ext 75 x 105 x 105 mm

int 55 x 85 x 85 mm

RPP-BI-16 40 x 80 x 80 mm

RPP-BI-20 40 x 80 x 80 mm

RPP-B6 ext 80 x 185 x 105 mm60 x 165 x 85 mm

RPP-GB6 ext 84 x 189 x 109 mmint 60 x 165 x 85 mm

RPP-BI-32 40 x 160 x 80 mmRPP-BI-40 40 x 160 x 80 mmRPP-BI-8 40 x 160 x 80 mmRPP-BI-9 40 x 160 x 80 mmRPP-BX1 ext 90 x 120 x 80 mmRPP-GBX1 ext 95 x 125 x 85 mm

Mini-Box

Midi-Box


Molecular Biology

Radiation Protection Products

Maxi-Boxes with Hinged LidsThe Maxi-Box is designed to hold up to three Midi-Box inserts, as well as additionalinserts for taller types of tubes. This model is available for either Beta or Gamma radiation protection.

Storage Boxes

32 x 1.5 ml Micro /cryo tubesRPP-BI-9

3 x 50 ml Centrifuge Tubes +8 x 1.5 ml micro/tubesRPP-BI-3

2 x Amersham /DuPont-NENradiochemical containers + 8 x1.5 ml RPP-BI-4

8 x Universal containersRPP-BI-7

15 x 15 ml Centrifuge TubesRPP-BI-1

8 x 50 ml Centrifuge TubesRPP-BI-2

8 x Scintillation vialsRPP-BI-5

15 x 1 Scintillation vialinserts RPP-BI-6

• Excellent visibility of contents

• Racks compatible with Scie-Plas Beta andGamma series

• Hinged lids for complete protection



Dimensions, H x W x D:RPP-B14 ext 160 x 300 x 185 mm

int 140 x 280 x 165 mmRPP-GB14 ext 164 x 304 x 189 mm

int 140 x 280 x 165 mmRPP-BI-1 40 x 160 x 80 mmRPP-BI-2 40 x 160 x 80 mmRPP-BI-5 40 x 160 x 80 mmRPP-BI-6 40 x 160 x 80 mmRPP-BI-7 40 x 160 x 80 mm

Catalog No. $ Model ProductBS4 68-0656 170.00 RPP-B14 Maxi-Box with Hinged Lid, Beta

BS4 68-0657 1,215.00 RPP-GB14 Maxi-Box with Hinged Lid, Gamma

BS4 68-0658 24.00 RPP-BI-1 Maxi-Box Insert - 15 x 15 ml Centrifuge Tubes

BS4 68-0659 24.00 RPP-BI-2 Maxi-Box Insert - 8 x 50 ml Centrifuge Tubes

BS4 68-0660 24.00 RPP-BI-3 Maxi-Box Insert - 3 x Falcon tubes, 8 x 1.5 ml Tubes

BS4 68-0661 24.00 RPP-BI-4 Maxi-Box Insert - 2 x Amersham or Dupont/NEN Containers, 8 x 1.5 ml Tubes

BS4 68-0662 24.00 RPP-BI-5 Maxi-Box Insert - 8 x 20 ml Scintillation Vials

BS4 68-0663 24.00 RPP-BI-6 Maxi-Box Insert - 15 x 5 ml Scintillation Vials

BS4 68-0664 24.00 RPP-BI-7 Maxi-Box Insert - 8 x Universals



ecia

lized

Too

ls F

or B

iore

sear

ch

Beta Flipper-Box Flipper-Boxes accommodate up to two of the popular 4-Way Flipper™ Racks. This allows them to be used with0.5 ml, 1.5 ml, 15 ml and 50 ml centrifuge tubes, mak-ing them an extremely flexible tube handling system.

Beta Block for 4 x 1.5 ml EppendorfTubes, with Fixing ScrewsA simple acrylic block with positions for four 1.5 mlEppendorf tubes. Each tube can be individually held inposition by a nylon-threaded screw. A 15 mm thickacrylic lid can also be fixed onto the block, to provide allround protection.

Storage and Transport BlockA storage and transport block, manufactured from solid acrylic, specially machined to accept24 x 1.5 ml and 15 x 0.5 ml Eppendorf tubes.

Available for either Beta or Gamma radiation protection.

Catalog No. $ Model ProductBS4 68-3151 105.00 RPP-FB Flipper-Box, Beta

BS4 68-0645 66.00 RPP-B4 Block for 4 x 1.5 ml Eppendorf Tubes, Beta

BS4 68-0646 71.00 RPP-B4-L Cover for Block

BS4 68-0681 141.00 RPP-STB Storage and Transport Box, Beta

BS4 68-0682 534.00 RPP-GSTB Storage and Transport Box, Gamma

Storage Boxes

Beta Block

Storage and Transport Block

Beta Block Cover

• Excellent visibility ofcontents

• Accommodates two4-way Flipper racks

• Ideal for storing andworking with 0.5 ml,1.5 ml, 15 ml and 50 mltubes

• Hinged lids for complete protection



Dimensions, H x W x D:RPP-FB ext 170 x 195 x 175 mm

int 140 x 175 x 150 mmRPP-B4 50 x 35 x 140 mmRPP-STB 70 x 150 x 120 mmRPP-GSTB 70 x 150 x 120 mm


Molecular Biology


Gamma Bins in 12mm Lead Acrylic

Waste Bins

Beta and Gamma BinsScie-Plas Limited manufacture a range of bench-top binsfor storing radioactive materials. All of the bins havehinged lids and cushioned anti-slip feet. Two large size BetaStorage Bins with hinged lids feature wheels for easymanoeuvrability. Three sizes of Bins are also available forGamma Radiation protection. A range of heavy-duty plastic

bags with drawstrings is available to fit conveniently inside all of our sizes of bins, see page N114.

Catalog No. $ Model ProductBS4 68-0665 81.00 RPP-B12 Bin-12, Beta (1 L Capacity)

BS4 68-0666 110.00 RPP-B17 Bin-17, Beta (3.3 L Capacity), use Waste Bags - BS4 68-0701

BS4 68-0667 784.00 RPP-GB17 Bin-17, Gamma (3.3 L Capacity), use Waste Bags - BS4 68-0701

BS4 68-0668 158.00 RPP-B27 Bin-27, Beta (10 L Capacity), use Waste Bags - BS4 68-0702

BS4 68-0669 1,526.00 RPP-GB27 Bin-27, Gamma (10 L Capacity), use Waste Bags - BS4 68-0702




BS4 68-0673 4,322.00 RPP-GB42 Bin-42, Gamma (50 L Capacity), use Waste Bags - BS4 68-0705

For Easy Mobility Heavy Duty Plastic Bags Tailored to Internal Dimensions

• Suitable for low levelradioisotope waste

• Hinged lid

• Durable PVC hinges



Dimensions, H x W x D:1 L RPP-B12

ext 150 x 120 x 100 mmint 130 x 100 x 80 mm

3.3 L RPP-B17ext 170 x 170 x 170 mmint 150 x 150 x 150 mm

3.3 L RPP-GB17 ext 174 x 174 x 174 mmint 150 x 150 x 150 mm

10 L RPP-B27ext 270 x 220 x 220 mmint 250 x 200 x 200 mm

10 L RPP-GB27 ext 274 x 224 x 224 mmint 250 x 200 x 200 mm




50 L RPP-GB42 ext 424 x 514 x 294 mmint 400 x 490 x 270 mm

Wheels Fitted to 46 L and 76 L Models



ecia

lized

Too

ls F

or B

iore

sear

ch Beta and Gamma Tip-BoxesAvailable for either Beta or Gamma radiation protection, these boxes have a hinged lid witha central hole/slot covered by a small hinged lid. The central hole/slot reduces the exposureto radiation during pipetting procedures. Models are available for single- or multi-tip dis-posal. Convenient disposable heavy-duty plastic bags are available.

Pipette ShieldsThese specially designed pipette shields fit snugly on the pipette shaft. This protects the handduring the dispensing sequence and enables the user to dispense safely into small andnarrow neck containers. Two types of shields are manufactured which are specificallydesigned to fit either Gilson or Biohit pipettes.

Catalog No. $ Model ProductBS4 68-0676 110.00 RPP-B15SC Tip-Box-15 (2 L Capacity), Beta, use Waste Bags - RPP-BAG17

BS4 68-0677 740.00 RPP-GB15SC Tip-Box-15 (2 L Capacity), Gamma, use Waste Bags - RPP-BAG17

BS4 68-3152 119.00 RPP-15B15S CMC Multi-Tip-Box-15 (2 L Capacity), Beta, use Waste Bags - RPP-BAG17

BS4 68-3153 753.00 RPP-GB15S CMC Multi-Tip-Box-15 (2 L Capacity), Gamma, use Waste Bags -RPP-BAG17

BS4 68-0678 157.00 RPP-B32SC Tip-Box-32 (5.5 L Capacity), Beta, use Waste Bags - RPP-BAG35

BS4 68-0695 17.00 RPP-PSG20/100 Pipette Shield, Beta - P20/100, fits Gilson pipettes P20 andP100

BS4 68-0696 52.00 RPP-GPSG20/100 Pipette Shield, Gamma - P20/100, fits Gilson pipettes P20 and P100

BS4 68-0697 17.00 RPP-PSG200 Pipette Shield, Beta - P200, fits Gilson pipette P200

BS4 68-0698 52.00 RPP-GPSG200 Pipette Shield, Gamma - P200, fits Gilson pipette P200

BS4 68-0699 17.00 RPP-PSG1000 Pipette Shield, Beta - P1000, fits Gilson pipette P1000

BS4 68-0700 52.00 RPP-GPSG1000 Pipette Shield, Gamma - P1000, fits Gilson pipette P1000

BS4 68-0689 17.00 RPP-PS200 Pipette Shield, Beta - PS200, fits Biohit pipettes up to 200 µl

BS4 68-0690 52.00 RPP-GPS200 Pipette Shield, Gamma - PS200, fits Biohit pipettes up to 200 µl

BS4 68-0691 17.00 RPP-PS1000 Pipette Shield, Beta - PS1000, fits Biohit pipette 50 - 1000 µl

BS4 68-0692 52.00 RPP-GPS1000 Pipette Shield, Gamma - PS1000, fits Biohit pipette 50 - 1000 µl

BS4 68-0693 17.00 RPP-PS5000 Pipette Shield, Beta - PS5000, fits Biohit pipettes up to 1 - 5 ml

BS4 68-0694 52.00 RPP-GPS5000 Pipette Shield, Gamma - PS5000, fits Biohit pipettes up to 1 - 5 ml

Gamma PipetteShield and Box

Multi Tip Box

Tip-Boxes and Pipette Shields

Tip-Boxes

• For the disposal of used pipette tips - additional hole/cover on main lidreduces exposure

• Small and Large models

• Waste Bags available for easy removal of contents

• NEW Multi-tip Boxes feature a slot inthe lid, to allow disposal of tips from a multi-channel pipette

Pipette Sheilds

• Hand protection when pipetting

• For use with Pipetman®

• Convenient to use



Dimensions, H x W x D:2 L RPP-B15SC

ext 150 x 150 x 150 mmint 130 x 130 x 130 mm

2 L RPP-GB15SC ext 150 x 150 x 150 mmint 126 x 126 x 126 mm

5.5 L RPP-B32SCext 350 x 150 x 150 mmint 330 x 130 x 130 mm


Molecular Biology


Beta Transit BoxThis transit box combines a shield with a convenientcontained work area and storage container. The hingedlid creates a 150 angled shield when fully open. The lidcan be locked shut for safety while transporting the unitand its contents. Side handles are fitted for easy lifting,and cushioned non-slip feet prevent slipping.

Beta Carboy CoverA simple acrylic cover for the protection of carboys andlaboratory equipment. An open base allows the cover tobe placed over the container or equipment. It can also beremoved without disturbing the container. A hinged lidprovides easy access. The cover can be used in conjunc-tion with a laboratory safety tray.

Storage and Transport BlockA storage and transport block, manufactured from solid acrylic, specially machined to accept24 x 1.5 ml and 15 x 0.5 ml Eppendorf tubes. Available for either Beta or Gamma radiationprotection.

Hazard SignsA range of Radiation Hazard adhesive signs and tape.

Catalog No. $ Model ProductBS4 68-0683 229.00 RPP-BTB Transit Box, Beta

BS4 68-0684 251.00 RPP-CBC Carboy Cover, Beta

BS4 68-0681 141.00 RPP-STB Storage and Transport Block, Beta

BS4 68-0682 534.00 RPP-GSTB Storage and Transport Block, Gamma

BS4 68-0707 16.00 RPP-LAB25 Radiation Hazard Symbol Labels, 25 x 25 mm, pkg. of 25

BS4 68-0708 18.00 RPP-LAB50 Radiation Hazard Symbol Labels, 50 x 50 mm, pkg. of 25

BS4 68-0709 15.00 RPP-TAPE Radiation Hazard Tape, Roll, 25 mm x 66 m

Transport and Container Covers

Storage and Transport Block

• Combines shield with aconvenient containedwork area and storagecontainer.

• Hinged lid creates theshield when open(15°).

• When closed the lid isfastened for safetywhile transporting theunit and its contents.

• Side handles are fittedfor easy lifting.



Dimensions, H x W x D:RPP-BTB ext 95 x 315 x 400 mm

int 75 x 295 x 380 mmRPP-CBC ext 600 x 400 x 400 mm

int 590 x 380 x 380 mmRPP-STB 70 x 150 x 120 mmRPP-GSTB 70 x 150 x 120 mm



ecia

lized

Too

ls F

or B

iore

sear

ch

Cabinet

Cabinet - WorkstationThe cabinet has two large side doors to provide easy access for the user. It can also be usedas a fully enclosed workstation. The dimensions are such that a sizeable working space isprovided, and the user's vision is unobstructed whether sitting or standing. A small cut-out atthe rear of the unit enables services to be used inside the cabinet. When not in use, the doorscan be closed and the unit used to store radioactive materials.

The rear face features a convenient holder for two pipettes which helps to keep the work-surface clear, while services can be accessed through the cut-out at the base of the cabinet.The cabinet has no base in order for it to be used on removable 5mm thick acrylic base tray.A suitable laboratory safety tray, RPP-TY6854 or RPP-TW6854 can also be used. Available foreither Beta or Gamma radiation protection.

Catalog No. $ Model DescriptionBS4 68-0686 880.00 RPP-C Cabinet, Beta

BS4 68-0687 4,630.00 RPP-GC Cabinet, Gamma

BS4 68-0713 89.00 RPP-TW6854 Base Tray for Cabinet, white, 68 x 54 cm

BS4 68-0719 89.00 RPP-TY6854 Base Tray for Cabinet, yellow, 68 x 54 cm

BS4 68-0731 143.00 RPP-TL6854 Tray Liners for Cabinet, pkg. of 25, 68 x 54 cm

Gamma Cabinet - Workstation

Pipette HolderAccess for Services

Radiation Safety BagsHeavy duty, double heat sealed 500 gauge polythene bags with double string neck pull. Foruse with Scie-Plas Beta and Gamma bins which can be found on page N111.

Catalog No. $ Model DescriptionBS4 68-0701 39.00 RPP-BAG17 Bag 17, 120 x 120 x 120 mm, pkg. of 25

BS4 68-0702 52.00 RPP-BAG31 Bag 31, 290 x 210 x 210 mm, pkg. of 25







Dimensions, H x W x D:RPP-C ext 500 x 570 x 390 mm

int 490 x 550 x 370 mmRPP-GC ext 500 x 570 x 390 mm

int 490 x 550 x 370 mm

• All-round protection to operatorsand those working nearby

• Compatible with Scie-Plas SafetyTray (not included)

• Ergonomically designed

• Hinged doors


Molecular Biology


Re-usable Liner can last up to 3 months forlow running costs

rigid PVC base

Spillages are easily moppedup or retrieved

Safety Tray liners lift from theBase Tray, stretch...

....and roll up for disposal Volume of waste is clearlydrastically reduced

General PurposeBase

Safety Trays

Safety Trays and LinersUnlike disposable paper bench protectors, Scie-Plas Safety Tray Liners are re-usable. This reduces running costs and drastically reduces contaminated waste volume.

The rigid PVC base features specially designed stabilising edges and rounded corners for easycleaning. Additionally, the Liner’s non-porous surface allows valuable samples to be retrieved- something which is clearly not possible with absorbent paper protectors.

• Saves on running costs

• Contains liquid spillages

• Provides clearly defined work area

• Easily cleaned

• APET† - environmentally friendlywhen incinerated

• Suitable for most hazardousspillages

• Anti-static and non-porous

† polyethylene terephthalate

Ordering Information

Base Only APET Liners, pkg. of 25 - fits base listed in left column

Catalog No. $ Model Catalog No. $ Model Dimensions

BS4 68-0710 RPP-TW4626 BS4 68-0728 RPP-TL4626 46 x 26 cm






BS4 68-0716 RPP-TY4626 BS4 68-0728 RPP-TL4626 46 x 26 cm







BS4 68-0723 RPP-TO5434 BS4 68-0729 RPP-TL5434 54 x 34 cm





!

Radiation HazardBase

BiohazardBase


Liquid Handling ProductsSp

ecia

lized

Too

ls F

or B

iore

sear

ch

The Powerpette® Pro and Powerpette® Quicksilver offer a powerfulperformance with a powerful yet quiet motor to speed up large volume pipetting. These pipettes fit the hand comfortably with thepipette holder at an angle ideal for use within a laminar flow ormicrobiological safety cabinet.

The Powerpette®’s mode selection switch enables selection of high orlow modes both allowing variable aspirate and dispense speeds(with blow out). The gravity dispense mode is designed for use with‘To Deliver’ (TD) pipettes. The speed of suction and dispensing iscontrolled through the concave finger triggers, designed to providea comfortable and positive grip and to require the minimum of effort.

Both of these Powerpettes® are supplied with 0.45 µm and 0.2 µmhydrophobic filters, as standard, for effective protection against air-borne contamination of the unit during aspiration, and of your sam-ples during dispensing. They are each supplied with a stand that canbe used either on the bench or on the wall. In either orientation itcan house the controller with or without a pipette in place. ThePowerpette® Quicksilver has been coated with a fine chrome finish,enhancing this latest addition to the Powerpette® family. AllPowerpettes® are supplied with charger.

Powerpette® Pro & Powerpette® Quicksilver Pipette Controllers

• Fast filling – 25 ml pipette in under 3 seconds

• Rechargeable during use

• Powerful pump

• Low battery light

• Environmentally friendly nickel metal hydride battery

• Suitable for all types of pipettes 1 to 100 ml

• Unique stand suitable for bench or wall mounting

• CE marked

SpecificationsBatteries 2 x 1.2 V nickel metal hydride

Charger 75 mA/hr for 14 hrs

Overall Weight 180 g without stand/wall bracket

Filter Hydrophobic 0.45 or 0.2 µm

Case Material ASA

Nosecone Material ASA

Pipette Holder Silicone

Pipette Types Plastic or Glass 1 to 100 ml

Catalog No. $ ProductBS4 72-6647 295.00 Powerpette® Pro, 110 VAC, 60 Hz

BS4 72-6648 295.00 Powerpette® Pro, 240 VAC, 50 Hz UK Plug

BS4 72-6649 295.00 Powerpette® Pro, Other Power*

BS4 72-6650 310.00 Powerpette® Quicksilver, 110 VAC. 60 Hz

BS4 72-6651 310.00 Powerpette® Quicksilver, 240 VAC, 50 Hz UK Plug

BS4 72-6652 310.00 Powerpette® Quicksilver, Other Power*

BS4 68-0031 11.00 Replacement Filter Set, 0.45 µm, pkg. of 5

BS4 68-0039 12.00 Replacement Filter Set, 0.2 µm, pkg. of 5

BS4 68-0232 3.00 Replacement Silicone Pipette Holder, pkg. of 1

BS4 68-0040 14.00 Sterile Filter, 0.45 µm, pkg. of 1

BS4 72-6653 17.50 Spare Bench Stand for Powerpette® Pro, pkg. of 1

BS4 72-6654 17.50 Spare Bench Stand for Powerpette® Quicksilver,pkg. of 1

* Available with Euro/Japanese/Indian/Australian-NZ chargers. Please specify whenordering.

NEW


Molecular Biology

Liquid Handling Products

SpecificationsBatteries 4 x 666 mHb NiCd

Battery Service Life 2000 dispensings

Charger 9 V/200 mA, available in UK/ Euro/US/Japanese versions

Overall Weight 280 g without stand

Pipette Types Plastic or glass 1 to 25 ml

Functions:Pipetting With blowoutMultiple Dispensing Repetitive dispensing of a single selected volumeSequenced Dispensing Of varying user-programmable volumes in any sequenceContinuous User controlled, pipetting within the operating range with

blowout

The Powerpette® Digital repre-sents an entirely new concept inliquid handling with all the fea-tures of existing pipette fillers andmore.

With Powerpette® Digital, pipettefilling is under microprocessorcontrol with programmable func-tions such as multi-dispensingcontrolled via the keypad and LCDdisplay. The Powerpette® Digital

requires no calibration and can be used as a macro pipettor and a dis-penser either with disposable tips or as a pipetting aid with all types ofgraduated and ungraduated pipettes from 1 to 25 ml.

Functions• Pipetting: Pipetting with blowout

• Multiple Dispensing: Repetitive dispensing of a single selected volume

• Sequenced Dispensing: Dispensing of varying, user programmable volumes, in any sequence

• Continuous: Continuous, user controlled, pipetting within the operating range with blowout

Powerpette® Digital also allows the programming of variable aspirateand dispensing speeds for optimum precision for liquids of differentviscosities.

The Powerpette® Digital is fitted with a 0.45 µm filter and is suppliedcomplete with a charging stand, AC adaptor, two spare hydrophobic filters (one each of 0.45 µm and 0.2 µm), one nosecone/adaptor toaccommodate all 1 to 25 ml pipettes, a nosecone/adaptor to accom-modate 5 ml pipette tips, and an instruction manual.

Powerpette® Digital Pipette Controller

• New concept in liquid handling


• Multiple functions:

- Pipetting- Multiple dispensing- Sequenced dispensing- Continuous

• Requires no calibration

Programming Specifications

Pipette Range in Range in Range inSize Pipette-Mode* Dispense-Mode* Continuous-Mode

1 ml 0.1 to 1.0 ml 0.1 to 0.5 ml 0 to 1.0 ml

2 ml 0.2 to 2 ml 0.1 to 1.0 ml 0 to 2.0 ml

5 ml 0.5 to 5 ml 0.1 to 2.5 ml 0 to 5.0 ml

10 ml 1.0 to 10.0 ml 0.5 to 5.0 ml 0 to 10.0 ml

25 ml 2.0 to 25.0 ml 1.0 to 12.5 ml 0 to 25.0 ml* Increments 0.05 ml

Performance Specifications

Inaccuracy Imprecision

5 ml Sealtip*:

O-mode 0.5 ml 3.0% 2.0%

P-mode 5 ml 1.5% 0.5%

d-mode 10 x 0.5 ml 5.0% 2.5%

25 ml Pipette**:

P-mode 2 ml 3.0% 1.0%

P-mode 25 ml 0.5% 0.3%

d-mode 10 x 2.5 ml 2.0% 1.5%* Note: 5 ml performance tests are carried out with a 5 ml Sealtip.** Note: 25 ml performance tests are carried out with a Sterilin 25 ml plastic pipette. DIN12 650 compliant.

Catalog No. $ ProductBS4 68-0047 730.00 Powerpette Digital Pipette Controller, 110 VAC,

60 Hz

BS4 68-0227 730.00 Powerpette Digital Pipette Controller, 240 VAC, 50 HzUK Plug

BS4 68-0272 730.00 Powerpette Digital Pipette Controller, other power,must specify desired power/plug configuration


BS4 68-0031 11.00 Replacement Filter Set 0.45 µm, pkg. of 5


BS4 68-0040 14.00 Sterile Filter 0.45 µm, pkg. of 1

BS4 68-0149 24.00 Sealpette Tip G, Superfine, White, pkg. of 100



ecia

lized

Too

ls F

or B

iore

sear

ch

Sealpette Single Channel PipettorsVariable VolumeChoose from nine dif-ferent speciallydesigned, digital, vari-able volume pipettorsto cover the volumerange 0.1 µl to 5000µl. Volume is easilyadjusted by turningthe light but positivethumb activatedplunger mechanism.The selected volumeis clearly presentedon the digital display.

The BS4 72-6646 isdesigned for microvolume pipetting with ultra-microvolume tips, and is also suppliedwith a tip ejector collar which allows the pipettor to be used with 250 µl Sealtips.

Fixed VolumeChoose from twelve, specially designed, fixed volume pipettors which cover therange 5 µl to 5000 µl. Sealpette fixed volume pipettors are the ideal solution forlaboratories carrying out routine, repetitive pipetting that also require a highdegree of accuracy and precision.

Calibration and Quality ControlThe Sealpettes are calibrated according to the DIN12 650 recommendations. Eachpipettor has to pass a stringent quality control program of testing and calibration and issupplied with its own certificate detailing its serial number, accuracy and precision. Inthis way the excellent performance of every Sealpette is guaranteed and documented.

• Two models available:— Variable volume — Fixed volume

• Lightweight design

• Smooth plunger action

• Slimline tip ejector allowspipetting into narrowtubes

• Compatible with a widerange of tips

• Highly accurate & precise

• Easy maintenance andcalibration

• 12 month warranty

Sealpette Variable VolumeMulti-Channel Pipettors

The Sealpette Multi-Channel range fea-tures eight modelscovering the vol-ume range 0.5 µl to300 µl in 4, 8 and12 channel ver-sions. The 0.5 to 10 µl, 8 channel unit accepts ultra-microvolume tips.

The multi-channel Sealpettes have all the advantages ofthe single channel models, plus additional featuresdesigned to make pipetting into microplates easier, safer,and more accurate.

• Perfect tip sealing

• Excellent tip alignment

• Minimum pressurerequired to load tips

• Dispense head willrotate through 360° togive the user the most comfortableworking angle

• Unique staggered tip-eject bar ensures easytip ejection

• Compatible with a widerange of tips

• Easy maintenance andcalibration with tool sup-plied

• Wide range of tips andaccessories available

• 12 month warranty

Sealpette Variable Volume Multi-Channel Pipettors

Catalog No. ChannelsRange Increment

InaccuracyImprecision

BS4 68-0100 4 5 to 50 µl 0.5 µl 1.00% 0.50%$ 508.00

BS4 68-0101 4 50 to 250 µl 5.0 µl 0.70% 0.25%$

BS4 68-0102 8 0.5 to 10 µl 0.1 µl 1.50% 1.50%$ 625.00

BS4 68-0103 8 5 to 50 µl 0.5 µl 1.00% 0.50%$

BS4 68-0104 8 50 to 250 µl 5.0 µl 0.70% 0.25%$ 625.00

BS4 68-3004 8 50 to 300 µ 5.0 µl 0.70% 0.25%$

BS4 68-0105 12 0.5 to 10 µl 0.1 µl 1.50% 1.50%$ 732.00

BS4 68-0106 12 5 to 50 µl 0.5 µl 1.00% 0.50%$

BS4 68-0107 12 50 to 250 µl 5.0 µl 0.70% 0.25%$ 732.00

BS4 68-3005 12 50 to 300 µl 5.0 µl 0.70% 0.25%$

Sealpettes Single Channel Pipettor

Catalog No. $ Vol. Range Increment Inaccuracy Imprecision

Variable Volume

BS4 72-6646 0.1 to 2.5 µl 0.05 µl 2.50% 2.00%

BS4 68-0079 218.00 0.5 to 10 µl 0.1 µl 1.00% 1.00%

BS4 68-0080 2 to 20 µl 0.5 µl 0.90% 0.40%

BS4 68-0081 218.00 5 to 50 µl 0.5 µl 0.60% 0.30%

BS4 68-0082 10 to 100 µl 1.0 µl 0.80% 0.15%

BS4 68-0083 218.00 20 to 200 µl 1.0 µl 0.60% 0.15%

BS4 68-0085 100 to 1000 µl 5.0 µl 0.60% 0.20%

BS4 68-0087 218.00 1 to 5 ml 50.0 µl 0.50% 0.15%

Fixed Volume

BS4 68-0088 5 µl – 1.30% 1.20%

BS4 68-0089 155.00 10 µl – 0.80% 0.80%

BS4 68-0090 20 µl – 0.60% 0.50%

BS4 68-0091 155.00 25 µl – 0.50% 0.30%

BS4 68-0092 50 µl – 0.50% 0.30%

BS4 68-0093 155.00 100 µl – 0.50% 0.30%

BS4 68-0094 200 µl – 0.40% 0.20%

BS4 68-0095 155.00 250 µl – 0.40% 0.20%

BS4 68-0096 500 µl – 0.30% 0.20%

BS4 68-0097 155.00 1000 µl – 0.30% 0.20%

BS4 68-0098 2000 µl – 0.30% 0.15%

BS4 68-0099 155.00 5000 µl – 0.30% 0.15%


Molecular Biology


A simple yet controllable pipette filler, the newSafetypette is uniquely designed to give supe-rior pipetting control to both left or righthanded users. The lightweight Safetypette sitscomfortably in the hand enabling smoothvariable speed control in both aspirating anddispensing using 1 ml to 100 ml pipettes.Simply squeeze the silicone bulb using thethumb lever to control both the aspirate anddispense modes. A mini squeeze bulb is usedto blow out pipettes.

Catalog No. $ ProductBS4 68-0030 65.00 Safetypette Pipette

Filler with Set ofColored Cones

BS4 68-0031 11.00 Replacement Filter Set0.45 µm, pkg. of 5

BS4 68-0032 3.00 Replacement SiliconePipette Holder, pkg. of 1

• Comfortable and simple to use

• Precise pipetting control

• Robust and lightweight

• Compatible with blow-out pipettes

• Simple thumb button operation

• Autoclavable silicone pipette holder

• Supplied with integral 0.45 µm filterand colored pipette cones for safetycolor coding in white, mint, mauve,and pink

Safetypette Pipette Filler

One of the lightest pipette controllers you canbuy, the Powerpette® offers a unique combi-nation of features to give you precision fingertip control in a unique streamlined design.Offered in six colors.

Powerpettes® are fitted with a 0.45 µm filterand supplied complete with AC adaptor, twospare hydrophobic filters (one each of 0.45µm and 0.2 µm), bench stand, wall stand, andinstruction manual.

• 8 hour battery life

• 3 aspirate & dispense modes all with variable speed including gravity dispense for TD pipettes

• Supplied with 3 filters, and benchand wall stand

• Environmentally friendly nickel metal hydride battery

• Comfortable concave triggers

• Autoclavable pipette holder

• Low battery light

• Rechargeable during use

• Suitable for all types of pipettes 1 to 100 ml

• CE marked

Catalog No. $ ProductBS4 68-0031 11.00 Replacement Filter Set 0.45 µm, pkg. of 5



BS4 68-0040 14.00 Sterile Filter 0.45 µm, pkg. of 1

Powerpette Pipette Controller

Powerpette Pipette Controller

240 VAC, 50 HzColor 110 VAC, 60 Hz $ UK Plug $ Other Power* $

Grey BS4 68-0033 269.00 BS4 68-0215 269.00 BS4 68-0260 279.00

Yellow BS4 68-0034 BS4 68-0216 BS4 68-0261

Pink BS4 68-0035 269.00 BS4 68-0217 269.00 BS4 68-0262 279.00

Mauve BS4 68-0036 BS4 68-0218 BS4 68-0263

Blue/Green BS4 68-0037 269.00 BS4 68-0219 269.00 BS4 68-0264 279.00

Mint BS4 68-0038 BS4 68-0220 BS4 68-0265

* Note: Must specify desired power/plug configuration.

Safetypette Pipette Filler

Grey

Mauve

Mint

Pink

Yellow

Blue/Green

Powerpette® Pipette Controller



ecia

lized

Too

ls F

or B

iore

sear

ch

Digitrate Digital BuretteThe Digitrate digital burette andelectronic dispenser deliversaccurate, precise and convenientbottle top titration. Designedwith many new features, theDigitrate allows you even greaterflexibility.

Sterile DispensingThe entire liquid pathway may beautoclaved and a biological filterfitted (BS4 68-0040) as shownabove. This setup will providesterile dispensing.

The Digitrate Digital Burettes aresupplied with 33, 38, and 45 mmadapters. Reservoirs must bepurchased separately, see below.

Digitrate Digital Burette and Safety Reservoirs

Amber Squat Safety ReservoirsThese safe, anti-tip, amber colored reservoirs are usedwith both the Digitrate Digital Burette, see above, and theZippette bottle-top dispensers, see photograph on the nextpage. Available in 2 sizes.

Catalog No. $ ProductBS4 68-0051 53.00 Amber Squat Safety Reservoir with

Side Filler Neck, 1.4 l

BS4 68-0052 90.00 Amber Squat Safety Reservoir withSide Filler Neck, 2.5 l

SterileDispensing

Amber SquatSafety Reservoir

Catalog No. $ ProductBS4 68-0049 707.00 Digitrate Digital Burette, 30 ml Capacity

BS4 68-0050 707.00 Digitrate Digital Burette, 50 ml Capacity

BS4 68-0051 53.00 Amber Squat Reservoir with Side Filler Neck, 1.4 l

BS4 68-0052 90.00 Amber Squat Reservoir with Side Filler Neck, 2.5 l

• Accuracy with Digital Control

• Accuracy ≤ 0.2%, Precision ≤ 0.1%,Resolution 0.01 ml

• Chemically resistant and autoclavable liquid pathway

• Continuous display of volume dispensedwith zero reset feature for multiple titrations

• Simple user calibration and factory reset

• Visible borosilicate glass barrel allowsinspection of liquid before dispensing

• Dispense nozzle protection sleeve

• Head rotates 360°

• Precision valve mechanism ensureseasy priming and minimum waste withno leakage back into the reservoir – theDigitrate stays fully primed all day

• Lifetime battery for > 60,000 titrationswith ‘auto-off’

• Safe anti-tip amber glass reservoirs withside filler neck available

• Manufactured to ISO 9002

• CE marked

BS4 68-0049Digitrate Digital Burette and Electronic Dispenser


Molecular Biology


The Safety Zippette is the new model of per-formance and convenience. Designed withmany new features - the Zippette now bringsyou closer than ever to totally trouble freesafe dispensing.

Volume AdjustmentEach Zippette is fitted with a NEW twist andlock device that permits volume adjustment.The volume setting is visible by both left- andright-handed users.

Sterile DispensingA biological filter can be fitted (BS4 68-0040), as shown on the previous page, forsterile dispensing. The Zippete Bottle-TopDispensers are supplied with 33, 38, and 45mm adaptors. Reservoirs must be purchasedseparately. See page N120.

Catalog No. $ ProductBS4 68-0053 283.00 Zippette Bottle Top Dispenser, 2.5 ml Capacity, 0.05 ml Increments

BS4 68-0054 283.00 Zippette Bottle Top Dispenser, 5.0 ml Capacity, 0.1 ml Increments

BS4 68-0055 294.00 Zippette Bottle Top Dispenser, 10 ml Capacity, 0.2 ml Increments



BS4 68-0051 53.00 Amber Squat Safety Reservoir with Side Filler Neck, 1.4 l

BS4 68-0052 90.00 Amber Squat Safety Reservoir with Side Filler Neck, 2.5 l



BS4 68-0040 14.00 Spare 0.45 µm Sterile Filter, pkg. of 1

The MicroZippette isa spring loaded, self-priming, hand helddispenser. It is idealfor rapid multi-dis-pensing of reagentsas an alternative tomicropipettors. Eachunit has two capaci-ties which are easilyfixed by a simple

twist of the plunger. Four models available 100/250 µl,500/750 µl, 500/1000 µl, and 1000/2000 µl. EachMicroZipette is supplied complete with dispense tube,intake tube, and plastic coated safety bottle.

Catalog No. $ ProductBS4 68-0075 331.00 MicroZippette 100 and 250 µl

BS4 68-0076 331.00 MicroZippette 500 and 750 µl



BS4 68-0056Zippette Bottle-TopDispenser

Zippette Bottle TopDispenser Volume Adjustment

BS4 68-0075MicroZippetteDispenser

Zippette Bottle-Top Dispenser

• Unbeatable accuracy andprecision

• Chemically resistant liquidpathway allows a widerange of liquids to besafely dispensed

• Precision 0.1% cv, accura-cy < 0.3%, DIN 12 650,and DIN 8655-3 compliant

• Removable, smoothaction PTFE piston foreasy cleaning

• Visible borosilicate glassbarrel allows inspection ofliquid before dispensing

• Dispense nozzle protection sleeve

• Fully autoclavable

• Available in five fullyadjustable sizes 2.5 ml, 5 ml, 10 ml, 30 ml, and 50 ml

• Safe anti-tip amber glassreservoir with side fillerneck available

MicroZippette Dispenser

• Positive lock volumeadjustment

• Precise and accurate

• May be convenientlystored in a refrigerator

• Chemically resistant liquid pathway

• Fully autoclavable


Flow Cytometry of Large Objects (40-1,500 µl)Sp

ecia

lized

Too

ls F

or B

iore

sear

ch

COPAS™NEW

COPAS™ InstrumentsSystems for the automated analysis and sorting of viable model organisms, large cells & cell clusters, and other particles sized from 40 to 1500 microns.

Union Biometrica, Inc., a wholly owned subsidiary of Harvard Bioscience is the pioneer in the development and manufacture of high throughput capital equipment for screening “large” parti-cles, combinatorial chemistry beads, small seeds, and for small multicellular organisms including C. elegans, Drosophila, and zebrafish.

COPAS™ Technology OverviewAn alternative to manual sorting (under a microscope),Union Biometrica’s COPAS systems rapidly sort and dispense objects based on size and fluorescence parameters. Once analyzed, objects are sorted accordingto user selectable criteria, and then may be dispensedinto stationary bulk receptacles or multi-well microtiterplates for high throughput screening. COPAS instrumentshave been proven to analyze and sort large objects witha higher speed and precision than present manual techniques. Automating this process offers increasedspeed, sensitivity, quantification, and repeatability ofexperiments as well as permitting new experiments to beperformed that previously could not be considered.

The COPAS platform was initially developed to replacemanual sorting of the multicellular model organism, C.elegans (nematodes). As needs have been identified,Union Biometrica has expanded the COPAS instrumentline to accommodate larger organisms includingDrosophila (fruit fly), D. rerio (zebrafish) embryos andArabidopsis seeds, as well as particles such as combinatorial chemistry beads used in compoundlibraries. The COPAS platform handles objects rangingfrom 40 - 1,500 microns with five (5) different models,each featuring a specially engineered fluidic path andflow cell optimized for a subset of the range.

For more information on Union Biometricaproducts, please contact us at:

Tel 617-591-1211

Fax 617-591-8388


Web www.unionbio.com

The COPAS™ Flow Sorting Principle


Molecular Biology

Flow Cytometry of Large Objects (40-1,500 µl)

• Custom designed flow cytometer for the analysis, sorting, anddispensing of large particles including viable small modelorganisms such as C. elegans, Drosophila melanagaster,Danio rerio, small seeds, and combinatorial chemistry beads.

• Large-bore fluidics and flow cell design permits handling ofobjects from 40 – 1,500 microns

• Gentle pneumatic sorting mechanism does not harm/ changeobjects to permit collection of live organisms or sensitivechemistries.

• Multiple excitation wavelengths and simultaneous fluorescence measurements – up to 3 colors

• Selectable excitation filters for defined fluorescence detection applications

• Sample collection in microtiter plates (24, 96, or 384 wells) or bulk sample container

• Systems and reagents optimized for biological and drug discovery research

COPAS™

COPAS™ System Platforms:All COPAS™ systems are provided with an IBM compatible PC pre-loadedwith COPAS™ software to provide a dedicated workstation and user-friendly interface for viewing data and changing experiment settings. Inaddition an external multi-line argon laser and consumables accessorypack. Each System features a comprehensive one-year warranty

COPAS™ BIOSORTOptimized for analysis, sorting, and dispensing of all stages of C. ele-gans. Capable of processing up to 200,000 organisms per hour.

Catalog No. $ ProductBS4 350-5000-000 call COPAS™ BIOSORT

COPAS™ SELECTOptimized for analysis, sorting, and dispensing of fruit fly(Drosophila) embryos and larvae to 1st instar, as well as all stages ofnematodes to provide an ideal solution for multiple laboratory use.

Catalog No. $ ProductBS4 335-5000-000 call COPAS™ SELECT

BS4 300-5018-000 call X-Y Stage

COPAS™ EMBRYO EXPRESSSpecifically designed to provide a lower cost system for bulk sortingof Drosophila embryos. One-fluorescence channel plus auto-fluo-rescence correction. Ideal for bulk rare events screening, and pop-ulation enrichment applications.

Catalog No. $ ProductBS4 400-5000-000 call COPAS™ EMBRYO EXPRESS

COPAS™ PLUSDesigned and optimized for analysis, sorting, dispensing of Drosophilaembryos and larvae to 2nd instar, as well as large particles such asArabidopsis seeds for agroscience research and combinatorial chem-istry beads for pharmaceutical compound library screening. Fill one96-well plate with 1 event per well in less than 2 minutes!

Catalog No. $ ProductBS4 360-5000-000 call COPAS™ PLUS

COPAS™ XLThe largest flow cell and fluidics available, optimized for analysis,sorting, dispensing of zebrafish (D. rerio) eggs and embryos, as wellas Drosophila larvae to 3rd instar.

Catalog No. $ ProductBS4 370-5000-000 call COPAS™ XL

ACCESSORY MODULESSeveral accessory modules are available to extend your COPAS™

system capabilities and further throughput including:

ReFLx integrated sample injection system performs follow up analy-sis of events previously analyzed and dispensed into a 96-well platefor screening stable integrants or assaying the effects of differentdrug candidates on individual organisms. ReFLx gently agitates andaspirates sample into flow cell for re-analysis and, based on setparameters, will re-dispense targets into plates.

Profiler provides enhanced sorting sensitivity using positional infor-mation of fluorescence peaks along the axial length of an object.Even weak regions of localized fluorescence can be distinguishedfrom auto-fluorescence and individual signals within an animal canbe distinguished and compared with each other, monitoring changesin intensity.

The Zymark Twister Robot may also be integrated to offer automatedplate handling. System includes 5 towers (4 effective) of 20 platesor 80-plate capacity.

COPAS™ software permits custom selection of sort windows for dispensing into 24, 96, or 384-well plates and enables user to sortcriteria on a per individual well basis including number of objects,sorting and dispensing gating parameters, and filling pattern.

Catalog No. $ ProductBS4 34x-5000-000 call ReFLx Sampler (platform specific)

BS4 38x-5000-000 call Profiler (platform specific)

BS4 300-7000-000 call Air Compressor, 120 or 240 V (required forall platforms when house air is unavailable)

COPAS™ Consumables for all Platforms

Catalog No. $ ProductBS4 300-5072-000 call COPAS™ Cleaning Reagent

BS4 300-5070-000 call COPAS™ GP Sheath, 20L (General Purpose)

BS4 335-5070-000 call COPAS™ ESS Sheath, 20L (Drosophila Embryos only)

BS4 335-5075-000 call COPAS™ ESS Solution, 1L (Use with BS4 335-5070-000)

BS4 370-5070-000 call COPAS™ Z Sheath, 20L (D. rerio Embryos only)

BS4 310-5071-000 call GP Control Particles, 42 microns

BS4 335-5071-000 call ESS Control Particles, 42 microns (Use with BS4335-5070-000)

BS4 370-5071-000 call Z Control Particles, 500 microns

For COPAS™ information and pricing, please callUnion Biometrica at 617-591-1211 or email us at

[email protected]


Spec

ializ

ed T

ools

For

Bio

rese

arch

Biochrom

History and backgroundBiochrom, located on the prestigious Cambridge SciencePark and originally known as LKB Biochrom, develops,manufactures and markets UV/Visible spectrophotome-ters, microtitre plate readers, washers, liquid dispensersand amino acid analysers.

Providing innovative tools for science and industryAmino Acid AnalysersA ninhydrin based ion exchange liquid chromatographysystem providing rapid, specific, amino acid analysis for the pharmaceutical, proteomics, food and feedstuffs industries.

UV/Visible SpectrophotometersBiochrom manufactures an extensive range of attractiveUV/Visible products for the life sciences market. Amongstother technological advances, these instruments featurePTR (Press to Read) capability, which dramaticallyextends the lifetime of the source lamps. Performanceand reliability is outstanding and an extensive range of accessories and applications expertise supports the products.

Microtitre Plate Readings and WashersIn UV/Visible analyses, the trend continues for samplenumbers to increase whilst sample volumes becomesmaller and smaller. This is where microtitre plate reading technology come into its own and Biochrom cannow offer an excellent range of fast, versatile and reliable plate readers with robot friendly designs. In addition, a range of washers is available, with aunique manifold design for minimised residual volumesand digitally controlled aspiration and dispensingpumps for high accuracy and low noise performance.

Liquid DispensersAs sample numbers increase and sample volumesdecrease, there is a growing requirement for the accurateand reproducible dispensing of low volumes of liquids.Biochrom's liquid dispensers meet these need ideally, withunits for two or six, any well format, microtitre platesand the ability to deliver volumes of liquid down to onemicrolitre using a non-contact delivery technique, thereby eliminating cross contamination.

If you want to know more about us, or our products, please get in touch . . . .

Biochrom22 Cambridge Science Park,Cambridge, CB4 0FJ, United Kingdom

Tel +44 (0)1223 423723Fax +44 (0)1223 420164Email [email protected] www.biochrom.co.uk

Spectrophotometers


Molecular Biology

MicroPlate ProductsEXPERT 384 Microplate Reader

• Digital light control system

• Extra long-time stability

• Self check and self-calibration before each meas-urement

• No re-adjustment during lifetime

• Digital technology reduces component count andincreases MTBF (Mean Time Between Failures)

• Robotic friendly design - low profile, self-center-ing plate carrier and front loading guarantee easyautomation

• Positive filter detection - incorrect inserted filtersare detected immediately to prevent false results

• Lamp prefailure warning - no more unexpectedstops during important test series

• Integral shaking

• Programmable measurement positions - optimumadaptation for different plate dimensions

• Light-tight reading chamber - avoids influence ofextraneous light

• Small footprint - saves valuable lab bench space

SpecificationsPlate Formats:

Model EXPERT 384 384-well platesModel EXPERT 384U 96-well plates; 48 and 24-well on request

Measurement Range 0.000 to 4.000 OD

Wavelength Range 400 to 800 nm

Accuracy ±1% and 0.005OD at 1.5 OD

Precision ±0.5 % and ±0.005 OD at 1.5 OD

Reading Speed 5 sec for any plate format

Interference Filters 405, 450, 492 and 620 nm up to six filterspossible

Light Source Halogen lamp, expected life-time 10 millionreadings

Measurement System 16-channel optical system with self calibra-tion and digital light control

External Computer Interface RS-232 bidirectional

Software Several software packages are available

Weight 10 kg (22 lbs)

Dimensions, H x W x D 17 x 23 x 40 cm (6.7 x 9.1 x 15.7 in)

Power 90-240 VAC, 50/60 Hz

Catalog No. $ ProductBS4 68-3420 Call EXPERT 384 Plate Reader, 90-240

VAC, 50/60 Hz, for 384-well plates

BS4 68-3421 Call EXPERT 384U Plate Reader, 90-240VAC, 50/60 Hz, for 96-well plates

The EXPERT 384 microplate reader is the latest extension of our reader family.The specially designed 16-channel optical system and enhanced electronicsmake the EXPERT 384 the fasted high-density plate reader. An improved high-speed communication protocol enables the rapid data transfer to the controllingcomputer. Additional handshake signals are allowing easy synchronization withrobotic systems.

Two models are available. The EXPERT 384 Plate Reader works with 384-wellplates while the EXPERT 384U Plate Reader works with 96-well plates. Both unitsare supplied with 4 filters, DigiCom software, power cord, RS-232 cable andoperators manual.

NEW


MicroPlate ProductsSp

ecia

lized

Too

ls F

or B

iore

sear

ch

Inca Personal Microplate Incubator

• Variable temperature control as standard

• Temperature or elapsed time display

• Built-in timer with buzzer

• Minimum evaporative loses with uncovered plates

• Accommodates all plate types

• Easy microplate location

• Quiet and reliable

• Minimal footprint

• No maintenance required

• Low voltage for added safety

• Ideal for field applications

For reliable, accurate and long–life operation. Whether a laboratorytechnician or a diagnostic kit manufacturer the Inca is the naturalchoice for single microplate.

Laboratory bench space is costly. However, with a footprint of just120 x 180 mm, Inca offers the most economical and advanced technical solution.

The use of unique design and advanced electronic temperature control circuitry guarantees an outstanding stable and accurate performance combined with quiet and long operating life.

SpecificationsTemperature Range 5˚C above ambient to 45˚C

Accuracy > ±0.5˚C of set temperature

Dimensions, Main Unit, H x W x D 100 x 120 x 180 mm (3.9 x 4.7 x 7.1 in)

Weight 920 g (32.5 oz), complete system

Heater Power 15 W

Operating Voltage 100 to 230 VAC, 50/60 Hz

Power Consumption 1.25 A

Power Supply 12 V 2 A DC, center +

EnvironmentalOperating Temperature 10˚C to 40˚CStorage Temperature 4˚C to 40˚C

Fuse Rating 1.25 A T

Display 3 Digit LCD temperature display

Case Material ABS

Catalog No. $ ProductBS4 68-3018 669.00 Inca Personal Microplate Incubator


Molecular Biology

MicroPlate Products

VacuBoy is an ergonomically designed handpiece that allowsyou to control the fluids from an In-House vacuum system.The pressure sensitive green button at the top of this hand-piece responds to your finger pressure and lets you removesupernatants safely without disrupting your cells and causingaccidental cell loss. Additional vacuum control can beachieved by adjusting the screw setting at the base of thehandpiece. This action sets the residual suction level thatoperates when not using the green button. This feature alsoallows you to speed up the aspiration process when dealingwith large volumes of supernatant found in T-flasks or rollerbottles. VacuBoy has been preset at a low setting whichinsures you will never have waste liquids dripping from yourcollection tips!

VacuBoy can be purchased separately or in conjunction witha wide variety of aspiration attachments to facilitate access-ing your culture plates or vessels.

Catalog No. $ ProductBS4 72-6613 179.00 VacuBoy Handpiece (H), includes

Silicone Grease and Rubber Adapterfor Pasteur Pipettes

BS4 72-6607 329.00 VacuBoy Handpiece Set, includesHandpiece (H), Adaptors A, B and E (1 each), Silicone Grease, RubberAdapter for Pasteur pipettes, SiliconTubing and Swiss Army Knife

BS4 72-6608 12.00 Wall Mount Stand for VacuBoyHandpiece

BS4 72-6609 58.00 Bench Stand for VacuBoy Handpiece

BS4 72-6612 19.00 Single-Channel Plastic Adapter forPipette Tips (A)

BS4 72-6610 14.00 Single-Channel Stainless SteelAdaptor, 40 mm, Flame-sterilizable (B)

BS4 72-6615 19.00 Single-Channel Stainless Steel Adaptor,150 mm, Flame-sterilizable (C)

BS4 72-6617 48.00 Single-Channel Stainless Steel Adaptor,280 mm, Flame-sterilizable (D)

BS4 72-6611 63.00 8-Channel Stainless Steel Adaptor,Flame-sterilizable (E)

BS4 72-6616 72.00 4-Channel Stainless Steel Adaptor, 40 mm, Flame-sterilizable (F)

BS4 72-6614 101.00 8-Channel Plastic Adaptor forDisposable Tips, with Ejection Device (G)

BS4 72-6622 113.00 Disposable Tips for 8-Channel Plastic Adaptor

VacuSafe Safety Aspiration System

SpecificationsVacuum Digital settings 200 to 700

mbar/800 to 300 mbar absolute.Hysteresis: 60 to 400 mbar

Pressure Digital settings 50 to 20 mbar rela-tive/1050 to 1200 mbar absolute.Hysteresis: 30 to 200 mbar

Flow rate 13 L/min air at atmospheric pres-sure

Tubing 5 mm internal ID, 10 mm externalID, silicone rubber, 50 shore A,transparent

Filter 60 mm internal ID, 0.45 µm,hydrophobic, polypropylene hous-ing, non-sterile, sterile replacementon request

Power 110/120 V and 220 to 240 V (selectable), 50/60 Hz (single phase), 65 W

Fuse 220 to 240 V = 0.65 A, rapid, 100to 120 V = 1.25 A, rapid

Input Socket for foot switch

Dimensions,H x W x D 196 x 170 x 231 mm

(7.72 x 6.69 x 9.09 in),without bottle

Weight 5.0 kg (11.0 lb)

Noise Level < 70 dB (A)

Operating Temp. Range 5°C to 40°C

• Ideal for safely handling hazardouswaste

• Digitally-controlled

• No external vacuum needed

• Autoclavable collection bottle and tubing

VacuBoy Aspiration Handpiece and Adaptors

• For use with an In-Housevacuum system

• Ergonomicallydesigned

• Choose amonga variety ofattachments

NEW NEW

VacuSafe is a self contained aspiration/dispens-ing system for use in laboratories working withhazardous cells, bacteria or biological fluids.This system has been designed to prevent anyaccidental contamination of the laboratorywhen aspirating cell cultures, bacteria or bio-logical fluids. The system is ideal for use undera laminar flow hood and maintains waste

integrity within a close environment until the hazardous material, in a shatter proofsafety bottle, can be autoclaved.

VacuSafe’s high performance pump eliminates the need for external vacuum sourcesas well as contamination of in-house vacuum. The compact, digitally controlled systemallows you to select the proper amount of vacuum to be applied to your supernatants.No more “one size fits all” vacuum!

Additional safety features include an overfill sensor that automatically shuts off thepump before overfilling, safe coat bottle with autoclavable silicon tubing and self clos-ing connectors to prevent any aerosoling of waste. VacuSafe is available as a completesystem, or as separate components for use with an in-house vacuum (see VacuBoyAspiration Handpiece and Adaptors).

Catalog No. $ ProductBS4 72-6604 1,599.00 VacuSafe Eco-Compact Aspiration System, includes 3 L

Safety Bottle

BS4 72-6605 1,795.00 VacuSafe Plus Aspiration System, includes BS4 72-6604 VacuSafeEco-Compact and BS4 72-6613 VacuBoy Handpiece (H)

BS4 72-6606 1,995.00 VacuSafe Complete Aspiration System, includes BS4 72-6604VacuSafe Eco-Compact and BS4 72-6607 VacuBoy Handpiece (H) Set

BS4 72-6609 58.00 Bench Stand for VacuBoy Handpiece

BS4 72-6620 95.00 VacuSafe Bottle Set, includes VacuSafe Bottle and Cap

BS4 72-6618 207.00 VacuSafe Bottle (no cap)

BS4 72-6619 155.00 Cap for VacuSafe Bottle

BS4 72-6621 52.00 Footswitch and Connecting Cable


Spec

ializ

ed T

ools

For

Bio

rese

arch

Microplate Products

The FlexiSpense is the answer toan increasing demand for anautomated and affordable dis-penser for microplate-formatapplications.

The FlexiSpense can fillmicroplates tubes up to heightof 78 mm with the single-tip ver-sion. In addition, customizedtube racks are available for anytube diameter. Nearly any knownmicroplate format including the384-well plates can be used.

High accuracy and precision,low dead volume and easy pro-gramming makes theFlexiSpense the ideal solutionfor all dispensing applications.The 8-channel manifold version allows rapid and precise filling of96-well and 384-well plates including deep-well versions. Theproven piston pump guaranties unmatched accuracy without recali-bration over years.

FlexiSpense 6 Auto Dispenser

• The flexible dispenser forany plate format

• Pre-programmed plate lay-outs - most formats from24 well to 384 well platesare already defined

• Wide volume range - fromadding stop solution to fill-ing pre-dilution tubes

• Low dead volume andpump-back capability - saveexpensive reagents

• Long life piston pump -high precision over lifetime

• Flexible dispensing pat-terns - start/top positionand order of dispensingcan be programmed

• Easy operation and pro-gramming - user dialog infour languages

• Completely inert liquid path- only PTFE and ceramic incontact with liquid

• High dispensing speedwith optional 8-channelmanifold - requires lessthan 14 seconds for a 96-well plate and 18 secondsfor a 384-well plate

SpecificationsVolume Range 25 µl to 10 ml - single tip version 5 µl to 5 ml - 8-channel

manifold version other volume ranges on request

Volume Increments 25 µl for single-tip version 10 µl for 8-channel version other volume increments from 5 to 25 µl in 1 µl steps on request

Accuracy ±1.2%

Precision ±0.8%

Dispensing Speed 90 sec/plate (single channel, 96 well plate, 200 µl/well) 14sec/plate (8-channel manifold, 96-well plate) 18 sec/plate (384-well plate, 40 µl/well)

Dispensing Modes Row, column, serpentine (single-tip only)

Number of Plates up to 6 plates

Plate Formats 12, 24, 48, 96 and 384 well for single tip, other formats userprogrammable 96 and 384-well for manifold

Plate Height 10 up to 46 mm with manifold, user adjustable

Display Alphanumeric LCD, 2 x 20 characters

Number of Programs 25

Power 85 - 260 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 50 W

Computer Interface RS-232

Catalog No. $ ProductBS4 68-3424 Call FlexiSpense 6 Auto Dispenser with Single Tip

BS4 68-3425 Call FlexiSpense 6 Auto Dispenser with 8-ChannelManifold

The FlexiSpense 2 is the answerto an increasing demand for anautomated and affordable dis-penser for 96 and 384-wellmicroplates. Open access fromtwo sides makes the Flexispense2 very robot-friendly.

High accuracy and precision,low dead volume and easy pro-gramming makes theFlexiSpense the ideal solutionfor all dispensing applications.

FlexiSpense 2 Auto Dispenser

• The fast and flexible dual-plate dispenser for96 and 384-well plates

• Height-adjustable manifold - deep-well aswell as low-profilemicroplates can be used

• Low dead volume andpump-back capability -save expensive reagents

• Long life piston pump -high precision over lifetime, no maintenancerequired

• Flexible dispensing patterns - start and stopposition as well asommited columns can beprogrammed

• Easy operation and programming - user dialog in four languages

• Complete inert liquidpath - only PTFE andceramic in contact withliquid

• High dispensing speed -requires less than 14seconds for a 96-wellplate and 20 seconds fora 384-well plate

SpecificationsVolume Range 5 µl to 2 ml

Volume Increments 10 µl as standard, other volumes on request

Accuracy ±1.5 %

Precision ±5 %

Dispensing Speed 14 sec/plate (96 well plate, 100 µl/well) 18 sec/plate (384-well plate, 25 µl/well)

Number of Plates 2

Plate Formats 96 and 384 well

Display Alphanumeric LCD, 2x20 characters

Number of Programs 30

Power 85 - 260 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 50 W

Computer Interface RS-232

Catalog No. $ ProductBS4 68-3426 Call FlexiSpense 2 Auto Dispenser

NEW NEW


Molecular Biology

Hybridization Products

This unique product is used primarily for in-situ and microarray hybridization. Its unique air-tight slide chamber maintains humidity in the chamber so researchers do not have to sealslide cover slips prior to hybridization. This saves considerable time and mess and makes thisoperation more efficient. It is supplied with an aluminum tray and stainless steel sliced rackfor up to 20 – 1 x 3 inch slides; can also accommodate various other sizes.

Applications:

• Ideal for microarray hybridization; in situ hybridization

• Single temperature microscope slideincubation procedures

• Immunohistochemistry procedures

• Slide warming

Features:

• Unique airtight slide chamber maintains humidity in the chamberso researchers do not have to sealslide cover slips prior to hybridization

• Aluminum tray provides good heatconductivity and heat retention

• Humidity is maintained by adding asmall amount of hybridization solution to the tray

• PID temperature controller for rapidheat up and temperature stability

• Reduce hybridization time; no needto wait for messy plastic containersand paper towels to come up totemperature

• Polycarbonate slide holder allows upto 18 slides to be loaded at once;loaded slide holder is then placed inthe chamber loaded at once; loadedslide holder is then placed in thechamber 3in. slides; can alsoaccommodate various other sizes

InSlide Out™

SpecificationsDimensions

Overall 45.7 x 45.1 x 15.2cm (18 x 17.75 x 6 in)Tray 19.4 x 29.5 x 1.9cm (7.5 x 11.5 x 0.75 in)

Height Above Stainless Steel

Rack 9.5mm (0.25 in)

Net Weight 9.5kg (21 lb)

Shipping Weight 10.9kg (24 lb)

Capacity:Stainless Steel Rack 20 – 1 x 3 in slidesorvariousother sizesPlastic Slide Holder 18 – 1 x 3 in slides only

Temperature Range Ambient +10°C to 75°C

Temperature Setting Range 0°C to 75°C

Display Resolution 0.1°C

Temperature Setting/Display: PID/LEDStability ±0.2°CAccuracy ±1°C at 65°C

Heat Up Time: Ambient to 50°CChamber 20 minutesTray 25 minutes

Maximum Relative Humidity: 80%241000 115 VAC; 50/60Hz; 155 W241000-2 230 VAC; 50/60Hz; 155 W (CE)

Catalog No. $ ProductBS4 72-4906 2,998.00 InSlide Out, 115VAC, 50/60 Hz, 155 W

BS4 72-4907 3,298.00 InSlide Out, 230VAC, 50/60 Hz, 155 W (CE)

NEW


Spec

ializ

ed T

ools

For

Bio

rese

arch

Hybridization ProductsThe Big SHOT

Harvard Apparatus is proud tointroduce the new Big SHOT PlateRotator with a modified carouselthat holds our 96-Well EquilibriumDialysis Plates, see page N42. Thisnew carousel can hold up to 8plates, providing high throughputprocessing of dialysis samples. Forcustomers already owning a BigSHOT Oven, we offer the carouselseparately and it can be userinstalled. This new oven providesthe optimal temperature (37˚C)while rotating the plates at thedesired speed required for yoursamples. This unit is only suppliedwith the carousel.

The Standard format Big SHOT isideal for both southern and north-

ern blotting processes, as well as pre-hybridization and stringency washes.

It has the capacity for ten 35 mm diameter x 300 mm or twenty 35 mm diameter x 150mm glass bottles. The oven has a PID temperature controller for rapid heat up andexcellent temperature stability. The maximum temperature of 100°C is sustained withforced air convection. It has a small footprint which is only 40 cm (16 in) wide and anoptimal fixed rotation speed of 7 RPM.

The Big SHOT is extremely flexible and can be used for washes and 50 ml tubes. It hasexcellent performance at a very affordable price. Another advantage is the offsetcarousels which ensures coverage of membranes.

The standard oven is supplied with two 35 x 300 mm bottles and a stainless steel drippan. There is also a two year warranty on parts and workmanship.

These accessories are available for the Big SHOT hybridization oven:

• Rocker Platform for dishes or other flat vessels

• Carousel for thirty 50 ml conical centrifuge tubes

• Nylon mesh spacers

• Glass hybridization bottles

Catalog No. $ ProductBS4 74-2308 3,050.00 Big SHOT with Modified Carousel for

96-Well Equilibrium Dialysis Plates,115 VAC, 60 Hz

BS4 72-4909 468.00 Modified Carousel Only (for customerwho already own a Big SHOTHybridization Oven)

BS4 68-0770 2,634.00 Standard Big SHOT HybridizationOven, 115 VAC, 60 Hz

BS4 68-0771 2,895.00 Standard Big SHOT HybridizationOven, 230 VAC, 50/60 Hz, CE

BS4 68-0772 282.00 Rocker Platform

BS4 68-0773 275.00 Carousel for Thirty 50 ml ConicalCentrifuge Tubes

BS4 68-0774 127.00 Glass Hybridization Bottles, 35 x 300mm, pkg. of 2




BS4 68-0778 43.00 Nylon Mesh, 23 x 23 mm, pkg. of 5


SpecificationsBig SHOT:

Power 115 VAC, 60 Hz or 230 VAC, 50 Hz; 230 W

Capacity:10 Bottles 35 x 300 mm (1.4 x 11.8 in)20 Bottles 35 x 150 mm (1.4 x 5.9 in)

Temperature Range:Minimum Ambient +10°CMaximum 100°C

Stability ±0.1°C

Accuracy ±0.5°C

Speed 6 to 7 RPM fixed speed

Heat-up Rate Ambient to 65°C in 25 min

Temp. Controller Type Programmable PID with LED Display

Dimensions, H x W x D:Exterior 43.2 x 40 x 47 cm (17 x 15.75 x 18.5 in)Interior 24.1 x 33.7 x 24.8 cm (9.75 x 13.25 x 9.5 in)

Net Weight 18 kg (38 lbs)

Shipping Weight 19 kg (43 lbs)

Modified Carousel:Capacity Holds up to Eight 96-Well Equilibrium, Dialysis

Plates

Standard Rocker Platform:

Dimensions, W x D 28 x 21.5 cm (11 x 8.5 in)

Weight Capacity 5 kg (11 lb) centered

Speed Same as rotation rate of incubator

Angle 16° or 20°

NEW

• NEW Carousel holds 8 of our 96-Well Equilibrium Dialysis Plates!

• Provides high throughput

• Both rotates and maintains optimaltemperature for equilibrium dialysis

• Standard Big SHOT is ideal for:- Southern and northern blotting

processes- Pre-hybridization- Stringency washes

• Holds up to twenty 25 x 150 mmbottles

• Small footprint, only 40 cm wide

• Fast heat up, up to 100°C

• Excellent temperature stability

• Two-year warranty

BS4 74-2308 Big SHOT withcarousel for 96-well EquilibriumDialyzer plates

For our 96-Well Equilibrium Dialyzer,see page N42.


Molecular Biology

Hybridization ProductsLittle SHOT Hybridization Oven

The Little SHOT is ideal for both southern and northern blottingprocesses, as well as pre-hybridization and stringency washes.

It has the capacity for four 35 mm diameter x 300 mm or eight 35 mmdiameter x 150 mm glass bottles. The oven has a PID temperature controller for rapid heat up and excellent temperature stability. The maximum temperature of 75°C is obtained with forced air convection. The lift of the lid has a ‘trap door’ which minimizes heatloss while inserting or removing bottles. The fixed rotation speed isoptimal at 7 RPM.

The Little SHOT is extremely flexible and can be used for washes and50 ml tubes. It has excellent performance at a very affordable price.Another advantage is the offset carousels which ensure coverage ofmembranes. It has a small footprint measuring only 22 cm wide.

The Little SHOT comes supplied with a stainless steel drip pan. Thereis also a two year warranty on parts and workmanship.

These accessories are available for the Little SHOT hybridization oven:

• Carousel for eight 50 ml conical centrifuge tubes

• Nylon mesh spacers

• Glass hybridization bottles

• Ideal for:

- Southern and northern blotting processes

- Pre-hybridization

- Stringency washes

• Holds up to eight 35 x 150 mm bottles

• Small footprint, only 22 cm wide

• Fast heat up to 75°C

• Excellent temperature stability


BS4 68-0780 Little SHOT

S.H.O.T. is an acronym for Simple Hybridization Oven Technology

Catalog No. $ ProductBS4 68-0780 2,217.00 Little SHOT Hybridization Oven, 115 VAC, 60 Hz

BS4 68-0781 2,434.00 Little SHOT Hybridization Oven, 230 VAC, 50/60 Hz, CE

BS4 68-0782 234.00 Carousel for Eight 50 ml Conical Centrifuge Tubes

BS4 68-0774 127.00 Glass Hybridization Bottles, 35 x 300 mm, pkg. of 2






SpecificationsPower 115 VAC, 60 Hz or 230 VAC, 50 Hz; 230 W

Capacity:4 Bottles 35 x 300 mm (1.4 x 11.8 in)8 Bottles 35 x 150 mm (1.4 x 5.9 in)

Temperature Range:Minimum Ambient +10°CMaximum 75°C

Stability ±0.1°C

Accuracy ±0.5°C

Speed 6 to 7 RPM fixed speed

Heat-Up Rate Ambient to 65°C in 23 min

Temp. Controller Type Programmable PID with LED Display

Dimensions, H x W x D:Exterior 30.5 x 21.6 x 52.1 cm (12 x 8.5 x 20.5 in)Interior 22.2 x 17.1 x 32.4 cm (8.75 x 6.75 x 12.75 in)

Net Weight 9.5 kg (21 lbs)

Shipping Weight 11.8 kg (26 lbs)


Spec

ializ

ed T

ools

For

Bio

rese

arch

Hybridization ProductsBambino™ Hybridization Oven

BS4 68-0783Bambino

Hybridization Oven

BS4 68-0785Shake ‘N’ Bake

Hybridization Oven

The Shake ‘N’ Bake performshybridization and wash proce-dures for scientists that prefer touse heat sealed bags andTupperware® or Rubbermaid®

dishes. Capable of conventionalincubations with or withoutrocking motion.

Three removable shelves, eachcapable of holding blots of up to 20 x 20 cm are supplied and agasket sealed metal and acrylicplastic see through door. The

PID controller is also featured for easy temperature selection and sta-bility along with an adjustable rocking speed from 8 to 25 strokes perminute. The self contained rocking mechanism is less messy than ashaking water bath and a very small footprint which conserves benchspace is another Shake ‘N’ Bake advantage. Three removable traysare supplied with this unit.

The Bambino performs nucleicacid hybridization procedures in 50 ml conical centrifuge tubesand westerns at ambient temper-ature or in a cold room.

A PID controller is featured forrapid heat up and superior sta-bility. The forced air convectionprovides excellent uniformity.There is also less than 0.4 cu ftsize which fits in virtually any lablocation. The Bambino holds

four 50 ml conical centrifuge tubes.*

Because of the Bambino compact size, it saves space and is easy totransport between labs. Performing hybridization in disposable ves-sels is convenient and time saving. Also this hybridization oven isextremely budget friendly.

• Ideal for nucleic acidhybridization proceduresin 50 ml conical centrifugal tubes

• Compact size, only 25 cm wide

• Advanced PID temperature controller

• Budget friendly


• Ideal for hybridization and wash procedures

• Accommodates heatsealed bags, Tupperware®

or Rubbermaid® containers

• Gentle rocking motion isperfect for washes andhybridizations

• Small footprint savesbench space


Specifications*Power 115 VAC, 60 Hz or 230 VAC, 50 Hz; 90 W

Lid 9.5 mm (3/8 lb) Acrylic Plastic

Rotation Speed 6 to 20 rpm

Operating Temperature Ambient +5°C to 80°C

Heat Up Rate Ambient to 70°C in 25 min

Stability ±0.1°C

Accuracy ±0.5°C of average temperature

Dimension, H x W x D 16.2 x 25.4 x 26.7 cm (6.5 x 10 x 10.5 in)

Net Weight 4.4 kg (9.75 lbs)

Shipping Weight 5.9 kg (12.9 lbs)

Catalog No. $ ProductBS4 68-0783 1,804.00 Bambino™ Hybridization Oven, 115 VAC, 60 Hz

BS4 68-0784 1,983.00 Bambino™ Hybridization Oven, 230 VAC, 50/60 Hz

* Note: Please be sure to utilize conical centrifuge tubes which can handle the hybridiza-tion temperatures you need. In general, scientists have found that tubes made from poly-propylene with polyethylene caps provide reliable performance at the elevated tempera-tures used in hybridization.Tubes made from polystyrene are to be avoided.

Specifications*Power 115 VAC, 60 Hz or 230 VAC, 50 Hz; 230 W

Temperature Range Ambient to +5°C to 70°C

Stability:Chamber ±0.5°C at 65°CSample Vessel ±0.25°C at 65°C

Maximum Total 1 kg (2.2 lb)Shelf Load

Dimension, H x W x D:Exterior 41 x 32 x 37 cm (16 x 12.25 x 14.5 in)Interior 27 x 29 x 29 cm (10.25 x 11.5 x 11.5 in)Tray 1.3 x 22 x 20 cm (0.5 x 8.5 x 8 in)

Net Weight 11 kg (24 lbs)

Shipping Weight 12.9 kg (28 lbs)

Catalog No. $ ProductBS4 68-0785 2,724.00 Shake ‘N’ Bake Hybridization Oven, 115 VAC, 60 Hz

BS4 68-0786 2,997.00 Shake ‘N’ Bake Hybridization Oven, 230 VAC, 50 Hz

Shake ‘N’ Bake Hybridization Oven

BS4 N for non $ pdf · 2016. 2. 9. · Protein-2, a Calcium-sensitive Modulator of Photoreceptor...

Documents

Transcript of BS4 N for non $ pdf · 2016. 2. 9. · Protein-2, a Calcium-sensitive Modulator of Photoreceptor...